TM

MX-2100/2104
Data, Voice, Fax and LAN Integrating
Modular Multiplexer
Installation and Operation Manual

NOTICE

This manual contains information that is proprietary to MICROWAVE DATA SYSTEMS, INC.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written
approval by MICROWAVE DATA SYSTEMS, INC.

No representation or warranties for fitness for any purpose other than what is specifically
mentioned in this manual is made either by MICROWAVE DATA SYSTEMS, INC. or its
agents.

MICROWAVE DATA SYSTEMS, INC. reserves the right to revise this publication and make
changes without obligation to notify any person of such revisions or changes.

For further information contact MICROWAVE DATA SYSTEMS, INC. at the address below or
contact your local distributor.

MICROWAVE DATA SYSTEMS, INC.

175 SCIENCE PARKWAY
ROCHESTER, NY 14620-4261 U.S.A.

Tel: General Business: +1 (716) 242-9600

Customer Service: +1 (800) 474-0964
Fax All Services: +1 (716) 242-9620
Internet E-mail: techsupport@[Link]
World Wide Web: [Link] [Link]

2002 Microwave Data Systems, Inc. Pub. No. 8011130000

 SAFETY WARNINGS
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of this
product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment,
maintenance or repairs to this instrument. No adjustment, maintenance or repairs should be
performed by either the operator or the user.
WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED BY
MICROWAVE DATA SYSTEMS, INC.
A. MICROWAVE DATA SYSTEMS, INC. (MDS) products, except as stated otherwise in an
applicable price list, are warranted against defects in workmanship and material for a period
of one (1) year from date of delivery as evidenced by MDS's packing slip or other
transportation receipt.
B. MDS’s sole responsibility under this warranty shall be to either repair or replace, at its
option, any component which fails during the applicable warranty period because of a defect
in workmanship and material, provided PURCHASER has promptly reported same to MDS
in writing. All replaced Products or parts shall become MDS's property.
C. MDS will honor the warranty at MDS's repair facility in Rochester, New York. It is
PURCHASER's responsibility to return, at its expense, the allegedly defective Product to
MDS. PURCHASER must obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number and
shipping instructions from MDS prior to returning any Product under warranty.
Transportation charges for the return of the Product to PURCHASER shall be paid by MDS
within the United States. For all other locations, the warranty excludes all costs of shipping,
customs clearance and other related charges. If MDS determines that the Product is not
defective within the terms of this warranty, PURCHASER shall pay MDS all costs of
handling, transportation and repairs at the then prevailing repair rates.
D. All the above warranties are contingent upon proper use of the Product. These warranties
will not apply (i) if adjustment, repair or parts replacement is required because of accident,
unusual physical, electrical or electromagnetic stress, neglect, misuse, failure of electric
power, environmental controls, transportation, not maintained in accordance with MDS
specifications, or abuses other than ordinary use; (ii) if the Product has been modified by
PURCHASER or has been repaired or altered outside MDS's repair facility, unless MDS
specifically authorizes such repairs or alterations; (iii) where MDS serial numbers, warranty
data or quality assurance decals have been removed or altered.
E. MDS also reserves the right to make product improvements without incurring any obligation
or liability to make the same changes in Products previously manufactured or purchased. In
no event shall MDS be liable for any breach of warranty in an amount exceeding the net
selling price of any defective Product. No person, including any dealer, agent or
representative of MDS is authorized to assume for MDS any other liability on its behalf
except as set forth herein. Non-payment of any invoice rendered within the stated payment
terms automatically cancels any warranty or guarantee stated or implied. If any payment is
due MDS for services performed hereunder, it shall be subject to the same payment terms as
the original purchase.
F. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES STATED HEREIN, MDS DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES ON PRODUCTS FURNISHED HEREUNDER, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS; and the stated express warranties are in lieu of all obligations or liabilities
on the part of MDS arising out of or in connection with the performance of the Products.
 WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED BY OTHERS
A. For products not manufactured by MDS, the original manufacturer's warranty shall be
assigned to PURCHASER to the extent permitted and is in lieu of any other warranty,
expressed or implied.
B. For warranty information on a specific product, a written request should be made to MDS.

FCC-15 User Information

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to the radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
 Preface
Foreword
This manual describes the MX-2100/2104 family of data, voice, fax and
LAN integrating modular multiplexers. The manual covers the general
system characteristics, presents typical system applications, and provides
installation, operating procedure and configuration information for the
modules that are part of the basic MX-2100/2104 system configuration.
This release of the manual covers the characteristics of equipment
equipped with the Common Logic Module running software version 3.1
and above.

Manual Organization
This manual is organized as follows:
Chapter 1. General Information
presents the main features and typical applications of the MX-2100/2104
family, describes the various equipment versions, and lists the technical
characteristics of the MX-2100/2104 systems.

Chapter 2. Installation
provides detailed installation and operation instructions for MX-2100/2104
systems.

Chapter 3. Configuring MX-2100

provides general instructions for using and managing MX-2100/2104
systems by means of terminals and Telnet hosts.

Chapter 4. Operation
provides typical configuration procedures for MX-2100/2104 systems.

Chapter 5. Diagnostics
describes the diagnostic and performance monitoring functions supported
by MX-2100/2104 systems.

Appendix A. Connection Data

provides connection data for the basic modules used in the MX-2100/2104
system.

Appendix B. Alarms
explains the alarms and configuration error messages generated by the
MX-2100/2104 system.
 Appendix C. SNMP Management
describes the SNMP and IP environments, and provides background
information regarding the handling of management traffic.

Appendix D. Software Download

provides instructions for the installation of new software releases.

Appendix E. Configuration Parameters

lists the various parameters that can be used to configure MX-2100/2104.

Appendix F. Command Set Description

describes MX-2100/2104 commands.

Conventions
Note A note draws attention to a general rule for a procedure, or to exceptions to
a rule.

Caution A caution warns of possible damage to the equipment if a procedure is not

followed correctly.

A warning alerts to the presence of important operating and maintenance

(servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the equipment. If
these instructions are not followed exactly, bodily injury may occur.
Warning

Related Documentation
In addition to this system manual, separate Installation and Operation
Manuals are available for each of the modules that are used in the
MX-2100/2104 systems. Each module’s Installation and Operation Manual
presents the technical characteristics, applications and specific
configuration information for that module.
Note that when the module manual refers to the respective MX-2000 or
MX-2004 system Installation and Operation Manual, refer to the
corresponding section of this system manual.
Quick Start Guide
This Quick Start Guide is a brief step by step guide to setting up and using your
MX-2100. It is a supplement to the MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation
Manual.

1. Installing MX-2100
To install MX-2100 (for more detailed instructions refer to the System Installation
and Setup chapter):
1. Unpack the equipment.
2. Check that your site conforms to the equipment requirements (refer to Site
Requirements in the System Installation and Setup chapter).
3. Check the power supply rating considerations (refer to Power Supply Rating
Considerations in the System Installation and Setup chapter).
4. Install the MX-2100 enclosure (refer to Installation and Setup in the System
Installation and Setup chapter).
5. Install an additional KPS module if necessary (refer to Installation and Setup in
the System Installation and Setup chapter).
6. Install the KM-Ringer module (refer to Installation and Setup in the System
Installation and Setup chapter).
7. Connect the power cable, the KM-Ringer module, the Supervisory Port (KCL.2
module), the KML module, option modules and I/O modules (refer to
Interfaces and Connections in the System Installation and Setup chapter).
8. Set the IP address using the DEF AGENT (refer to DEF AGENT in the Command
Set Description appendix).

2. Operating MX-2100
To operate MX-2100 (for more detailed instructions refer to Operating Instructions
in the Operation chapter):
1. If MX-2100 includes a KM-Ringer module, set the KM-Ringer module power
switch to OFF.
2. Turn on MX-2100 by setting the ON/OFF switches (on the rear panels) to ON.
3. Check the front-panel indications (refer to Operating Instructions in the
Operation chapter).

Operating MX-2100 1
Quick Start Guide MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

4. If MX-2100 includes a KM-Ringer module, turn it on by setting its POWER

switch to ON. Verify that the RING VOLTAGE and BATTERY VOLTAGE
indicators light.
5. Check the MX-2100 configuration (refer to Checking Current Operating
Configuration in the Operation chapter).
6. Check the normal MX-2100 operating indications (refer to Normal Indications
in the Operation chapter).
7. MX-2100 has diagnostic functions which can be used to test the proper
operation of the MX-2100 system and identify the faulty components. For an
explanation of the MX-2100 diagnostic functions refer to the Diagnostics
chapter.
8. Turn off MX-2100 as follows:
- If MX-2100 includes a KM-Ringer module, then turn off the
KM-Ringer before MX-2100.
- For the MX-2100’s KPS modules and MX-2104,
set the ON/OFF switches (on the rear panels) to OFF.

3. Setting-Up the Local Configuration

To set-up the MX-2100 local configuration (for more detailed information refer to
Setting Configuration Parameters in the Configuring MX-2100 chapter):
1. Set the system parameters refer to Configuring the System Parameters in the
Configuring MX-2100 chapter).
2. Select the main link parameters (refer to Configuring the Main Link Parameters
in the Configuring MX-2100 chapter).
3. Select the channel parameters (refer to Configuring the Channel Parameters in
the Configuring MX-2100 chapter).

4. Controlling MX-2100 from a Supervisory Port

To control MX-2100 from a supervisory port (for more detailed instructions refer to
Operating Instructions in the Operation chapter):
1. Start a session for MX-2100 (refer to Starting a Session - Single MX-2100 and
Starting a Session - Multiple MX-2100 in the Operation chapter).
2. Type the desired commands after the working prompt and press Enter to
execute the command. Refer to the Command Set Description appendix for a
list of commands available.
3. End the control session by typing EXIT. You can now control MX-2100 from
the front panel (refer to General Front Panel Operating Instructions in the
Configuring MX-2100 chapter).

2 Controlling MX-2100 from a Supervisory Port

 Contents

Chapter 1 General Information

1.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................1-1
Main System Features ..............................................................................................1-1
System Supervision and Configuration......................................................................1-4
Diagnostic Capabilities.............................................................................................1-6
1.2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................1-6
MX-2100, General Description ................................................................................1-6
MX-2100 Rear Panel................................................................................................1-7
MX-2100 Front Panel...............................................................................................1-8
MX-2104, General Description ................................................................................1-8
MX-2104 Rear Panel................................................................................................1-9
MX-2104 Front Panel.............................................................................................1-10
Common Logic Modules........................................................................................1-10
Main Link Modules ................................................................................................1-10
Power Supply Modules ..........................................................................................1-11
Option Modules (not for MX-2104)........................................................................1-12
I/O Modules ..........................................................................................................1-12
1.3 APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS.........................................................................................1-16
Basic MX-2100 System...........................................................................................1-16
Redundancy (not for MX-2104)..............................................................................1-20
Dual Link Operation (not for MX-2104) .................................................................1-22
Priority Bumping (not for MX-2104) .......................................................................1-27
Switched Backup Operation (not for MX-2104) ......................................................1-28
Switch Mode .........................................................................................................1-30
System Management..............................................................................................1-32
System Timing Considerations................................................................................1-38
Data Channel Clock Modes ...................................................................................1-45
Timing Modes of ISDN Channels ...........................................................................1-46
Sub Link Timing.....................................................................................................1-47
Main Link Interface Characteristics .........................................................................1-47
1.4 I/O MODULE APPLICATIONS .............................................................................................1-50
1.5 TECHNICAL SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................1-50

Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 SITE REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITES...............................................................................2-2
Input Power Requirements.......................................................................................2-2
Grounding ...............................................................................................................2-2
Channel Connection Considerations ........................................................................2-3
Front and Rear Panel Clearance ...............................................................................2-3
Ambient Requirements ............................................................................................2-3
Electromagnetic Compatibility Considerations ..........................................................2-3
Current and Power Requirements of MX-2100 Power Supply Modules.....................2-3
Current and Power Capabilities of MX-2100 Power Supply Modules ........................2-6
Ratings of Ring and Feed Voltage Supplies................................................................2-7
2.3 EQUIPMENT NEEDED..........................................................................................................2-8
Terminal Characteristics ...........................................................................................2-8
Software Requirements ............................................................................................2-8

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual i

Table of Contents

Supervisory Port Interface Characteristics .................................................................2-8

Connection of Supervision Terminal.........................................................................2-9
2.4 PACKAGE CONTENTS........................................................................................................2-11
2.5 INSTALLATION AND SETUP OF MX-2100.............................................................................2-12
MX-2100 ...............................................................................................................2-12
MX-2104 ...............................................................................................................2-12
KPS Module...........................................................................................................2-13
KCL.2 Module .......................................................................................................2-14
2.6 INTERFACES AND CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................2-16
KPS Module...........................................................................................................2-16
KCL.2 Module .......................................................................................................2-17
Connections to KML, Options, I/O Modules, and Ringers .......................................2-19
MX-2104 ...............................................................................................................2-19
2.7 INITIAL SETUP AND CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................2-21

Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100

3.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 CONTROL OF MX-2100 OPERATION ...................................................................................3-1
General ...................................................................................................................3-1
Front Panel Operating Instructions ...........................................................................3-2
Front Panel Menu ....................................................................................................3-2
3.3 SETTING CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ................................................................................3-7
General Configuration Procedure.............................................................................3-7
Configuring the System Parameters ..........................................................................3-9
Configuring the Main Link Parameters....................................................................3-11
Configuring the Channel Parameters ......................................................................3-11
Configuring the SP Parameters .................................................................................3-12

Chapter 4 Operation
4.1 GENERAL..........................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 MX-2100 SUPERVISION LANGUAGE .....................................................................................4-1
Command Language Syntax .....................................................................................4-1
Command Options ..................................................................................................4-2
Command Protocol..................................................................................................4-3
Index of Commands ................................................................................................4-4
4.3 FRONT PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ..........................................................................4-7
Organization of MX-2100 Display ............................................................................4-9
Using the Front Panel Push-buttons..........................................................................4-9
Checking Current Operating Configuration.............................................................4-10
Normal Indications ................................................................................................4-12
4.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ...............................................................................................4-12
Supervision Terminal .............................................................................................4-12
Front Panel ............................................................................................................4-16

Chapter 5 Diagnostics
5.1 ALARMS ...........................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 DIAGNOSTIC TESTS ............................................................................................................5-1
MX-2100 TEST OPTIONS, General ..........................................................................5-1
Test Options Operating Instructions .........................................................................5-3
MX-2100 Diagnostic Functions, General ..................................................................5-7
Main Link Loops ......................................................................................................5-8
I/O Module Loops and Tests ..................................................................................5-12

ii MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

 Table of Contents

Appendix A Connection Data

A.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... A-1
A.2 SUPERVISORY PORT CONNECTOR ...................................................................................... A-1
A.3 MNG CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................ A-3
A.4 ALARM RELAY CONNECTOR .............................................................................................. A-4
A.5 DC POWER INPUT CONNECTOR ....................................................................................... A-4

Appendix B Alarms
B.1 ALARM MESSAGES .............................................................................................................B-1
B.2 CONFIGURATION ERROR MESSAGES ...................................................................................B-10

Appendix C SNMP Management

C.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................ C-1
C.2 SNMP ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................................................... C-1
General .................................................................................................................. C-1
SNMP Principles ..................................................................................................... C-1
Management Domains Under SNMP ...................................................................... C-3
C.3 IP ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................ C-4
General .................................................................................................................. C-4
IP Environment ....................................................................................................... C-5
Automatic IP Traffic Routing.................................................................................... C-6
C.4 SNMP TRAPS .................................................................................................................. C-8

Appendix D Software Download

D.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... D-1
D.2 COLD (LOCAL) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................................... D-1
Preparations ........................................................................................................... D-1
Downloading Procedure - MX-2100 with Single KCL.2............................................ D-2
D.3 WARM INSTALLATION (UPGRADING) PROCEDURE - WINDOWS-BASED STATIONS ..................... D-3
Preparations ........................................................................................................... D-3
Downloading Procedure ......................................................................................... D-3

Appendix E Configuration Parameters

E.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... E-1
System Configuration Parameters ............................................................................. E-1
Main Link Configuration Parameters......................................................................... E-3
Supervisory Port Configuration Parameters ............................................................... E-7

Appendix F Command Set Description

F.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... F-1
F.2 COMMANDS ..................................................................................................................... F-2
BYE ......................................................................................................................... F-2
CLR ALM................................................................................................................. F-2
CLR LOOP .............................................................................................................. F-3
CLR MONITOR ....................................................................................................... F-4
CONNECT SWITCH ................................................................................................ F-4
DATE....................................................................................................................... F-5
DEF AGENDA.......................................................................................................... F-6
DEF AGENT............................................................................................................. F-7

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual iii

Table of Contents

DEF ALM DEBOUNCE............................................................................................. F-9

DEF CALL................................................................................................................ F-9
DEF CH................................................................................................................. F-12
DEF CON .............................................................................................................. F-12
DEF DB FLIP.......................................................................................................... F-14
DEF DP ................................................................................................................. F-15
DEF FRAME........................................................................................................... F-17
DEF MANAGER LIST.............................................................................................. F-18
DEF ML ................................................................................................................. F-19
DEF ML CALL........................................................................................................ F-20
DEF NAME ............................................................................................................ F-24
DEF NODE............................................................................................................ F-24
DEF NP ................................................................................................................. F-25
DEF PWD.............................................................................................................. F-26
DEF ROUTE .......................................................................................................... F-27
DEF SP .................................................................................................................. F-28
DEF SYS................................................................................................................. F-29
DISCONNECT SWITCH ........................................................................................ F-32
DSP AGENT .......................................................................................................... F-33
DSP ALM............................................................................................................... F-34
DSP BERT.............................................................................................................. F-34
DSP CH CON........................................................................................................ F-35
DSP FLIP ............................................................................................................... F-36
DSP HDR TST ....................................................................................................... F-37
DSP MANAGER LIST ............................................................................................. F-37
DSP KVF5 or DSP PBX........................................................................................... F-38
DSP KVF6.............................................................................................................. F-39
DSP SIGNALING or DSP SIG ................................................................................. F-40
DSP PRBS_INJ ....................................................................................................... F-40
DSP REM AGENT .................................................................................................. F-41
DSP REV................................................................................................................ F-41
DSP ST FRAME ...................................................................................................... F-42
DSP ST ML ............................................................................................................ F-44
DSP ST SLOT......................................................................................................... F-46
DSP ST SYS............................................................................................................ F-48
EDIT DB ................................................................................................................ F-50
EXIT....................................................................................................................... F-50
F............................................................................................................................ F-51
FLIP ML................................................................................................................. F-51
HELP ..................................................................................................................... F-52
INIT DB................................................................................................................. F-52
INIT F.................................................................................................................... F-53
LOAD DB 1\2........................................................................................................ F-54
LOAD IO............................................................................................................... F-54
LOOP.................................................................................................................... F-55
ML RECOVERY ...................................................................................................... F-56
MONITOR ............................................................................................................ F-56
REBUILD FRAME................................................................................................... F-56
RESET LOC............................................................................................................ F-57
RESET IO............................................................................................................... F-57
RESET ML.............................................................................................................. F-57
TIME ..................................................................................................................... F-58
UPDATE DB 1\2 .................................................................................................... F-58

iv MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

 Table of Contents

List of Figures
Figure 1-1. MX-2100 System Applications.......................................................................... 1-2
Figure 1-2. “V” Configuration ............................................................................................ 1-5
Figure 1-3. MX-2100 Enclosure with Modules, General View............................................. 1-7
Figure 1-4. MX-2100 Enclosure, Rear View........................................................................ 1-8
Figure 1-5. MX-2100 Enclosure Front Panel ....................................................................... 1-8
Figure 1-6 MX-2104 Enclosure, General View................................................................... 1-9
Figure 1-7. MX-2104 Enclosure, Rear View........................................................................ 1-9
Figure 1-8. MX-2104 Enclosure Front Panel ..................................................................... 1-10
Figure 1-9. Basic MX-2100 System Structure.................................................................... 1-16
Figure 1-10. Redundant MX-2100 System ....................................................................... 1-21
Figure 1-11. Dual Link, High Capacity Point-to-Point Application .................................... 1-22
Figure 1-12. Dual Link System, Independent Link Application ......................................... 1-23
Figure 1-13. Basic Bypassing Configuration ...................................................................... 1-24
Figure 1-14. Bypassing Parameters................................................................................... 1-25
Figure 1-15. Typical Bypassing Application ...................................................................... 1-26
Figure 1-16. Typical KDI Bypassing and Multidrop Application ........................................ 1-27
Figure 1-17. Typical Switched Backup Configuration ....................................................... 1-29
Figure 1-18. Typical ISDN Switched Backup Application ................................................. 1-30
Figure 1-19. Single Switch Mode ..................................................................................... 1-31
Figure 1-20. Dual Switch Mode ....................................................................................... 1-31
Figure 1-21. Single and Switch Mode............................................................................... 1-32
Figure 1-22. Remote Management: In-Band .................................................................... 1-34
Figure 1-23. Using the Data Frame .................................................................................. 1-34
Figure 1-24. Remote Management: Out-of-Band............................................................. 1-35
Figure 1-25. Local Neighbor Management ....................................................................... 1-36
Figure 1-26. Remote Neighbor Management ................................................................... 1-36
Figure 1-27. Network Configurations Using DTE Timing .................................................. 1-39
Figure 1-28. Typical External DCE Timing Application ..................................................... 1-41
Figure 1-29. Typical DCE (KML.1–4) Timing Application.................................................. 1-42
Figure 1-30. Typical Internal Timing Mode Application.................................................... 1-42
Figure 1-31. Typical Loopback Timing Application........................................................... 1-43
Figure 1-32. Typical DCE from I/O Timing Mode Application (KML.7, KML.8, KML.F) .... 1-43
Figure 1-33. Typical DCE from ML Timing Mode Application (KML.7, KML.8, KML.F) ..... 1-44
Figure 1-34. Clock Mode 1 (DCE) .................................................................................... 1-45
Figure 1-35. Clock Mode 2 (DTE1) .................................................................................. 1-45
Figure 1-36. Clock Mode 3 (DTE2) .................................................................................. 1-46

Figure 2-1. Attachment of Brackets .................................................................................. 2-12

Figure 2-2. Typical KPS Module, Location of Internal Jumper........................................... 2-13
Figure 2-3. Module KCL.2, Internal Switch and Jumpers .................................................. 2-14
Figure 2-4. KPS Modules, Rear Panels.............................................................................. 2-17
Figure 2-5. Module KCL.2, Rear Panel ............................................................................. 2-18
Figure 2-6. MX-2104 Enclosure, Typical Rear View.......................................................... 2-19

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual v

Table of Contents

Figure 3-1. Organization of Front Panel Menu (Part I) ........................................................ 3-4

Figure 3-2. Organization of Front Panel Menu (Part II) ....................................................... 3-5
Figure 3-3. Organization of Front Panel Menu (Part III) ...................................................... 3-6

Figure 4-1. MX-2100 Front Panel....................................................................................... 4-7

Figure 4-2. MX-2104 Front Panel....................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-3. Indicator Functions .......................................................................................... 4-8

Figure 5-1. Local Main Link Loop, Signal Path.................................................................... 5-9

Figure 5-2. Remote Main Link Loop, Signal Paths ............................................................ 5-10
Figure 5-3. Main Link Modem Loop 3, Signal Path........................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-4. Main Link Modem Loop 2, Signal Path........................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-5. I/O Module, Local Loop on Individual Channel.............................................. 5-13
Figure 5-6. I/O Module, Remote Loop on Individual Channel.......................................... 5-13
Figure 5-7. Voice I/O Module, Test Tone Injection Path................................................... 5-15

Figure C-1. IP Address Classes............................................................................................C-5

Figure C-2. Management System Topology Using Subnetting .............................................C-7

List of Tables
Table 1-1. MX-2100 Multiplexing Data............................................................................ 1-17
Table 1-2. Bandwidth Allocations .................................................................................... 1-19
Table 1-3. Example of Bandwidth Allocations .................................................................. 1-20
Table 1-4. KML.F Fiber-Optic Interface Characteristics .................................................... 1-49

Table 2-1. Power Consumption of MX-2100 Modules ....................................................... 2-4

Table 2-2. Nominal Power Consumption of Power Supply Modules .................................. 2-6
Table 2-3. DCE and DTE Interfacing Mode - Control Lines ................................................ 2-9
Table 2-4. MNG Connector - Control Lines ..................................................................... 2-11
Table 2-5. Module KCL.2, Internal Switch and Jumper Functions..................................... 2-14
Table 2-6. KPS Modules, Rear Panels............................................................................... 2-16
Table 2-7. Module KCL.2, Rear Panel .............................................................................. 2-18
Table 2-8. MX-2104, Rear Panel Components ................................................................. 2-20
Table 2-9. Typical Terminal Control Sequences ............................................................... 2-22

Table 3-1. MX-2100 Front Panel Configuration Parameters................................................ 3-3

Table 3-2. Procedure for Performing Configuration Activity ............................................... 3-8

Table 4-1. General Command Options .............................................................................. 4-2

Table 4-2. MX-2100 Command Set Index.......................................................................... 4-4
Table 4-3. MX-2100 Controls, Connectors, and Indicators ................................................. 4-8
Table 4-4. Instructions for Displaying Current Configuration Parameters .......................... 4-11

vi MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

 Table of Contents

Table 5-1. Deactivating all the Tests................................................................................... 5-3

Table 5-2. Activating / Deactivating the Monitoring of a Selected Channel ......................... 5-4
Table 5-3. Activating / Deactivating a Main Link Loop........................................................ 5-5
Table 5-4. Activating / Deactivating a Channel Loop .......................................................... 5-6

Table A-1. Common Logic Module KCL.2, Supervisory Port Connector Pin Allocations
for DCE Emulation.............................................................................................A-1
Table A-2. Common Logic Module KCL.2, Supervisory Port Connector Pin Allocations
for DTE Emulation .............................................................................................A-2
Table A-3. Common Logic Module KCL.2, MNG Connector Pin Allocations ......................A-3
Table A-4. Alarm Relay Connector Pinout.........................................................................A-4

Table B-1. LCD Alarm Messages ........................................................................................ B-1

Table C-1. IP Address Class................................................................................................C-5

Table E-1. System Parameters ............................................................................................ E-1

Table E-2. Main Link Parameters........................................................................................ E-4
Table E-3. Supervisory Port Parameters .............................................................................. E-7

Table F-1. Call-out Parameters......................................................................................... F-10

Table F-2. Dial-out Parameters ........................................................................................ F-16
Table F-3. Network Parameters....................................................................................... F-26
Table F-4. Terminal Programmed Parameters .................................................................. F-28
Table F-5. System Parameters .......................................................................................... F-30
Table F-6. MX-2100 Default Configuration Used with Supervision Terminal .................... F-53
Table F-7. Codes Used by Typical Terminals.................................................................... F-54

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual vii

Table of Contents

viii MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

 Chapter 1
General Information

1.1 Functional Description

MX-2100/2104 is an advanced, highly versatile user-configurable modular TDM
(Time Division Multiplex) system. The MX-2100/2104 system provides an efficient
and cost-effective method for transmitting data, voice and fax over digital data
services. Access to these services is provided over a variety of standard interfaces
(V.35, RS-530/V.36, RS-232/V.24, X.21, Standard DDS, codirectional G.703,
ISDN, fiber optic, T1, and E1), at data rates ranging from 9.6 to 1536 kbps.
Bandwidth utilization efficiency is 98.5%.
Main System Features
The MX-2100/2104 system can be equipped with various types of input/output
(I/O) modules that provide the required interface for the user data, fax, and voice
channels. The series of I/O modules includes:
• High-speed synchronous data modules operating at a rate of 2.4 through
614.4 kbps – the KHS series of modules
• Low-speed data modules (300 bps to 57.6 kbps or 64 kbps) synchronous and
asynchronous data channels, including statistical multiplexing modules – the
KLS series of modules
• ISDN interface modules – the KHS.U series and KVF.4/S0 series
• 2W and 4W multiple voice channel interface modules that can directly
connect to PBX lines and two-wire telephone sets – the KVC series of modules
• 2W and 4W interface voice/fax low bit rate KVF.4 and KVF.8 modules
• T1 and E1 PBX trunk interface KVF.5 and KVF.6 modules
• Token ring extender module, KTRE
• Ethernet Bridge/Router module, KMBE
• Bypass and multidrop module, KDI (not applicable for MX-2104).

Detailed information on the specific MX-2100 modules can be found in the

separate module Installation and Operation Manuals.
The 3U high MX-2100 unit can be equipped with up to 12 I/O modules. 1U high
MX-2104 unit can be equipped with up to 4 I/O modules.

Functional Description 1-1

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Note In this manual, the generic term MX-2100 is used when the information is
applicable to both MX-2100 and MX-2104 equipment versions. If the information is
applicable to only a particular equipment version, this will be specified.

Figure 1-1 illustrates the basic capabilities of the MX-2100 system.

Network
Management Station

Ethernet
Network

Trunk Tie Lines

PABX Line

Fax

Ethernet Port
KVF.4
KVF.4
-V.35
KVF.5 -RS-530/V.36
KML
KVC.1M -RS-232/V.24
I/O Modules
KVC.1M -X.21
KLS.1 KCL -G.703 Codirectional
KLS.1 -Standard DDS
KLS.1 -ISDN
KLS.2 -E1
KHS.1 -T1
KHS.1 -Fiber-Optic
KVF.4
MX-2100

SP Port
or SLIP
Stat
Mux
Terminal

Modem
SDM
Mux

Supervision Terminal
or TELNET
or SNMP

MX-2100

CAD/CAM

Fax

Figure 1-1. MX-2100 System Applications

1-2 Functional Description

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

The MX-2104 system can be equipped with only one main link. The 3U high
MX-2100 system can be equipped with two main link modules. Two main link
modules in an MX-2100 system, can be used in several ways:
• To provide hot-standby redundancy (backup) for the main link, with automatic or
manual switchover in case one of the links fails. For maximum flexibility, MX-2100
allows the preparation of a different configuration for use on the backup link. The
backup link can also use a switched data circuit. The switched circuit can be
established on a PSTN line, using analog modems, or on an ISDN line using an S
or U interface.
• To provide two independent links from the same MX-2100 enclosure. The two
links can operate at different data rates. The dual-link mode can also be used
for providing the equivalent of hot standby protection to critical data channels
(by enabling the priority bumping feature).
• To provide multidrop and bypass capabilities (using a dedicated KDI module).

In addition to main link redundancy, the MX-2100 system reliability can be further
enhanced by installing an additional power supply unit in the enclosure. The
power supplies share the load current, therefore when one of them fails or its
input voltage is disconnected, the other takes over the full load without
disturbance to MX-2100 operation.
The MX-2100/2104 system provides flexible system timing options, with several
main link, and channel timing modes.
The main link timing modes are DTE, DCE, and external DCE. In the DCE and
external DCE modes, the timing reference source can be selected by the user:
• Internal oscillator
• External (timing locked to one of the data channels)
• The other main link module (provided a KDI module is installed).

In addition to the main timing source, a fallback source can be selected. When the
timing mode is DTE or external DCE, buffers are inserted in the main link signal
paths, to absorb the expected jitter and timing instabilities. Normal buffer size is
±8 bits; for operation over satellite links, the receive buffer size can be increased to
±256 bits.
The timing modes available for the data channels are programmable, thereby
permitting each channel to be configured as either DCE (supplies receive and
transmit clocks to the user's equipment), DTE1 (supplies the receive clock and
accept a transmit clock), or DTE2 (accepts receive and transmit clocks from the
user's equipment), with buffered retiming of the received data. Connection to the
national network and to common-carrier data lines is also supported, with the
external clock selectable as the source for system timing.
For modules with ISDN, T1, E1, and fiber-optic interfaces, a loopback timing
mode is available. This mode enables locking the MX-2100 timing to the accurate
timing provided by the network to which the interface is connected.

Functional Description 1-3

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

System Supervision and Configuration

The MX-2100 system is designed for unattended operation. A complete collection
of operating parameters configures the MX-2100 system and each of its modules.
This collection of operating parameters is determined by a database. This database
is stored in the non-volatile memory of the MX-2100 control module. MX-2100
can store two different databases, and can be configured to switch automatically
between the databases, in accordance with a predetermined daily schedule
("day/night" operation), or to use one of the databases only in case of switching to a
backup link.
MX-2100 supervision and minimal configuration functions can be performed from
its front panel, using three push-buttons and an LCD display. For more detailed
information, refer to Local Management on page 1-33.
MX-2100 stores alarms detected during operation in a buffer. The buffer serving
the front panel LCD can store one alarm of each type. The buffer for alarms to be
sent to a supervision terminal can hold up to 100 alarms. During regular operation,
a front panel indicator lights to indicate if there are any alarms in the alarm buffer.
The local operator can then review the contents of the alarm buffer on the front
panel LCD display, and can delete old alarms related to events that are no longer
present in the system.
In addition to the alarm buffer, the front-panel LED indicators display in real time
the main link and power supply status and alert when test loops are present in the
system. The front panel LED indicators can also be used to monitor on-line a
selected user channel. The monitored functions are transmit and receive data
activity, and the state of the RTS and DCD control lines (or E and M lines for voice
channels).

Local MX-2100 Management

A local MX-2100 can be managed by any of the following:
• MX-2100 front panel using push buttons and an LCD
• ASCII terminal connection to the local MX-2100
• TELNET connection to the local MX-2100. The connection can be via SLIP or
via an Ethernet LAN. The local MX-2100 requires an IP address. For
information on assigning an IP address, refer to the DEF AGENT command in
the Command Set Description appendix.
• SNMP network management station connected to the local MX-2100. The
connection can be via SLIP or via an Ethernet LAN. The local MX-2100
requires an IP address. For information on assigning an IP address, refer to the
DEF AGENT command in the Command Set Description appendix.

Remote MX-2100 Management

A remote MX-2100 can be managed either in-band or out-of-band. For both, the
remote MX-2100 requires an IP address. For information on assigning an IP
address, refer to the DEF AGENT command in the Command Set Description
appendix.

1-4 Functional Description

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

In-Band Management
In-band management of a remote MX-2100 is performed via the local MX-2100
and the data frame. A connection to the local MX-2100 can be made through:
• An Ethernet LAN
• A SLIP connection.

In both cases, management can be performed via TELNET. Some of the bandwidth
of the main link between the two MX-2100s is used to relay the management
information.
In a “V” configuration, any one of the three MX-2100s can be considered the local
MX-2100. The other two MX-2100s can be managed through the local MX-2100.

KCL
Main Link
Remote
MX-2100

A
KCL

Remote
MX-2100
Main Link

KCL
B

Local
MX-2100

Supervision Terminal
or TELNET
or SNMP

Figure 1-2. “V” Configuration

The main link between the local MX-2100 and the remote MX-2100 can also be
used to download software.
Out-of-Band Management
There are several options for managing a remote MX-2100 out-of-band:
• Using a network management station or TELNET over a LAN connected to the
remote MX-2100. The remote MX-2100 requires an IP address. For
information on assigning an IP address, refer to the DEF AGENT command in
the Command Set Description appendix.

Functional Description 1-5

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• Using a network management station or TELNET via a SLIP connection to the

remote MX-2100. The remote MX-2100 requires an IP address. For
information on assigning an IP address, refer to the DEF AGENT command in
the Command Set Description appendix.
• Using an ASCII terminal via a modem connection to the SP port.

Diagnostic Capabilities
The MX-2100 system provides extensive diagnostics, supervision and maintenance
capabilities for easy maintenance and rapid detection and location of faults.
MX-2100 diagnostics include automatic self-test upon power-up, and on-line
monitoring of critical functions. The system generates time stamped alarm
messages that cover all the significant system events. The time stamp is provided
by a real-time clock with battery backup. The system operator can then perform
comprehensive testing on each type of module, to determine the cause of the
alarm messages and return the system to normal operation.
Various types of test loops are provided, including modem loops 2 and 3 per
ITU-T Rec. V.54 for rapid isolation of the fault area, tone injection for rapid testing
of voice interface modules, and pseudo-random sequence transmission test for
checking the proper operation of data interface modules, and detection of bit
errors.

1.2 Physical Description

MX-2100, General Description

The MX-2100 system consists of a 19" (3U) enclosure that contains 18 module
slots. Five of the slots (slots 1 through 5) are assigned to the system modules:
• The control subsystem
• The main link (aggregate) interface subsystem
• The system power supplies.

Two slots each are assigned for KML and KPS modules, respectively, to provide
support for the redundancy option:
• Slots 1 and 2 - for KPS modules
• Slots 3 and 4 - for KML modules.

One slot (slot 6) is assigned for an options module (e.g., for the KDI or KAI
modules). The other 12 slots are intended for I/O modules. Each I/O slot can
accept any type of I/O module. All the modules are inserted through the rear
panel. The cable connections are also made through the rear panel.
Figure 1-3 shows a general view of a MX-2100, and identifies the functions of the
enclosure slot.

1-6 Physical Description

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Options
Module
12 I/O Common
Modules Logic
Main Link
Interface
Sub-system

Power Supply
Sub-system

Figure 1-3. MX-2100 Enclosure with Modules, General View

MX-2100 Rear Panel

Figure 1-4 shows a typical rear panel of the MX-2100 enclosure and identifies the
slots and their use.
Note the labels which designate the type of module that can be installed in each
slot; in addition, each slot is keyed, therefore it is not possible to install the wrong
module type.

Physical Description 1-7

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
System Slots I/O Slots
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
PS-A KPS PS-B ML-A KML.1 ML-B CL KCL.2 OP I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 I/O8 I/O9 I/O10 I/O11 I/O12
RESET

TEST ALARM

POWER

ALM RLY

Power Redundant KML KCL

Supply Power Module Module
Supply Redundant Options
(Optional) KML Module Module
(Optional)

Power Supply Main Link Interface I/O Modules

Sub-system Sub-system as Required

Figure 1-4. MX-2100 Enclosure, Rear View

MX-2100 Front Panel

The front panel of the MX-2100 enclosure includes an LCD, three push-buttons,
and labels for the show-through areas for the status indicators located on each
system module. Note that the indicators are arranged in groups (one group for
each system module), that are positioned before the corresponding module slot.
Figure 1-5 shows the front panel of the MX-2100 enclosure. Refer to the Operation
chapter for a description of the front panel functions.

VOICE DATA STATUS ON LINE ON LINE

TXD ALARM TXD
RXD TEST RXD
M-LEAD RTS LOCAL LOS B A
E-LEAD DCD SYSTEM REMOTE LOS
CURSOR SCROLL ENTER A POWER SUPPLY
B

CHANNEL MAIN LINK

Figure 1-5. MX-2100 Enclosure Front Panel

MX-2104, General Description

The MX-2104 system consists of a 19" 1U enclosure with 4 slots for the installation
of I/O modules. All the modules are inserted through the rear panel. The cable
connections are also made through the rear panel. The front panel includes a
control section with three push-buttons and a two-row LCD display
(16 characters per row), and status and alarm indicators.
The following figure shows a general view of a MX-2104 enclosure.

1-8 Physical Description

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

4 I/O Modules

Figure 1-6 MX-2104 Enclosure, General View

The MX-2104 enclosure contains the control sub-system, the main link (aggregate)
sub-system and the system power supply.
The main link sub-system performs main link interfacing, multiplexing and
demultiplexing functions, and provides the timing signals used by the I/O modules
installed in the enclosure.
MX-2104 Rear Panel
The following figure shows a typical rear view of the MX-2104 enclosure and
identifies the I/O slots.
FUSE

ALM ON
Power RST
CONTROL MNG 1234
TST
ALM RLY

∼100-240VAC 0.8A T 250V X.21

Figure 1-7. MX-2104 Enclosure, Rear View

Physical Description 1-9

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

MX-2104 Front Panel

The following figure shows the front panel of the MX-2104 enclosure. The front
panel includes an LCD, three push-buttons, and status indicators. Refer to the
Operation chapter for a description of the front panel functions.

CURSOR SCROLL ENTER LOS

ON
REM LOC RX TX LINE TEST ALARM

Figure 1-8. MX-2104 Enclosure Front Panel

Common Logic Modules

The MX enclosure requires one KCL.2 type common logic module. The main
functions of the KCL.2 module are control of:
• Multiplexing/demultiplexing operations
• System management
• Interfacing with the optional external system management.

The KCL.2 module stores the MX-2100 database in non-volatile memory

(NVRAM). The configuration information stored in the NVRAM is downloaded to
the module installed in MX-2100 upon turn-on or after system reset. Therefore,
during troubleshooting activities, it is possible to temporarily remove the KCL.2
module from the MX-2100 enclosure without disrupting system operation. If it is
necessary to replace the KCL.2 module, the database can be transferred to a new
module by installing the NVRAM taken from the original module in the
replacement module.
Main Link Modules
The enclosure can accept one KML type main link interface module or, for
MX-2100, two KML type main link interface modules. In addition to main link
interfacing, the KML module performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing
functions and provides the timing signals used by the other modules installed in
the enclosure. Two KML modules are necessary for dual link configurations and for
main link redundancy.
The following main link interface modules are available:
KML.1 - V.35 main link interface module
KML.2 - V.24/RS-232 main link interface module
KML.3 - V.36/RS-422/RS-530 main link interface module
KML.4 - X.21 main link interface module
KML.5 - G.703 codirectional main link interface module
KML.6 - Standard DDS CSU/DSU main link interface module
KML.7 - T1 main link interface module
KML.8 - E1 main link interface module.

1-10 Physical Description

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

KML.10 - ISDN main link interface module. The module can be ordered in two
versions:
• KML.10/S with ISDN S-type interface. The "S" interface operates as Terminal
Adapter (TE side), intended for connection to standard Network Termination
(NT) unit.
• KML.10/U with ISDN U-type interface. The "U" interface operates as Network
Termination (NT side) unit, intended for connection to standard Line
Termination (LT) unit.

KML.F - Fiber-optic main link interface module (not for MX-2104). The module
can be ordered with various types of optical interfaces (laser or LED transmitters
for single-mode and multi-mode fiber-optic cable).
For more information, see each main link module’s Installation and Operation
Manual.
Power Supply Modules
The MX-2100 enclosure can accept one or two KPS type power supply modules.
Several types of power supply modules are available:
KPS.3 - 25W power supply module for -48 VDC power
KPS.4 - 50W power supply module for 100 to 240 VAC mains
KPS.5 - 25W power supply module for -24 VDC power
KPS.6 - 56W power supply module for 100 to 240 VAC mains
KPS.7 - 56W power supply module for -48 VDC mains.
Two KPS modules are necessary for redundancy: when both modules are
operational, they share the load, whereas in case of failure or loss of input power
the remaining module continues to supply the power alone and there is no
redundancy. Switch-over is automatic and does not disturb normal operation.
The MX-2104 enclosure includes one power supply. The available types are:
• AC - 30W power supply for 100 to 240 VAC mains
• 48 - 40W power supply for -48 VDC mains.

In addition to power supply modules, the MX-2100 enclosure supports one

KM-Ringer module, for providing line feed and ring voltages for voice channels
and phantom feed for ISDN lines. This module is available in AC (115 to 230 VAC)
and DC (-24 VDC or -48 VDC) input voltage versions. The KM-Ringer can be
installed as a plug-in module for MX-2100, or located on shelves or desktops.

Physical Description 1-11

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Option Modules (not for MX-2104)

The 3U MX-2100 system can accept two types of options module:
KAI
Alarm indication module for installation in the options position, or in any I/O slot.
The KAI includes indicators similar to those located on the MX-2100 front panel.
These indicators repeat all the relevant MX-2100 front panel indications on the
rear panel, and thus complement the indicators available on the rear panels of the
other modules. Maintenance activities are thus expedited, as all the MX-2100
indications become readily available on one side of the equipment.
KDI
Bypass and multidrop module. The KDI module can be installed in the option slot,
or in any I/O slot. The KDI module enables direct transfer (bypassing) of a group of
main link frame bits, in both directions, between the two main links of MX-2100.
Channels that are not bypassed are connected to I/O modules of MX-2100.
The KDI module is available in two versions:
• KDI version: supports only the bypassing function
• KDI/M version: also includes a data channel interface for one multidrop channel.
The multidrop channel is compatible with the data channels of the KLS.1/NEW
low-speed data module, and supports data rates in the range of 0.3 to 64 kbps. As
is standard practice in a multidrop application, the receive path of the local
multidrop channel continuously receives the data transferred in its allocated
bandwidth on the desired main link (the same data is also bypassed to the other
link, to make it available downstream), but its transmit path is connected to the
main link only when the RTS line in the local interface is asserted.

For more information, see the option module’s Installation and Operation Manual.
I/O Modules
MX-2100 supports up to 12 user-selected I/O modules. MX-2104 supports up to 4
user-selected I/O modules. Both units can accept any combination of the following
types of I/O modules with power supply limitations.
KVC.1 - ADPCM or PCM voice interface module, provides two voice channels. For
more information, refer to the KVC.1 Installation and Operation Manual.
The following versions are available:
− KVC.1/E&M: four-wire or two-wire interface with E&M signaling per
RS-464 Types I, II, III and V, and British Telecom SSDC5
− KVC.1/FXS: two-wire interface for direct connection to a telephone set
− KVC.1/FXO: two-wire interface for direct connection to a PBX extension
line.

1-12 Physical Description

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

• KVC.1M - ADPCM or PCM voice interface module, provides one or two voice
channels and support error-free fax transmission. For more information, refer
to the KVC.1M Installation and Operation Manual.
The following versions are available:
− KVC.1M/E&M: two voice channel with four-wire or two-wire interface with
E&M signaling per RS-464 Types I, II, III and V, and British Telecom SSDC5
− KVC.1M/E&M48: similar to the KVC.1M/E&M, except that it requires an
external -48 VDC source to supply the signaling voltage for increasing the
maximum allowed line length
− KVC.1M/FXS: two voice channels with two-wire interface for direct
connection to a telephone set
− KVC.1M/FXSP: similar to KVC.1M/FXS, except that it has an internal ringer
and line feed supply
− KVC.1M/FXO: two voice channels with two-wire interface and FXO loop
start signaling for direct connection to a PBX extension line.
• KVC.3 - Low-bit rate voice module, provides two high-quality compressed
voice channels. For more information, refer to the KVC.3 Installation and
Operation Manual.
The following versions are available:
− KVC.3/E&M: two voice channels with four-wire or two-wire interface with
E&M signaling per RS-464 Types I, II, III and V, and British Telecom SSDC5
− KVC.3/FXS: two voice channels with two-wire interface for direct
connection to a telephone set
− KVC.3/FXSP: similar to KVC.3/FXS, except that it has an internal ringer and line
feed supply
− KVC.3/FXO: two voice channels with two-wire interface and FXO loop start
signaling for direct connection to a PBX extension line.
• KLS.1 - Low-speed RS-232 data module. For more information, refer to the
KLS.1 Installation and Operation Manual.
• KLS.2 - Low-speed RS-232 four-channel asynchronous statistical data module.
For more information, refer to the KLS.2 Installation and Operation Manual.
• KHS.1 - High-speed data interface module, provides two high-speed V.35,
RS-530 or RS-449/RS-422 data channels. For more information, refer to the
KHS.1 Installation and Operation Manual.
• KHS.2 - Two-channel synchronous data module. For more information, refer
to the KHS.2 Installation and Operation Manual.

Physical Description 1-13

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• KHS.U - Data interface module, provides one or two ISDN basic access rate
type "U" interfaces. The KHS.U module enables the extension of ISDN lines
over non-ISDN facilities. For more information, refer to the KHS.U Installation
and Operation Manual.
The following versions are available:
− KHS.U/S with one "U" interface
− KHS.U/D with two "U" interfaces.
• KHS.703 – High-speed data module that provides two independent 64 kbps
codirectional data channels per ITU-T Rec. G.703. Each module is terminated
with an RJ-45 eight pin connector. For more information, refer to the KHS.703
Installation and Operation Guide, further on in this manual.
• KVF.4 - Voice/fax relay module using advanced digital signal processing (DSP)
techniques (MPMLQ in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.723.1) to provide one
or two channels for transmission of voice and standard Group III fax signals
over the MX-2100 link with automatic switch-over between voice and fax
modes. For more information, refer to the KVF.4 Installation and Operation
Manual.
The following versions are available:
− KVF.4/E&M: two channels with four-wire or two-wire interface with E&M
signaling per RS-464 Types I, II, III and V, and British Telecom SSDC5
− KVF.4/E&M/E: similar to the KVF.4/E&M, except that it requires an external
-48 VDC source to supply the signaling voltage for increasing the maximum
allowed line length
− KVF.4/FXS: two voice channels with two-wire interface for direct
connection to a telephone set
− KVF.4/FXS3: similar to KVF.4/FXS, except that it supports pulse metering
and polarity reversal
− KVF.4/FXSP: similar to KVF.4/FXS, except that it has an internal ringer and
line feed supply
− KVF.4/FXSW: one channel similar to the channels of the KVF.4/FXS, and
one two-wire interface operating with FXO signaling, intended for
connection to the PSTN, or to a PBX extension line
− KVF.4/FXO: two channels with two-wire interface and FXO loop start
signaling for direct connection to a PBX extension line
− KVF.4/FXO3: similar to KVF.4/FXO, except that it supports pulse metering
and polarity reversal
− KVF.4/S0: one ISDN basic rate access type "S" interface for direct
connection to an ISDN PBX.

1-14 Physical Description

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

• KVF.5 - Voice/fax relay module with T1 or E1 PBX trunk interface, uses

advanced digital signal processing (DSP) techniques (MPMLQ - Multipulse
Maximum Likelihood Quantization in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.723.1) to
allow the transmission of Group III facsimile and high-quality compressed
voice signals while requiring, for each channel, a bandwidth of only 4.8, 6.4,
7.2, 9.6, or 12.8 kbps on the MX-2100 main link. For more information, refer
to the KVF.5 Installation and Operation Manual.
The following versions are available:
− KVF.5/T1/M: KVF.5 "master" module with balanced T1 sub link interface,
for connection to PBXs
− KVF.5/E1/M: KVF.5 "master" module with balanced and unbalanced E1 sub
link interfaces, for connection to PBXs
− KVF.5/T1/S: basic KVF.5 "slave" module without trunk interface
− KVF.5/E1/S: basic KVF.5 "slave" module without trunk interface.
• KVF.6 - Voice/fax compression module, provides direct connection to E1/T1
PBX trunks. For more information, refer to the Installation and Operation
Manual.
• KVF.8 – Provides high quality digital compression of eight analog voice/fax
channels. For more information, refer to the KVF.8 Installation and Operation
Manual.
• KTRE - Token ring extender module. For more information, refer to the KTRE
Installation and Operation Manual.
• KMBE - Ethernet Bridge/Router module. For more information, refer to the
KMBE Installation and Operation Manual.

Physical Description 1-15

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

1.3 Application Considerations

Basic MX-2100 System

Basic System Structure

The basic MX-2100 system consists of two MX-2100 units connected by a single
link, as shown in Figure 1-9.
I/O Modules

I/O Modules
KML KML

Modem Modem

MX-2100 MX-2100

Figure 1-9. Basic MX-2100 System Structure

System Multiplexing Capabilities

To provide the flexibility necessary to support up to 12 I/O modules of various
types for the MX-2100 or up to 4 I/O modules of various types for the MX-2104,
with each module capable of operation in several modes, the system uses
permanent on-demand allocation of main link bandwidth. This means that
bandwidth is permanently allocated to the active channels of each module when
the module is inserted into the enclosure, and the allocation is made in
accordance with the selected data rate and the end-to-end signaling requirements
of each channel. The main link bandwidth is dynamically reallocated when a
change occurs in the number of modules or of active module channels, or when
the operating mode of the main link or of the modules are changed. For special
applications, the user can disable the automatic allocation and perform manual
allocation.
Although in general, dynamic on-demand bandwidth allocation requires that the
link is resynchronized after each change in allocation, the allocation algorithm
used by MX-2100 has been optimally designed so that it does not require
resynchronization. It only requires reallocation of time slots, thereby reducing the
disruption to other channels when the bandwidth required by a module or a
module channel changes. In many cases, the required changes are made even
without time slot reallocation: for example, disconnecting or reducing the data rate
carried by a channel never requires reallocation.
Bandwidth allocation is performed by organizing the data in frames. Frame length
varies with the main link data rate, as listed in Table 1-1.

1-16 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Note If you are using automatic frame allocation, special precautions must be taken to
ensure proper operation of the link:
In general, the two MX-2100 units must be identically equipped. Both units must
include the same modules with the following exceptions:
– The KLS.1 in the local MX-2100 unit can work with the KLS.2 in the
remote MX-2100 unit.
– The KVF.4 in the local MX-2100 unit can work with the KVF.5 in the
remote MX-2100 unit.
– The KMBE in the local MX-2100 unit can work with the KHS.2 in the
remote MX-2100 unit.
– The KVF.6 in the local MX-2100 unit can work with the KVF.8 in the
remote MX-2100 unit.
The order of the modules must be the same in both units, and their connections to
main link modules must be the same.
The modules and module channels installed in the two MX-2100 units must be
identically configured, except for parameters that control local interfacing
characteristics, such as the channel interface type, the timing modes, etc.
After each change of configuration that affects the bandwidth utilization, e.g.,
addition of a new channel, selection of a mode that requires end-to-end signaling,
etc., perform the REBUILD FRAME command on both MX-2100 units.

Table 1-1. MX-2100 Multiplexing Data

Main Link Rate Frame Length Bandwidth Bandwidth Available
Allocation Unit to User
9.6 kbps 24 bits 0.4 kbps 9.2 kbps (23 units)
14.4 kbps 36 bits 0.4 kbps 14.0 kbps (35 units)
19.2 kbps 48 bits 0.4 kbps 18.8 kbps (47 units)
28.8 kbps 72 bits 0.4 kbps 28.4 kbps (71 units)
32 kbps 80 bits 0.4 kbps 31.6 kbps (79 units)
48 kbps 60 bits 0.8 kbps 47.2 kbps (59 units)
56 kbps 70 bits 0.8 kbps 55.2 kbps (69 units)
64 kbps 80 bits 0.8 kbps 63.2 kbps (79 units)
128 kbps 160 bits 0.8 kbps 127.2 kbps (159 units)
192 kbps 240 bits 0.8 kbps 191.2 kbps (239 units)
256 kbps 160 bits 1.6 kbps 254.4 kbps (159 units)
384 kbps 240 bits 1.6 kbps 382.4 kbps (239 units)
512 kbps 160 bits 3.2 kbps 508.8 kbps (159 units)
768 kbps 240 bits 3.2 kbps 764.8 kbps (239 units)
1024 kbps 160 bits 6.4 kbps 1004.8 kbps (157 units)
1536 kbps 240 bits 6.4 kbps 1516.8 kbps (237 units)

The allocation of bandwidth is performed in distinct units. The bandwidth

allocation unit (BAU) is 0.4, 0.8, 1.6, 3.2 or 6.4 kbps, in accordance with the main
link data rate (see Table 1-1).

Application Considerations 1-17

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Bandwidth allocations must be made for the following uses:

• MX-2100 frame synchronization
• In-band management channel. This channel's main function is to allow a
connection to be made to the remote unit by TELNET, SNMP management or
TFTP via the download bandwidth allocation. Through in-band management,
some of the bandwidth of the main link between the local MX-2100 and the
remote MX-2100 is used to relay management information.
• Channel data
• Channel end-to-end signaling.

The following table provides bandwidth allocation information. The use of the
information presented in the table to calculate the bandwidth required for various
operating configurations is illustrated by a numerical example that follows the
table.

1-18 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Table 1-2. Bandwidth Allocations

Use Allocation Units Allocation Rule

Frame 1 Mandatory
Synchronization
Management Depends on Main Link Rate Optional
Channel (at least 9.6 kbps
recommended)
Channel Data Channel Main Link Rate in kbps
(used Bandwidth Allocation Unit kbps rate in parenthesis)
9.6 to 32 48 to 192 256, 384 512, 768 1024, 1536
(0.4) (0.8) (1.6) (3.2) (6.4)
300 bps 3 3 3 3 – In accordance with
600 bps 3 3 3 3 – channel data rate.
1.2 kbps 3 3 3 3 – Theoretical
2.4 kbps 6 3 3 3 – minimum is 1
4.8 kbps 12 6 3 3 – allocation unit per
6.4 kbps 16 8 4 2 – active channel. For
7.2 kbps 18 9 – – – low rate data (i.e.,
8 kbps 20 10 5 – – for data rates lower
9.6 kbps 24 12 6 3 – than the bandwidth
14.4 kbps 36 18 9 – – allocation unit),
16 kbps 40 20 10 5 – oversampling is used
19.2 kbps 48 24 12 6 3 to achieve an integer
24 kbps 60 30 15 – – number of bit
28.8 kbps 72 36 18 9 – samples, e.g., when
32 kbps 80 40 20 10 5 the bandwidth
38.4 kbps – 48 24 12 6 allocation unit is
All Modules 48 kbps – 60 30 15 – 0.8 kbps and the
56 kbps – 70 35 N/A – channel data rate is
57.6 kbps – 72 36 18 9 300 bps, the
64 kbps – 80 40 20 10 effective bandwidth
67.2 kbps – 84 42 21 – used is 8 times
76.8 kbps – 96 48 24 12 higher, 2.4 kbps.
86.4 kbps – 108 54 27 – 2.4 kbps translate to
96.0 kbps – 120 60 30 15 3 allocation units.
105.6 kbps – 132 66 33 – Therefore, the effect
115.2 kbps – 144 72 36 18 of oversampling is to
124.8 kbps – 156 78 39 – increase the
128 kbps – – 80 40 20 bandwidth used to
160 kbps – – 100 50 25 transfer low-rate
192 kbps – – 120 60 30 channels.
224 kbps – – 140 70 35
240 kbps – – 150 75 – 64 kbps rate
272 kbps – – 170 85 – available only for
304 kbps – – 190 95 – main link rates of
336 kbps – – 210 105 – 128 kbps and higher
368 kbps – – 230 115 –
N × 2.4 N×6 N×3 – –
KHS.2 Only N × 4.8 – – N×3 –
N × 9.6 – – – N×3
Channel 1 allocation unit per module or for each two channels of the For each channel that requires
End-to-End same module, when applicable (1 allocation unit can carry end-to-end signaling, including
Control Signals up to four control signals, e.g., two signals for two channels) voice channels

Application Considerations 1-19

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Note
Modules which transmit the signaling information in-band, e.g., KVF.1 and KVC.2,
do not require bandwidth allocation for channel end-to-end signaling.

Bandwidth Allocation Example

A MX-2100 enclosure equipped as follows is connected to a 256 kbps link (BAU
used with this link rate is 1.6 kbps). The following table lists the required
bandwidth allocation.

Table 1-3. Example of Bandwidth Allocations

Modules Installed in Enclosure Allocation Units

Five KLS.1 with 4.8 kbps per channel (total of 10 channels); 30 units
seven channels (distributed among four modules) 4 units signaling
require end-to-end signaling
Two KLS.1 with 9.6 kbps per channel (total of 4 channels), 24 units
no end-to-end signaling
One KLS.2 with composite data rate of 19.2 kbps 12 units
One KHS.1 with 64 kbps per channel, no end-to-end 40 units
signaling
One KVC.1 module at 32 kbps per channel 40 units
1 unit signaling
Total user allocation 151 units
Frame synchronization 1 units
Management channel (9.6 kbps) 6 units
Total capacity used 158 units
Reserve capacity 2 units (3.2 kbps)

Redundancy (not for MX-2104)

The minimum MX-2100 system configuration requires only one KPS module, one
KCL module and one KML module. For critical applications, system availability can
be increased by installing redundant modules in the enclosure.
The redundancy capability is available for two critical functions: the main link and
the power supply. A failure in either one of these functions, e.g., because of link
failure or loss of power, could disable the whole system. However, a failure in an
I/O module affects only a small part of the system, and can generally be overcome
by using alternate routes, putting unused capacity into service, etc.
The MX-2100 system is designed to automatically put a redundant module in
service in case the corresponding module fails, thereby ensuring continuous system
operation in the event of any single module failure. Moreover, redundant modules
may be inserted or removed even while the system operates, without disrupting
the traffic or degrading the system performance.
The utilization of the redundant modules is explained in the following section.

1-20 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

KPS Module Redundancy

The KPS module supplies the operating voltages to MX-2100. A single KPS module
can provide the full power requirements of an enclosure. However, a second KPS
module may be added. With a redundant KPS module, both modules are
connected to power and share the load when the system is operating. If one
module (or its power source) fails, the second module automatically takes up the
full load and there is no redundancy.
To maximize the protection conferred by the use of redundant power supply
modules, observe the following recommendations:
• Whenever possible, connect each of the two KPS modules to a different power
circuit. Thus, if the circuit breaker that protects one of the power circuits trips,
the other module continues to receive power.
• If -48 VDC battery backup is available, install one DC-powered KPS.3 module
and one AC-powered module. Make sure to select power supply modules with
comparable ratings, e.g., KPS.6 and KPS.7.

KML Module Redundancy

The KML module serves as the connecting link between the MX-2100 unit and the
communication channel. For extra protection, a second KML module, not
necessarily of the same type, may be installed in parallel to the primary KML
module. The two KML modules are then connected through two independent
links, which may even follow different paths, to two similar modules located at the
remote end of the link. In the switched backup mode, the two links can be
operated at different data rates.
I/O Modules

I/O Modules
Active Link
KML A KML A
Modem Modem
KML B KML B

Redundant
Modem (Standby) Link Modem
MX-2100 MX-2100

Figure 1-10. Redundant MX-2100 System

Note
In this mode, MLA and MLB rates should be the same!

Each KML module is connected to an independent internal bus. The internal buses
reach each I/O module installed in the enclosure, therefore each module has
equal access to each KML module.

Application Considerations 1-21

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

When redundancy is enabled, the redundant KML module is automatically

programmed exactly like the primary, but its bus is electrically disconnected from
the other modules installed in the enclosure. If the primary KML module (or its
communication) fails, the other modules are disconnected from the bus of the
failed module and connected to the bus of the redundant KML module, which
then takes over.
The operator of the MX-2100 unit can select the primary (active) KML module,
e.g., in order to switch back to the preferred link after redundancy switching has
occurred. This arrangement provides redundancy at both the module and the link
level.
Dual Link Operation (not for MX-2104)

Basic Dual-Link Configurations

As an option, MX-2100 allows independent operation of its two multiplexing
subsystems. Therefore, by connecting two main links to one MX-2100 equipped
with two KML modules it is possible to double the number of payload time slots.
Two dual-link topologies are possible:
• High capacity point-to-point link. A typical system configuration is shown in
Figure 1-11.
• Two independent links, as shown in Figure 1-12. The two links can operate at
different data rates.

Modules installed in the enclosure can be freely connected to either of the two
links, the only restriction being that all the subchannels of a given module must be
assigned to the same link.
I/O Modules

I/O Modules
KML A KML A
Modem Modem
KML B KML B

Modem Modem
MX-2100 MX-2100

Figure 1-11. Dual Link, High Capacity Point-to-Point Application

1-22 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Location B

MX-2100
Location A

User Connected
to Location B
KML A
KML B
User Connected
to Location C

MX-2100
Location A

MX-2100

Figure 1-12. Dual Link System, Independent Link Application

Bypassing Configurations
Dual-link configurations also enable direct transfer of channel between the two
links (this is called bypassing). This function requires the presence of a KDI module
in MX-2100.
Figure 1-13 shows the operation of the basic bypassing configuration. In
Figure 1-13, some of the users at location A are connected to users at location B,
and other users at location A are connected, using the bypassing function of the
KDI module, to users at location C (the connection is full duplex). As explained
above, with respect to bypassing, the multidrop channel is handled either as a
bypassed channel, or as a dropped channel, depending on the state of the RTS
line.
The KDI module supports the bypassing of one contiguous block of bits from one
link to the other. The bypassed block is specified by three parameters:
• The position of the first bit (the starting bit) of the block to be bypassed in the
multiplexed frame of main link A
• The number of bits to be bypassed (the block size)
• The position of the first bit (the starting bit) of the block in the frame of main
link B. This may differ from the starting bit on main link A.

Application Considerations 1-23

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Location A Location C

Connected User Connected

to Location B to Location B
Bypassed Bits
Connected Link A Link B
User Connected
to Location C to Location A
MX-2100 MX-2100

Location B

KML A
KML B
MX-2100

User Connected User Connected

to Location A to Location C

Figure 1-13. Basic Bypassing Configuration

Figure 1-14 shows an example of bit routing between the various units.
Since the bypassing is bit-oriented, the two MX-2100 links can operate at different
data rates, but they must use bandwidth allocation units of equal sizes (refer to
Table 1-1 for allowable selections). Therefore, the bypassing can be performed
between links operating at rates within the same group of rates:
• 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, or 32 kbps (0.4 kbps bandwidth allocation unit)
• 48, 56, 64, 128 or 192 kbps (0.8 kbps bandwidth allocation unit)
• 256 or 384 kbps (1.6 kbps bandwidth allocation unit)
• 512 or 768 kbps (3.2 kbps bandwidth allocation unit).
• 1024 or 1536 kbps (6.4 kbps bandwidth allocation unit).

In order for the user to be able to specify the allocation of main link bits to the
individual channels, the structure of the main link frame must be specified by the
user. Therefore, in a bypassing application the automatic bit allocation algorithm
used by MX-2100 must be disabled, and the allocation must be manually
performed. Manual allocation is required for every participating MX-2100.

1-24 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Location A Location C

A-to-B A-to-C A-to-C B-to-C

Location B

Link A Link B
Dropped Dropped
Info Info
Bypassed
Info

Figure 1-14. Bypassing Parameters

The manual allocation is performed at the level of individual channels, therefore

the channels of a given I/O module can be routed to different MX-2100 units. This
is however possible only if the following conditions are met:
• The I/O modules are not located at a bypassing location, i.e., are not installed
in a MX-2100 unit with an active KDI module.
• The I/O modules whose channels are to be routed to different MX-2100 units
do not use end-to-end transmission of control signals; otherwise, all the
channels of an I/O module using end-to-end transmission of control signals
must be routed to a single module (this implies that they must be bypassed or
dropped together at the same MX-2100).

In the typical bypassing application shown in Figure 1-15, two MX-2104

multiplexers, located at two branch offices, are connected to MX-2100 located at
the central site. The KDI module installed in MX-2100 located at the central site
provides a direct connection between the two MX-2104 units via the central site
for selected channels. The connection is performed by transferring (bypassing) the
desired group of main link frame bits between the two main link modules. For
example, in Figure 1-15 the bypassed time slots could be used to connect between
the two KVF.4 modules identified by No. 2, which are installed in the two
MX-2104 units.

Application Considerations 1-25

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Remote Site A

KVF.4 1
KVF.4 2
KVF.4 3
KHS.1 4
PABX

Central Site
MX-2104

1 KVF.4
5 KVF.4
3 KVF.4
KML A

KCL
KDI
6 KVF.4 KML B
PABX 4 KHS.1
7 KHS.1

MX-2100 Remote Site B

KVF.4 5
KVF.4 2
HOST KVF.4 6
KHS.1 7
PABX

MX-2104

Figure 1-15. Typical Bypassing Application

Channels that are not bypassed are connected to users connected to MX-2100 at
the central site: for example, the two channels of the KVF.4 module at location A
(identified by No. 3) are connected to the channels of the KVF.4 module also
identified by No. 3 which is installed at the central site, and the KHS.1 module at
location B (identified by No. 7) is connected to the KHS.1 module at the central
site.
Fully digital transmission for bypassing voice channels is an essential requirement
to the preservation of high-quality voice reproduction when low bit rate voice
compression is used, because it eliminates back-to-back analog interconnections at
intermediate locations, and the ensuing analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog
conversions. Full digital transmission has significant advantages for data channels as
well, because it does away with the cables that would otherwise be required for
the connection of data channels, and provides the equivalent of an electronic
cross-connect function (programmable by the same means used to control the
operation of MX-2100).

Multidrop Configurations
The KDI/M module version includes a data channel interface for multidrop
configurations. The multidrop channel is compatible with the data channels of the
KLS.1/NEW low-speed data module, and supports data rates in the range of 0.3 to
64 kbps.
As is standard practice in a multidrop application, the receive path of the local
multidrop channel continuously receives the traffic carried in the allocated
bandwidth on the desired main link, e.g., link A, and in addition the same data is
also bypassed to the other link, to make it available downstream. The transmit
path of the multidrop channel is connected to main link A only when the RTS line
in the local interface is asserted. A typical bypassing and multidrop configuration is
shown in Figure 1-16.

1-26 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

In the application shown in Figure 1-16, the multidrop channel of the KDI module
is used to connect between the host computer (connected to a data channel of a
KLS.1/NEW module installed in MX-2100 situated at the central site), and several
data terminals located at other locations. The communication is based on a polled
protocol, whereby the host operates as the master and arbitrates the traffic on the
multidrop link by addressing the Dates one at a time. The multidrop feature
operates as follows:
• All the Dates connected along the link can receive the data sent by the host,
because all the multidrop channels of all MX-2100 are allocated bandwidth on
link A. In addition, the bandwidth allocated to the multidrop channels is also
designated for bypassing to link B, to enable all the downstream Dates to
receive the host.
• When a DTE connected to a KDI/M module has data to transmit toward the
host, it must assert its RTS line. The assertion of the RTS line in the multidrop
channel interface changes the routing of the main link data by the
corresponding KDI/M module:
− The KDI/M module disconnects the bypassing connection of the multidrop
channel data to main link B, and the channel data is dropped locally. As
long as the RTS line is asserted, the DTE remains connected to main link A,
just as in a point-to-point connection.
− When the RTS line is deasserted (at the end of DTE transmission), the
KDI/M module stops dropping the channel data, and the bypassing path is
re-established.
KLS.1
KCL
KDI

KML

HOST MX-2100
KML A
KML B

KML A
KML B

KML A
KML B

KDI KDI KDI

KCL KCL KCL
MX-2100 MX-2100 MX-2100

DTE DTE DTE

Figure 1-16. Typical KDI Bypassing and Multidrop Application

Priority Bumping (not for MX-2104)

With optional point-to-point dual-link configurations, such as shown in
Figure 1-11, MX-2100 allows to provide the equivalent of hot-standby protection
to critical data channels, without paying for unutilized bandwidth. This feature is
called priority bumping.

Application Considerations 1-27

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

When priority bumping is selected, the system administrator can define the critical
channels as high-priority channels. The high-priority channels can be assigned time
slots on either of the two links in accordance with system requirements.
Low-priority channels can then be added up to the maximum combined
bandwidth of the two links.
When the two main links operate at different data rates, it is possible to select
different priorities for switching, from link A to link B, and from link B to link A.
During normal operation, i.e., when both links are operational, all the channels are
carried by the assigned links. When one of the links fails, the high-priority channels
carried by the failed link are automatically switched over to the operational link.
When the management channel is carried by a main link time slot, it is always
handled as a high-priority channel.
Switched Backup Operation (not for MX-2104)
MX-2100 provides a switched backup mode of operation, that allows the use of
dial-up modems operating on low-cost switched data lines (PSTN mode) or ISDN
basic access lines as a backup to the main link (ISDN backup mode, based on the
use of the KML.10 main link module). MX-2100 allows flexible programming of
the switched backup option on a weekly basis. For each day of the week, it is
possible to define up to four different time periods, and to specify, for each
period, whether the use of the switched backup function is allowed.
The backup capabilities can be determined in two ways:
• By entering the desired configuration in the alternate database stored by
MX-2100. This method allows the system administrator to freely select which
channels will be transmitted when the backup link is in use, and to specify for
these channels different data rates when using the backup link. Note that in
this mode the alternate database is dedicated to the backup link, so the
"day/night" configuration option cannot be used.
• By defining the channels to be carried when the backup link is used as
high-priority channels. In this case, the channel data rates cannot be changed
with respect to normal operation, but the backup configuration is contained in
the on-line database. Therefore, it is possible to prepare "day/night"
configurations using the two MX-2100 databases.

Switched Backup Using Dial-up Modems

A typical PSTN switched backup configuration is shown in Figure 1-17. In this
configuration, one of the links is configured to carry the normal traffic, and the
other link is configured to serve as the backup link.

1-28 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

I/O Modules

I/O Modules
Active Link
KML A KML A

KCL

KCL
Modem Modem
KML B KML B
Switched
Backup Link
Modem Modem
MX-2100 MX-2100
Switched
Data
Network

Figure 1-17. Typical Switched Backup Configuration

Since usually the data rate supported by dial-up modems does not exceed
19.2 kbps, the backup link can also be configured for operation at 9.6 or
19.2 kbps. This means that in case of a main link failure, only a fraction of the
normal traffic (carried by the channels defined by the system administrator as
having high priority) can still be transmitted.
When a failure occurs on the main link, a MX-2100 activates the DTR line in the
backup link interface connector. The dial-up modem connected to this link dials a
preprogrammed number, to set up a call to the other MX-2100. After the called
destination answers, the traffic is switched to the backup link (if the call cannot be
established within a predetermined interval, the attempt is aborted).
When the primary link returns to normal operation, the dial-up modem hangs up
and thus disconnects the backup link.

Switched Backup Using ISDN Lines

This mode is supported when a KML.10 module is connected to a switched ISDN
line. In this case, higher data rates are available for the backup link:
64 kbps (use of one B channel) and 128 kbps (use of both B channels). Figure 1-18
shows a typical switched backup application.
MX-2100 offers a proprietary algorithm, which enables using both B channels to
obtain the 128 kbps rate even when differential delay is present. However, the use
of a proprietary algorithm means that KML.10 modules must be installed at both
ends of the link. This proprietary algorithm, based on the BONDING mode 1
protocol defined by the Bandwidth-on-Demand Inter-operability Group
(BONDING), enables the KML.10 modules to combine the bandwidth of the two
B channels while correcting for differential delays of up to 512 ms between the
two channels. This delay is sufficient to enable using links which pass through up
to two satellite hops.

Application Considerations 1-29

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

I/O Modules

I/O Modules
Active Link
KML.4 KML.4

KCL

KCL
Modem Modem
KML.10 KML.10
Switched
Backup Link
MX-2100
MX-2100

Switched
Data
Network

Figure 1-18. Typical ISDN Switched Backup Application

The algorithm works by automatically aligning (i.e., synchronizing and equalizing

the transmission delays) the two B channels, a process which uses FIFO buffers that
can store data for intervals of the same order as the maximum differential delay to
be corrected. The alignment process is performed when communication is first
established between the two MX-2100 units, and is repeated each time a loss of
main link synchronization occurs, or one of the MX-2100 units is reset (FIFOs are
also reset when one of these events occurs). Typically, the channel alignment
process requires up to 20 seconds.
The KML.10 module can use various structured leased line services (S0), such as
the FV0 Type 4 service available in Germany, and can be configured by the user
for optimal support of the following specific ISDN implementations:
• ETSI (Euro-ISDN) NET3
• AT&T 4ESS and 5ESS ISDN switches (custom multipoint, and point-to-point
services)
• Northern Telecom DMS-100 ISDN switch
• Bellcore ISDN switch NI1
• NTT (Japanese ISDN version).

Switch Mode
MX-2100 provides a dial-up mode of operation that enables users to allocate ISDN
basic access lines via the KML.10 module card. The ISDN line is allocated to Main
Link A or, for MX-2100 only, Main Link B depending upon the configuration.
MX-2100 can be configured to operate in one of the following switch modes:
• Single Switch Mode (MX-2100 and MX-2104) - The local MX-2100 is
connected to a remote MX-2100 via an ISDN network allocated on a single
main link (either Main Link A or Main Link B). Refer to Figure 1-19.

1-30 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Main Link A ISDN

KCL
KCL
NETWORK

Local Remote
SP Port MX-2100 MX-2100
or SLIP

Supervision Terminal
or TELNET

Figure 1-19. Single Switch Mode

• Dual Switch Mode (MX-2100 only) - The local MX-2100 is connected to two
remote MX-2100s via an ISDN network allocated to both Main Link A and
Main Link B. Refer to Figure 1-20.

KCL
Main Link A Remote
ISDN MX-2100
KCL

Network
Main Link B

Local
SP Port MX-2100

KCL
or SLIP

Remote
MX-2100

Supervision Terminal
or TELNET

Figure 1-20. Dual Switch Mode

• Single and Switch Mode (MX-2100 only) - The local MX-2100 is connected
to a remote MX-2100 via one of the main links (Main Link A or Main Link B).
The local MX-2100 is also connected to a second remote MX-2100 via the
other main link over an ISDN network. Refer to the following figure.

Application Considerations 1-31

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Main Link A

KCL
KCL
Remote
Main Link B ISDN MX-2100
Network
Local
SP Port MX-2100
or SLIP

KCL
Remote
MX-2100

Supervision Terminal
or TELNET

Figure 1-21. Single and Switch Mode

The ISDN line does not need to be connected or available to all applications at all
times. The different switch modes can allocate the ISDN line as follows:
• Connect after power up - Configures MX-2100 to connect the ISDN line from
power up until power off. Using this option, the ISDN line is always open
during a MX-2100 session.
• Manual - Configures MX-2100 to trigger the ISDN line connection only upon
operator request by using the Connect Switch command. The ISDN line
remains open until the operator requests to disconnect by using the
Disconnect Switch command. For information on the Connect
Switch and Disconnect Switch commands, refer to the Command Set
Description appendix.
• Automatic - Configures MX-2100 to automatically connect the ISDN line
when an I/O request is made. The data cards KLS.1/N, KLS.2, KHS.1 and
KHS.2 and the KVF.4 voice card (analog interfaces only) provide a trigger to
automatically connect the ISDN line. These data and voice cards must be
assigned a high priority (via the DEF CON command) to allow the trigger to
begin dialing. After the I/O transfer is completed, the ISDN line is
automatically disconnected. MX-2100 sets the priority levels for the data and
voice cards.

System Management

Equipment Management Methods

MX-2100 supports the following management methods:
• Local Management
• Remote Management
• Neighbor Management.

1-32 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

The KCL.2 module of the MX-2100 system is available with a Supervisory Port
Connector (CONTROL port) and with one of the following three Management Port
interfaces:
• MNG: 9-pin Dial Port
• ETHERNET: UTP Ethernet interface
• ETHERNET: BNC Ethernet interface.

The Supervisory Port Connector and the Management Port are located on the rear
panel of the KCL.2. These interfaces allow the operator to manage the local or
remote MX-2100 in several modes.
Local Management
MX-2100s are connected via a link. One MX-2100 is local and the other is remote.
Local management operates and configures the local MX-2100. There are several
options for local management:
• LCD - Perform MX-2100 monitoring and minimal configuration functions from
the MX-2100 front panel using push buttons and an LCD. The configuration is
menu driven: the LCD guides the operator through the desired operations,
provides information concerning the current system configuration and
operating mode, and lists the values available for each programmable
parameter. In case of operator errors, the LCD displays a message that explains
the error and helps the operator take the correct action.
• Supervisory Port Connector - Allows the operator to manage a local MX-2100
from a standard ASCII terminal, or via a SLIP connection through TELNET or a
SNMP networking management station.
• MNG Port - Dial-out port for alarm reporting.
• ETHERNET Port - Manage a local MX-2100 over a LAN. TELNET or a
networking management station connected to the LAN can configure or
operate MX-2100. MX-2100 requires an IP address. For information on
assigning an IP address, refer to the DEF AGENT command in the Command
Set Description appendix.

Remote Management
MX-2100s are connected via a link. One MX-2100 is local and the other is remote.
Remote management operates and configures the remote MX-2100. The
management of a remote MX-2100 can be performed either in-band (refer to
Figure 1-22) or out-of-band (refer to Figure 1-24). In these options, the remote
MX-2100 requires an IP address. For information on assigning an IP address, refer
to the DEF AGENT command in the Command Set Description appendix.

Application Considerations 1-33

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

In-Band

A remote MX-2100 can be managed via the local MX-2100 and the data frame.
Some of the bandwidth of the main link between the two MX-2100s is used to
relay the management information. An operator can also download software using
the main link.
Local Remote

Main Link

KCL

KCL
Flow of Management Information

SP Port MX-2100 MX-2100

or SLIP

Supervision Terminal
or TELNET
or SNMP

Figure 1-22. Remote Management: In-Band

Management information can be passed from a local MX-2100 to a remote

Note
MX-2100 via the data frame. On the local MX-2100, connect a supervision
terminal, TELNET, or SNMP to the KLS.1, KLS.2 card. On the remote
MX-2100, use a cross-cable to link the KLS.1, KLS.2 card with the SP port on
the KCL.2. For a description of this method, refer to Figure 1-23.

SP Port
KLS1, KLS2

KLS1, KLS2

Via Data Frame

KCL

Supervision Terminal
or TELNET
or SNMP Local Remote
MX-2100 MX-2100

Figure 1-23. Using the Data Frame

1-34 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Out-of-Band

A remote MX-2100 can be managed out-of-band via:

• A modem
• An Ethernet connection, refer to Figure 1-24
• Dedicated time slot in KML.7 or KML.8. - An unused time slot in the KML.7 T1
network or KML.8 E1 network is assigned to pass the management
information.
• Time slot 0 in KML.8 (E1 network) or f-bit in KML.7 (T1 network) is assigned to
pass management information. Management information is not included in the
data frame.
KCL

KCL
Ethernet Port MX-2100 MX-2100 Ethernet Port

LAN LAN

Supervision Terminal
or TELNET
or SNMP

Figure 1-24. Remote Management: Out-of-Band

Neighbor Management
You can configure a MX-2100 without a direct connection to a Network
Management Station (or TELNET or SNMP) and without using out-of-band
management. Neighbor management allows management information to be sent
via a SLIP connection to linked MX-2100s. MX-2100s are connected from the
Network Port (NP)-DTE on one MX-2100 to the Supervisory Port (SP)-DCE on
another MX-2100. TELNET, SNMP or a management network station is connected
via SLIP to the SP-DCE port on the first MX-2100 in the link.
Each MX-2100 has an IP address. Management information is sent via the SLIP
connection to a particular MX-2100 in the link using the IP address of the
MX-2100.
The following examples illustrate possible configurations using neighbor
management:
• Local neighbor management - Management information is sent to each
MX-2100 via the NP-DTE to SP-DCE connections using the IP address of the
MX-2100. Refer to Figure 1-25.

Application Considerations 1-35

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

SP-DCE
Port NP-NTE SP-DCE NP-DTE SP-DCE
via SLIP Port Port Port Port
KCL KCL KCL
MX-2100 MX-2100 MX-2100

Network
Management Station
or TELNET
or SNMP

Figure 1-25. Local Neighbor Management

You can also manage multiple MX-2100s by connecting MX-2100s to an

Ethernet hub. This configuration can prevent communication problems
due to equipment failure.
• Remote neighbor management - A local MX-2100 connects to a remote
MX-2100 via the main link. The remote MX-2100 connects MX-2100s on the
remote side using the NP-DTE to SP-DCE connections. Management
information is sent via the main link of the local MX-2100 to any of the linked
remote MX-2100s using the IP address of the MX-2100. Refer to Figure 1-26.
Remote Remote Remote
MX-2100 MX-2100 MX-2100
KCL KCL KCL
NP-NTE SP-DCE NP-DTE SP-DCE
Port Port Port Port

Main Link

SP-DCE
Port
via SLIP
KCL
Local
MX-2100

Network
Management Station
or TELNET
or SNMP

Figure 1-26. Remote Neighbor Management

1-36 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

• There is no indication for the remote loss of frame synchronization, or for the
loops connected at the remote end of the link.
• Remote channel loops are activated on the local channel, therefore such loops
return data toward the remote MX-2100.
• It is not possible to simultaneously activate local and remote loops.
• To perform channel tests by tone injection (voice channels) or pseudo-random
sequence transmission test (data channels), it is necessary to activate a local
main link loop, or to make an appropriate loopback connection at the remote
end of the link.

Management Communication Port

MX-2100 is available with a Supervisory Port Connector (Control port) and with
one of the following three Management Port interfaces on the KCL.2 module:
• MNG: 9-pin Dial Port
• ETHERNET: UTP Ethernet interface
• ETHERNET: BNC Ethernet interface.

Supervisory Port Connector

The 9-pin D-type female type connector located on the KCL.2 module (the
Supervisory Port connector) can be used to manage the MX-2100 unit by means of
an ASCII terminal, a network management station, or TELNET over SLIP. The
communication parameters of this port can be selected in accordance with system
requirements:
• Data rate - 9.6 - for use with ASCII terminal or SLIP connection
- 19.2, 38.4 or 57.6 kbps - for use with SLIP connection only.
• Word format - One start bit
- Seven or eight data bits
- Even, odd or no parity
- One stop bit.
• Interface type - DCE or DTE (user selectable).

Ethernet Port
The KCL.2 module can be ordered with either a UTP or a BNC Ethernet
connector.
Dial Port Connector
The KCL module can be ordered with an additional, 9-pin D-type female type
connector as the MNG port.
This port is intended for connection to a Hayes or Hayes-compatible dial-up
modem. The reporting method can be programmed by the user, in accordance
with the following options:
• Always send a report whenever a new alarm or event condition is detected
• Reporting disabled (no dial-out function).

Application Considerations 1-37

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

When it is necessary to report an alarm condition, MX-2100 initiates the call set
up. After the destination answers, MX-2100 sends the complete contents of the
alarm buffer. Following the transmission of the alarm buffer contents, MX-2100
disconnects automatically.
To increase reporting reliability, MX-2100 enables the user to define the number
of dialing retries, and an alternate number, to be called in case the primary
number cannot be reached. If the call cannot be established, the full contents of
the buffer is sent the next time a call is set up.
System Timing Considerations
One of the critical requirements of data communications networks is timing
accuracy. The basic requirement is that all the equipment in the network must
operate at exactly the same clock rate or at an integer sub-multiple of the clock
rate. If this condition is not met, then from time to time bits transmitted between
two equipment units that operate at even slightly different clock rates will be lost,
or the same bit may be read twice. Such occurrences, that lead to the loss of bit
count integrity, are highly undesirable and may cause severe and periodic
disruptions in network operation.
Many networks use very accurate timing sources, such as atomic clocks, to provide
the primary timing signals to the main network nodes, e.g., telephone switching
offices, digital switches, etc. From the nodes, the timing is disseminated via the
communication links.
Since very accurate timing sources are often free-running, communication
equipment usually includes "elastic" buffers that absorb small timing differences. An
elastic buffer is a first-in first-out (FIFO) memory with separate write (input) and
read (output) clocks. For example, such buffers are inserted in the receive path of
the MX-2100 KML modules operating in the DTE or external DCE modes.
MX-2100 is designed to support reliable propagation of the timing information, by
allowing the selection of the appropriate timing mode in accordance with system
requirements and the type of main link interface module installed in the unit. The
following are the different main link interfaces with the available types of timing
modes:
• With KML.1, KML.2, KML.3 and KML.4 modules, three main link timing
modes are available:
− DTE
− External DCE
− DCE.
• When operating in the DCE or external DCE modes, the timing of the main
link transmit clock can be locked to an external source (the external clock
signal supplied to one of the data channels), or derived from an internal
oscillator.
• With KML.5 and KML.6 modules, two main link timing modes are available:
− Internal
− Loopback.

1-38 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

• With KML.7, KML.8 and KML.F modules, three main link timing modes are
available:
− Internal
− Loopback
− DCE.
• The KML.10 module recovers the clock from the receive line signal; the
recovered clock is used for synchronizing MX-2100. MX-2100 must operate in
the DTE timing mode.

To ensure that a reliable timing source is used even when the source selected to
provide the preferred timing reference fails, MX-2100 allows the selection of an
additional fallback source. The fallback source is automatically connected when
the main source fails. If both the main and fallback sources fail, MX-2100 will
switch to the internal oscillator.
The main characteristics of each main link timing mode are explained in the
following sections.

DTE Timing (KML.1, KML.2, KML.3, KML.4 and KML.10 Modules)

With DTE timing, both the main link receive and transmit paths of the MX-2100
unit receive external clock signals. Figure 1-27 shows two basic network
configurations that use the DTE timing mode.
DTE Timing DTE Timing

Modem with Modem with

Internal Timing Loopback Timing
MX-2100 MX-2100

A. Leased Line Configuration

DTE Timing DTE Timing

Digital
Data
Network
Modem with Modem with
Loopback Timing Loopback Timing
MX-2100 MX-2100

Master
Clock

B. Digital Configuration

Figure 1-27. Network Configurations Using DTE Timing

Application Considerations 1-39

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

In the leased line configuration (A) of Figure 1-27, two MX-2100 units
communicate through a leased line using two high-speed modems, or other
transmission equipment (e.g., higher-speed digital multiplexers) capable of
supporting the required main link data rate. The modems provide the transmit and
receive clock signals to the MX-2100 units. In this configuration, the modem
connected to one of the MX-2100 units is selected to provide the timing reference
for the whole link, by selecting its INTERNAL timing mode. The other modem is
set to operate in the LOOPBACK timing mode, thereby ensuring that both
MX-2100 units derive their timing reference from the same source.
In the digital configuration (B) of Figure 1-27, two MX-2100 units communicate
through a digital transmission network, e.g., a national or private carrier network,
or an ISDN network (in the latter case, the connection is usually made by means of
KML.10 main link modules).
Digital data and ISDN networks usually incorporate very accurate timing sources,
which are always preferable. In many cases these networks will not accept data at
a rate that differs from their own rate. In the digital configuration, the modems that
connect the MX-2100 units to the digital data network are set to operate in the
LOOPBACK timing mode. This ensures that the two MX-2100 units derive their
timing reference from the accurate master clock provided by the network.
When operating in the DTE timing mode, buffers are used in the receive and
transmit data paths to allow retiming and to absorb short-term timing instabilities.
Buffers size is ±8 bits; when operating over satellite links, the receive buffer size
can be increased to ±256 bits.

External DCE Timing (KML.1, KML.2, KML.3 and KML.4 Modules)

With external DCE timing, MX-2100 provides the main link transmit clock signal to
the modem, and accepts a receive clock signal from the modem. In this timing
mode, it is necessary to specify the transmit timing reference source. Two
reference sources can be used:
• External. The MX-2100 main link transmit timing is synchronized to the
transmit clock of a data module channel. The desired channel is selected by
the operator, and must operate in the DTE2 clock mode.

The external mode is very useful when one or more of the MX-2100 channels
are connected to a AT&T DDS link, or to a similar data network. A typical
configuration with the MX-2100 units connected as a tail-end link for channels
using the DDS network is shown in Figure 1-28.
The DDS network can provide highly accurate timing and will accept only data
with similar accuracy, therefore it is necessary to lock the timing of the
MX-2100 link to the channel timing. This is accomplished by operating the
modem connected to the left MX-2100 in the EXTERNAL timing mode. The
other modem is set to operate in the LOOPBACK timing mode, thereby
ensuring that the right MX-2100 unit derives its timing reference from the
same source.

1-40 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

E-DCE Timing DTE Timing

(External Source)
DTE XMIT
DDS Clock

KHS.1
Network
RCV
Modem with Modem with
Clock
External Timing Loopback Timing

MX-2100 MX-2100
Master
Clock Channel
in DTE2
Timing

Figure 1-28. Typical External DCE Timing Application

• Internal timing. The source for the internal timing signals is a crystal oscillator
located in the KML module. The timing accuracy of this oscillator is ±50 parts
per million (ppm).

The internal timing mode can be used in point-to-point links and in

independent networks. In any system, only one unit may operate with internal
timing. All the other units must use DTE timing to ensure synchronization. In
this way, the unit that operates with internal timing is the source of the master
clock and determines timing of the entire network.
In the external DCE mode, buffers are used in the main link receive path, but not
in the transmit path. Buffer size is selectable, ±8 or ±256 bits.

DCE Timing (KML.1, KML.2, KML.3 and KML.4 Modules)

With DCE timing, MX-2100 provides both the transmit and receive clock signals to
the equipment to which it is connected. The timing reference source of the
transmit timing signals can be selected as for the external DCE mode. The
connected equipment must then use the DTE timing mode.
The DCE timing mode is useful when the MX-2100 main link is connected to a
channel of a corporate data transmission system (e.g., the main link of one of the
MX-2100 units is connected to a data channel of an E1/T1 multiplexer), and one
or more of the MX-2100 channels are connected to a data network which
provides accurate timing (e.g., to a DDS link, an ISDN line, or another data
network). In this case, the network timing can be distributed through MX-2100 to
the other parts of the system. Figure 1-29 shows a typical connection to a DDS
network through a KHS.1 module; for connection to an ISDN line, replace the
KHS.1 module with a KHS.U module.
In the DCE mode, no buffers are used in the main link data paths, because
MX-2100 determines the receive and transmit rates.

Application Considerations 1-41

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

DCE Timing External Timing

DTE XMIT
DDS Clock

KHS.1

HS-2
Network
RCV
Clock

Master MX-2100 E1/T1 Mux

Clock Channel Channel
in DTE2 in DTE2
Timing Timing
(Mode 3)

Figure 1-29. Typical DCE (KML.1–4) Timing Application

Internal Timing (KML.5, KML.6, KML.7, KML.8, and KML.F Modules)
When the internal timing mode is used with a KML.5, KML.6, KML.7, KML.8, or
KML.F module, the source for the internal timing signals is a crystal oscillator
located in the main link module.
The internal timing mode can be used in point-to-point links and in independent
networks. In any link or network, only one MX-2100 unit may operate with
internal timing. All the other units must use loopback timing to ensure
synchronization. In this way, the unit that operates with internal timing is the source
of the master clock and determines timing of the entire network.
Figure 1-30 shows a basic network configuration that uses a KML.5 or KML.6
module in the internal timing mode in conjunction with loopback timing.
Internal Timing Loopback Timing
I/O Modules

I/O Modules
~

MX-2100 MX-2100

Figure 1-30. Typical Internal Timing Mode Application

Loopback Timing (KML.5, KML.6, KML.7, KML.8, and KML.F Modules)

With loopback timing, the main link transmit clock is locked to the receive clock,
recovered from the receive data signal. In effect, with loopback timing MX-2100 is
sending back data at the same rate data is being received.
The loopback mode can be used as shown in Figure 1-30, however there is an
additional important application for the loopback mode, as shown in Figure 1-31.
In the configuration of Figure 1-31, two MX-2100 units communicate through a
G.703 link provided by a digital transmission network, e.g., the national network
or a private carrier network, or by the DDS network. Such networks usually
incorporate very accurate timing source, which are always preferable. Loopback
timing then allows the locking of the transmit timing of both MX-2100 units to the
accurate master clock provided by the network.

1-42 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Loopback Timing Loopback Timing

I/O Modules

I/O Modules
Digital
Data
Network

MX-2100 MX-2100
Master
Clock

Figure 1-31. Typical Loopback Timing Application

DCE Timing (KML.7, KML.8, and KML.F Modules)
When the DCE timing mode is used with a KML.7, KML.8, or KML.F module, the
timing signals of both the MX-2100 unit’s main link receive and transmit paths is
taken from one of the I/O module channels. Alternatively, in dual link chassis
configurations, the timing can be taken from the other main link module.
DCE Timing from I/O Channel
Similarly to the Internal mode, the DCE timing mode can be used in point-to-point
links and in independent networks. In any link or network, only one MX-2100 unit
may operate with DCE timing. All the other units must use loopback timing to
ensure synchronization. In this way, the unit that operates with DCE timing is the
source of the master clock and determines timing of the entire network.
Figure 1-32 shows a basic network configuration that uses a KML.7, KML.8 or
KML.F module in the DCE timing mode at the local MX-2100, with the timing
taken from one of its KHS.1 channels. In conjunction, the remote MX-2100
operates in the loopback timing mode.
DCE Timing Loopback Timing
XMIT

I/O Modules
DTE
DDS Clock
KHS.1

Network
RCV
Clock

MX-2100 MX-2100
Master
Clock Channel
in DTE2
Timing

Figure 1-32. Typical DCE from I/O Timing Mode Application (KML.7, KML.8, KML.F)

DCE Timing from Main Link

In dual link configurations, the DCE timing mode can be used by the KML.7,
KML.8 or KML.F main link module in order to use the other installed main link as
the timing source. The source main link can be of any type (for example KML.1),
and be operating in any of the timing modes relevant for the type, as were
previously described.
Figure 1-33 shows a basic dual link configuration that uses a KML.7, KML.8 or
KML.F module (KML A) in the DCE timing mode, with the timing taken from the
other main link (KML B). In conjunction, the remote MX-2100 connected to KML

Application Considerations 1-43

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

A operates in the loopback timing mode to ensure synchronization. The clock for
KML B can be any relevant internal or external source.

Note When a main link operates in DTE timing mode with the other main link as the
clock source, the receiving main link timing must be locked to the source main link
clock by the DEF SYS command (defined by the LINK_CLK parameter).

Loopback Timing

I/O Modules
DCE Timing
KML A

XMIT RCV
MX-2100
Clock Clock

KML B
Any Timing
MX-2100

Figure 1-33. Typical DCE from ML Timing Mode Application (KML.7, KML.8, KML.F)

Main Link Timing Considerations in Bypassing and Multidrop

Configurations
In bypassing and multidrop configurations, data is directly transferred between the
two links of a MX-2100-2100 unit. To maintain bit integrity, the two links must
have a common timing reference. All the MX-2100 units connected in a system
that uses bypassing and multidropping must use a common timing reference.
The KDI module can be used to determine the reference source for both main
links of a MX-2100, by internally locking their timing. The available selections are
as follows:
• Link A: the clock of main link A serves as the local reference, therefore the
timing of link B is locked internally to link A timing.
• Link B: the clock of main link B serves as the local reference, therefore the
timing of link A is locked internally to link B timing.
• None: each link interface receives external timing signals from a common
reference source.

When two links in a system configuration are connected to different channels of a

data network, neither link can be selected as a timing reference for the other link.
The channels have their own timing reference. The connections are usually made
by modems or other data communication equipment that provides receive and
transmit timing signals, and the two links use DTE timing. In this common situation,
the common timing reference requirement is inherently fulfilled (the timing
reference is provided by the data transmission network).

1-44 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Data Channel Clock Modes

MX-2100 provides several clock modes for data channels. The following various
system I/O modules support all, or some of these modes.
• Clock Mode 1 - DCE. In the DCE clock mode, the MX-2100 channel provides
transmit and receive clocks for the equipment connected to the data sub
channel, as shown in Figure 1-34. This clock mode is usually required for
connection to DTE equipment.

DTE
XMIT Clock

KHS.1
RCV Clock
Channel Timing
Mode DCE
MX-2100

Figure 1-34. Clock Mode 1 (DCE)

• Clock Mode 2 - DTE1. In the DTE1 clock mode, the MX-2100 data channel
sends data accompanied by clock to the connected equipment and accepts
data from the equipment according to the equipment clock, as shown in
Figure 1-35. In this mode, an elastic buffer (FIFO) is used in the receive path of
the channel to absorb timing jitter. For KLS.1 data modules, the elastic buffer
size is ±2 bits; for KHS.1 data modules, the buffer size is ±4 bits.

This clock mode is usually required for "tail end" connections, when a DCE is
connected to a data sub channel, and its timing is locked to the MX-2100
timing.

XMIT Clock
KHS.1

DCE
RCV Clock
Tail-End
Circuit Channel Timing
Mode DTE 1
MX-2100

Figure 1-35. Clock Mode 2 (DTE1)

• Clock Mode 3 - DTE2. In the DTE2 clock mode, the MX-2100 data channel
transmits and receives data according to the clock received from the modems
that connect it to the transmission equipment.

To compensate for jitter and short-term instabilities, elastic buffers are used at the
input and output of each channel (±2 bits for KLS.1 data modules, and ±4 bits for
KHS.1 modules).
The DTE2 clock mode is required in various applications, such as data channels
connected to a digital data switch. The data switch provides the clock signal for
both MX-2100 and the equipment connected to MX-2100
(Figure 1-36). The clock signals are received from the modems serving the data
channel.

Application Considerations 1-45

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

When operating channels in the DTE2 clock mode, one of the data channels can
be selected as the external timing reference source for the entire system timing.
The external timing option is always used because it ensures the main link transmit
and receive data rates are locked to the corresponding channel rates. If the main
link data rates are not locked to the corresponding channel rates, bit integrity will
be lost. MX-2100 units integrated in a large network that includes a master timing
reference ensures locked timing without the use of external timing. The master
timing source is used by all the equipment in the network. This includes data
equipment connected to the MX-2100 channels and the transmission equipment
serving the main link. Do not use the DTE2 clock mode when the main link timing
is derived from the internal oscillator of MX-2100.
If you are using a MX-2100 equipped with KML.5, KML.6, KML.7, KML.8,
KML.10, or KML.F modules and you cannot attain the conditions for master timing
as described above, do not use DTE2 clock mode.
External Timing
DTE
XMIT Clock Digital XMIT Clock

KHS.1
Data
RCV Clock Network RCV Clock
Modem Modem

Mode DTE 2
MX-2100
Master
Clock

Figure 1-36. Clock Mode 3 (DTE2)

Timing Modes of ISDN Channels

ISDN basic rate access channels are available on the KHS.U and KVF.4/S0
modules. These channels provide the interface between the MX-2100 system and
the ISDN network.

Timing of Channels with "U" Interface

The transmit timing of a channel with "U" interface, such as a KHS.U module, is
locked to the nodal timing of MX-2100. The system nodal timing depends on the
selected operating mode of the channel:
• NT Mode. In the NT mode, the ISDN "U" interfaces are usually connected to
an ISDN switch, whose timing is generally provided by an accurate and stable
source.
One of the "U" interface ports connected to the network termination (NT) unit
must be selected as an external clock source for MX-2100. Thus the MX-2100
nodal clock, and therefore the transmit timing of the "U" interface, are locked
to the timing of the NT unit.
• LT Mode. MX-2100 provides the transmit clock for the "U" interface. The
receive timing is recovered from the signal received from the user's terminal
equipment.

1-46 Application Considerations

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Timing of Channels with "S" Interface

The transmit timing of a channel with "S" interface, such as a KVF.4/S0 module,
depends on the selected operating mode:
• NT Mode. MX-2100 provides the transmit clock for the "S" interface. The
receive timing is recovered from the signal received from the user's terminal
equipment.
• TE Mode. One of the "S" interface ports connected to the network termination
(NT) unit must be selected as an external clock source for MX-2100. Thus the
MX-2100 nodal clock, and therefore the transmit timing of the "S" interface, are
locked to the timing of the NT unit.

Sub Link Timing

The KVF.5 modules include a standard T1 or E1 sub link interface. The following
timing options are available:
• T1/E1 Line Signal. The receive clock of the sub link is always derived from the
incoming T1 or E1 line signal, and the transmit clock is derived from the nodal
timing source of MX-2100.
• Recovered Receive Clock. The recovered receive clock of the sub link can be
selected as the reference for the MX-2100 nodal timing. If this option is not
used, the equipment connected to the sub link must operate with loopback
timing, or its timing must be locked to the same source that serves as the
reference for the MX-2100 nodal timing.

Main Link Interface Characteristics

V.35 Interface (Module KML.1)

The V.35 interface supports all the interface signals specified by ITU-T Rec. V.35.
Note the following:
• The DTR signal is constantly ON as long as MX-2100 is powered.
• The RTS signal is normally ON, except when a local main link loop is
connected.
• The DSR and CTS signals are handled in accordance with user's selection:
− When the DSR&CTS parameter is set to external, and the DSR and/or CTS
signals are OFF, the transmit data line is continuously held at MARK.
− When the DSR&CTS parameter is set to internal, the DSR and CTS signals
are ignored (internally interpreted as being continuously ON).

RS-232 Interface (Module KML.2)

The RS-232 interface supports all the interface signals specified by EIA RS-232.
Refer to the notes regarding the DTR, RTS, DSR and CTS signals presented for the
V.35 interface.

Application Considerations 1-47

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

V.36/RS-422/RS-530 Interface (Module KML.3)

The RS-530 interface supports all the interface signals specified by EIA RS-530,
with the following exceptions:
• Refer to the notes regarding the RTS, CTS and DSR signals presented for the
V.35 interface.
• The DTR signal is not supported. The line is used as ERC (external receive
clock) output line.

X.21 Interface (Module KML.4)

The X.21 interface provides partial support for interface signals. The signals not
fully supported are as follows:
• The C (control) signal is constantly ON.
• The I (indication) signal is used as follows:
− When the I signal is ON, the interface operates normally.
− When the signal is OFF, MX-2100 sends a continuous MARK (binary "1") on
the main link.

G.703 Codirectional Interface (Module KML.5)

The G.703 codirectional interface complies with all the requirements of ITU-T
Rec. G.703 applicable to codirectional interfaces. This interface supports only data
rates of 64 and 128 kbps.

Standard DDS CSU/DSU (Module KML.6)

The KML.6 main link interface complies with AT&T Pub. 62310: Standard Digital
Data Service (DDS), Channel Interface Specifications. The interface supports data
rates of 9.6, 19.2, and 56 kbps.

T1 Link Interface (Module KML.7)

The KML.7 module supports both the D4 (SF) and ESF framing formats, in
accordance with user's selection. Zero suppression over the line is user-selectable
(transparent (AMI) coding, B7ZS, or B8ZS).
The T1 line interface meets the requirements of AT&T TR-62411, ANSI T1.403,
and ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704. Jitter performance complies with the requirements
of AT&T TR-62411.

E1 Link Interface (Module KML.8)

The E1 link interface meets the requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, and
G.732, and supports both 256N and 256S multiframes (2 or 16 frames per
multiframe, respectively), in accordance with user's selection. The KML.8 module
also supports the CRC-4 option, including support for the E bit, as specified in
ITU-T Rec. G.704, thereby allowing the carrier to monitor the link to MX-2100.
CRC-4 use is user-programmable.

1-48 Application Considerations

 MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

The KML.8 module uses the HDB-3 line code. Jitter performance complies with
the requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.823. The module has two line interfaces: a
120Ω balanced interface, and a 75Ω unbalanced interface.

ISDN "S" Interface (Module KML.10/S)

The ISDN basic rate access "S" interface complies with ITU-T Rec. I.430. The
interface operates at a nominal rate of 192 kbps, and carries two B data channels
(nominal rate - 64 kbps), one D signaling channel (nominal rate - 16 kbps), and
additional framing and maintenance overhead data. The line coding is 2B1Q. The
line impedance is 100Ω. The user can select whether to connect or not the
internal line termination of the module.

ISDN "U" Interface (Module KML.10/U)

The ISDN basic rate access "U" interface complies with the ANSI T1.601 and ETSI
DTR/TM3002 standards. The line data rate is 160 kbps, and the line coding is
2B1Q. The utilization of the B and D channels is similar to that described above
for the KML.10/S module. The line impedance is 135Ω.

Fiber-Optic Link Interface (Module KML.F)

The fiber-optic link interface of the KML.F module uses a proprietary signaling
format which ensures optimum performance. To optimally meet a wide range of
system requirements, the fiber-optic interface can be ordered for operation over
62.5/125 micron multi-mode fibers (typical attenuation - 3.5 dB/km), as well as over
low-loss 9/125 micron single-mode fibers (typical attenuation - 0.4 dB/km).
Each option can be ordered with ST or FC-PC connectors; SMA connectors are
also available at 850 nm.
Table 1-4 provides information on the characteristics of the optical interface.
Typical range is up to 4.5 km at 850 nm over multimode fiber, up to 45 km at
1300 nm over single-mode fiber with LED transmitters, up to 60 km with 1300 nm
laser transmitters, and up to 100 km with 1550 nm laser transmitters.

Table 1-4. KML.F Fiber-Optic Interface Characteristics

Wavelength Fiber Type Transmitter Power Receiver Optical Maximum Receiver

Type Coupled Sensitivity Budget Receiver Dynamic
into Fiber Input Range
Power
850 nm 62.5/125 µm LED -18 dBm -38 dBm 20 dB -10 dBm 28 dB
multi-mode
1300 nm 9/125 µm LED -18 dBm -40 dBm 22 dB -12 dBm 28 dB
single-mode Laser -12 dBm -40 dBm 28 dB -12 dBm 28 dB
1550 nm 9/125 µm Laser -12 dBm -40 dBm 28 dB -12 dBm 28 dB
single-mode

Application Considerations 1-49

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

1.4 I/O Module Applications

There are many applications for the different MX-2100 I/O modules. For details,
refer to the corresponding sections of the I/O modules in Part II of this manual.

1.5 Technical System Characteristics

Main Link Number of Main Links MX-2100: 1 or 2

MX-2104: 1

Multiplexing Technique Time Division, Bit Interleaved

Multiplexing Efficiency Typically 98.5%
Bit Rates 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 32, 48, 56, 64, 128, 192,
(dependant on KML type) 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, 1536 kbps
Interface and Connector
Type
KML.1 Module V.35, 34-pin female connector
KML.2 Module V.24/RS-232, 25-pin D-type female connector
KML.3 Module V.36/RS-422/RS-530, 25-pin D-type female
connector
KML.4 Module X.21, 15-pin D-type female connector
KML.5 Module G.703 codirectional, RJ-45 (8-pin) connector
KML.6 Module Standard DDS, RJ-48 (8-pin) connector
KML.7 Module T1 link, 100Ω balanced, RJ-45 (8-pin)
connector
KML.8 Module E1 link, 120Ω balanced, RJ-48 (8-pin)
connector
E1 link, 75Ω balanced, two BNC connector
KML.10/S Module S-type interface, 100Ω balanced, RJ-45
(8-pin) connector
KML.10/U Module U-type interface, 135Ω balanced, RJ-45
(8-pin) connector
KML.F Module Fiber-optic (850 mm), ST, SMA or FC/PC
connector
Fiber-optic (1300 mm, 1550 mm), ST or
FC/PC connector

1-50 Technical System Characteristics

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

Control Signals
RS-232 & V.35 Full local support of all control signals
V.36 Full local support of all control signals, with
the exception of RI
X.21 Local support of C and I
Clock Modes
KML.1, KML.2, KML.3, DTE, External DCE and DCE
KML.4
KML.5, KML.6 Internal and Loopback
KML.7, KML.8, KML.F Internal, Loopback and DCE
KML.10 DTE
Equipment MX-2100 MX-2104
Enclosure
Physical Description 18 slot card cage 4 slot card cage
Slot Use 2 power supply slots Built-in power supply
2 main link slots Built-in main link
1 common logic slot Built-in common logic
1 optional slot 0 optional slots
12 I/O slots 4 I/O slots
Dimensions 19” rack mount, front-mounting or standalone
unit
Height 13.26 cm/5.22 in 4.4 cm/1.75 in
(3U) (1U)
Width 43.7 cm/17.20 in 43.0 cm/17.30 in
Depth 25.25 cm/9.94 in 25.4 cm/10 in
Power Requirements
Supply Voltages 100 to 240 VAC 100 to 240 VAC
(±10%), 50/60 Hz (±10%), 50/60 Hz
-24 VDC or -48 VDC -48 VDC
Power Consumption 30 VA, 50 VA 20 VA max
Environment
Operating Temperature 32 to 104°F (0 to +40°C)
Storage Temperature 0 to 160°F (-20 to -70°C)
Humidity Up to 90%, non-condensing

Technical System Characteristics 1-51

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Management
Front Panel Control 2×16 character LCD display and three
push-buttons
LED Indicators Main link and power supply on line
Main link TX and RX
Selectable I/O channel TX and RX
Selectable I/O channel control
Data: RTS and DCD
Voice: E-lead and M-lead
Local sync
Remote sync
Alarm indication
Test in progress
Supervision Port Asynchronous RS-232 or Hayes compatible
Connector dial-up modem interface
Data Rates 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6 kbps
For ASCII terminal connection: 9.6 kbps only
Word Format 7/8 bit, even/odd/no parity, 1 stop bit format
Interface Type DTE or DCE
Connection Type 9-pin female D-type
Dial Port Connector 9-pin female D-type
Ethernet Port UTP or BNC Ethernet connector
SNMP Management Provides complete control, configuration and
System Interface monitoring
Automatic recognition of all modules and
their status
Three level security access administration
Alarm/event recording
Diagnostics Power-up self-test
Continuous self-test during normal operation
Link test when configuration downloading is
invoked
Main Link Tests Local loopback
Remote loopback
Loop 2 and loop 3 on main link modem as
defined in ITU-T Rec. V.54

1-52 Technical System Characteristics

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 General Information

I/O Channel Tests Local loopback

Remote loopback
Pseudo-random sequence transmission test (511-bit
pattern)
BERT (bit error rate test using 511-bit pattern pseudo-
random sequence)
ITU-T Rec. V.54 loop 2 and loop 3 by interface
connector pins
Tone injection for voice modules
Alarms LCD alarm buffer: stores one alarm of each type
Supervision terminal alarm buffer: stores the last 100
alarms. Each alarm time and date stamped
ALM RLY connector RJ-12 connector
For pinout refer to Appendix A.
Dial Port connector 9-pin female connector
Direct connection to dial up modem
For pinout refer to Appendix A.

Technical System Characteristics 1-53

Chapter 1 General Information MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

1-54 Technical System Characteristics

 Chapter 2
Installation

2.1 Introduction
This chapter provides installation and setup instructions for the MX-2100 enclosure
and for the modules that are part of the basic system configuration. The
information in this chapter includes:
• The site requirements and prerequisites necessary for installing MX-2100
• The equipment needed to run MX-2100
• The contents of the MX-2100 package
• The installation and setup of the MX-2100 system
• The various MX-2100 interfaces and connection instructions
• The initial setup and configuration of the MX-2100 system.

After installing the MX-2100 system, it is necessary to configure the system in

accordance with the specific user's requirements. Refer to the Configuring
MX-2100 chapter.
After the preliminary configuration, the system can be managed by MX-2100’s
front panel or by means of a SNMP network management station. Refer to the
User's Reference Manual of the network management station for operating
instructions.
In case a problem is encountered, refer to the Diagnostics chapter for test and
diagnostics instructions.

No internal settings, adjustment, maintenance, and repairs may be performed

by either the operator or the user; such activities may be performed only by a
skilled technician who is aware of the hazards involved. Always observe
Warning standard safety precautions during installation, operation, and maintenance of
this product.

Introduction 2-1
Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

2.2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites

Input Power Requirements

For AC operation, the MX-2100 unit should be installed within
1.5m (5 feet) of an easily-accessible grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the
mains voltage of the ordered KPS module. KPS.4 and KPS.6 modules of MX-2100
and the AC power supply of MX-2104 can operate on AC supply voltages in the
range of 100 to 240 VAC, at input frequencies of 47 through 440 Hz. The
maximum input current varies with the input voltage.
For DC operation, the MX-2100 unit should be connected to a -48 VDC or
-24 VDC source (in accordance with the nominal voltage of the ordered KPS
module) through a circuit breaker. The DC source must comply with the
requirements of EN60950.
Grounding

For your protection and to prevent possible damage to equipment when a fault
condition, e.g., lightning stroke or contact with high-voltage power lines,
occurs on the lines connected to the equipment, the case of the MX-2100 unit
Warning must be properly grounded at any time. Any interruption of the protective
(grounding) connection inside or outside the equipment, or the disconnection
of the protective ground terminal can make this equipment dangerous.
Intentional interruption is prohibited.

Before switching on this equipment and before connecting any cables, the
protective ground terminals of the equipment must be connected to a protective
ground. The grounding arrangements depend on the equipment power supply
source:
• AC-powered units: the grounding connection is made through the mains plug,
which must be inserted in a power socket (outlet) with protective ground
contact. Do not negate the protective ground contact by using an extension
cord (power cable) without a protective conductor (grounding).
• DC-powered units: the grounding connection is made through one of the pins
of the DC power connector.
• In addition, all units/PS modules have a grounding terminal: connect it to the
nearest grounding point using a short, wide copper braid (or a thick copper
wire).

Whenever possible, the MX-2100 units should be installed in a properly grounded

rack, connected to a reliable, low-resistance grounding system.

2-2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation

Channel Connection Considerations

Special cables can be ordered to connect the MX-2100 main link and I/O modules
either directly to the user equipment, or via a main distribution frame. T1 and E1
interfaces of MX-2100 modules must not be connected directly to the
telecommunication network. The connections must be made through a network
termination unit that provides separation between the interface conductors and
the telecommunication network conductors in accordance with the applicable
local regulations.
When a MX-2100 module with T1 interface connects to a system that requires
compliance with DSX-1 requirements, the distance between the module and the
DSX-1 unit (assuming 22 AWG pairs) should not exceed
200 m (655 ft).
Front and Rear Panel Clearance
Allow at least 90 cm (36 inches) of frontal clearance for operator access. Allow the
same clearance at the rear of the unit for interface cable connections and module
replacement.
Ambient Requirements
The range of ambient operating temperatures of MX-2100 is 32 to 104°F (0 to
+40°C), at a relative humidity of up to 90%, non-condensing.
MX-2100 is cooled by free air convection. Its cooling vents are located in the top
and bottom covers.
Caution To prevent overheating, do not obstruct the MX-2100 cooling vents and make sure
enough free space is available below, and above, MX-2100, to permit free air flow.
When MX-2100 is installed in a 19" rack, allow at least 1U of space below and
above the unit.

Electromagnetic Compatibility Considerations

MX-2100 is designed to comply with the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
requirements of Sub-Part J of FCC Rules, Part 15, for Class A electronic equipment.
To meet these standards, it is necessary to perform the following:
• Connect the MX-2100 unit to a low-resistance grounding system.
• Install blank panels to cover all empty slots. Appropriate blank panels can be
ordered from MDS.
Current and Power Requirements of MX-2100 Power Supply Modules
MX-2100 power supplies provide supply voltages of +5V, +12V, and -12V.
Table 2-1 lists the power requirements of the MX-2100 modules.

Site Requirements and Prerequisites 2-3

Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table 2-1. Power Consumption of MX-2100 Modules

I/O Module +5 VDC +12 VDC -12 VDC

Power Power Power
Consumption Consumption Consumption
[Watts] [Watts] [Watts]
KLS.1 0.26 0.36 0.216
KLS.1/NEW 0.25 0.36 0.24
KLS.2 0.41 0.264 0.072
KHS.1 0.8 0.78 0.084
KHS.1/V.35 0.8 0.78 0.12
KHS.2 1.055 0.912 0.084
KHS.703 0.8 – –
KHS.U 2.0 – –
KVC.1/E&M 0.875 – 0.18
KVC.1/FXS 1.15 – 0.396
KVC.1/FXO 0.875 – 0.06
KVC.1M/FXS 1.6 – 0.72
KVC.1M/FXSP 2.45 – 0.84
KVC.1M/FXO 1.05 – 0.3
KVC.1M/E&M 1.5 – 0.36
KVC.1M/FXS/CAN 2.1 – 0.72
KVC.1M/FXSP/CAN 2.95 – 0.84
KVC.1M/FXO/CAN 1.55 – 0.3
KVC.1M/E&M/CAN 2.25 – 0.36
KVC.3/FXO 2.5 – 0.3
KVC.3/E&M 2.5 – 0.24
KVC.3/FXS 3 – 1.2
KVC.3/FXSP 5 – 1.308
KVC.3M/S0 3.1 – 0.25
KVF.3/E&M 2.2 0.12 0.6
KVF.3/FXS 3.1 0.06 0.84
KVF.3/FXSP 3.25 0.12 0.96
KVF.3/FXO 2.3 0.12 0.54
KVF.4/FXS 4 – 0.72
KVF.4/FXSP 7.5 – 1.8
KVF.4/E&M 4.1 – 0.72

2-4 Site Requirements and Prerequisites

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation

I/O Module +5 VDC +12 VDC -12 VDC

Power Power Power
Consumption Consumption Consumption
[Watts] [Watts] [Watts]
KVF.4/FXO 4 – 0.6
KVF.4/FXSW 4.75 – 0.48
KVF.4/S0 4.5 – 0.24
KVF.5/MASTER 7.75 – 0.6
KVF.5/SLAVE 6.75 – 0.6
KVF.6/E1/16 4.9 – –
KVF.6/E1/31 6.9 – –
KVF.6/T1/12 4 – –
KVF.6/T1/24 5.6 – –
KVF.8/E&M 5.6 .048 0.44
KVF.8/FXO 6.72 .048 0.44
KVF.8/FXS 5 1.7 0.44
KTRE 4.25 0.24 0.24
KMBE 2.45 0.96 –
KMBE/N 2.45 0.96 –
KCL.1 0.375 0.06 0.036
KCL.1/N 0.5 0.156 0.042
KCL.2 1.95 0.02 0.042
KAI 0.325 0.012 –
KDI 1.1 – –
KML.1 (V.35) 1.125 0.42 0.012
KML.2 (V.24) 1.125 0.42 0.012
KML.3 (V.36) 1.125 0.42 0.012
KML.4 (X.21) 1.125 0.42 0.012
KML.5 (G.703) 1.75 – –
KML.1,2,3,4/N 1.35 0.4104 0.0576
KML.5/N (G.703) 2 – –
KML.6/N 1.6 0.42 –
KML.7/N 2 0.42 –
KML.8/N 2.05 0.42 –
KML.10/N 2.5 0.42 –
KML.F/ST13 3.4 – –
KML.F/ST85 3.35 – –

Site Requirements and Prerequisites 2-5

Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Current and Power Capabilities of MX-2100 Power Supply Modules

The following table lists the power that can be provided by the individual
MX-2100 power supply modules when cooled by free air connection.

Table 2-2. Nominal Power Consumption of Power Supply Modules

Module +5V Output +12V Output -12V Output Maximum

Total Power
Per Module
Power [W] Power [W] Power [W] [W]
KPS.3, KPS.5 15.5 4.8 4.8 25
KPS.4 30 12 9.6 50
KPS.6 55 10.2 10.2 56
KPS.7 55 10.2 10.2 56
MX-2104/AC 30 7.2 7.2 30
MX-2104/48 40 7.2 7.2 40

Note
• Power supply modules of the MX-2100 have load-sharing capabilities. By
installing two KPS modules it is possible to double the allowed loading.
If the power requirements exceed the capabilities of a single power supply
module, you cannot consider that the two modules are providing redundancy.
Any failure must be immediately corrected.
• KPS.4
The nominal output power specified for the KPS.4 module can be safely
exceeded to the following maximum output power:
+5V 40W
+12V 18W
–12V 12W
The total power supplied by the module CANNOT exceed the Maximum Total
Power Per Supply of 50W.
• KPS.6, KPS.7
The +5V output must always be loaded.
The minimum current consumption from the +5V output is 3A (15W). If a lower
current is needed, use a power supply module with lower output currents.

With forced air cooling, the Maximum Total Power of the module can reach up
to 80W.

2-6 Site Requirements and Prerequisites

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation

Calculating Allowable Power Consumption

Use the following procedure to determine whether a MX-2100 power supply
module can provide the power and current requirements of the modules installed
in the enclosure:
1. For each voltage category, add the Power Consumptions of all the modules to
be installed (take values from Table 2-1).
Example: To install KVF.8/FXS, KML.1 and KCL.2, the +5V consumption
needed is 8.075W, +12 is 0.457W, -12 is 0.494W.
2. Check that the total power consumption for each voltage does not exceed the
nominal power consumptions for the chosen power supply. (For KPS.4, KPS.6
and KPS.7 refer to the note above.)
Example: For KPS.5:
8.075W ≤ 15.5? Yes
0.457W ≤ 4.8? Yes
0.494W ≤ 4.8? Yes
3. Add together all three power consumptions (per voltage) for the given
application and check that the total power consumption per power supply
does not exceed the Maximum Total Power Per Supply. (For KPS.4, KPS.6 and
KPS.7 refer to the note above.)
Example:
9.026 ≤ 25? Yes
If any one of the power supply consumption ratings (per voltage or per Maximum
Total Power Per Supply) is exceeded, use one of the following methods.
The following methods are arranged in decreasing order of preference. If any
method corrects the power supply current ratings, there is no need to proceed
with the other methods.
• Method 1 - If you are using a MX-2104, exchange it for a MX-2100. If you are
using a MX-2100, install the KPS.6 module. A single KPS.6 module can meet
the supply requirements of most practical configurations.
• Method 2 - Install an additional KPS module, to share the load.
• Method 3 - Split the modules between two MX-2100 enclosures (consider
using a MX-2104 if you need no more than four additional modules). You may
also try to use an external ringer to supply necessary ring voltages instead of
deriving the ring voltage from the installed power supply modules (in cases of
FXSP voice modules).

Ratings of Ring and Feed Voltage Supplies

Two special-purpose power supply units are offered that can provide DC battery
feed and ringdown voltages for the voice modules used with MX-2100, e.g.,
KVC.1M, KVF.4, KVF.8, etc. These power supply units are independently powered
and do not draw current from the KPS modules installed in MX-2100.

Site Requirements and Prerequisites 2-7

Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Ringer-2000
Ringer-2000 is a standalone power supply unit that can provide power for up to
60 voice channels. Ringer-2000 is intended for installation on shelves or in 19"
racks. Unit height is only 1U. Ringer-2000 is available in AC (115 VAC or
230 VAC) or DC (-24 VDC or -48 VDC) power supply versions.

Ringer-2200
Ringer-2200 is an enhanced standalone power supply unit that can provide
power for up to 120 voice channels. This is enough power for a MX-2100 chassis
fully equipped with 12 KVF.8 modules (96 channels). Ringer-2200 is intended for
installation on shelves or in 19" racks. Unit height is only 1U. Ringer-2200 is
available in 115 VAC or 230 VAC power supply versions.

KM-Ringer
KM-Ringer can provide power for up to 32 voice channels (or 24 KVF.8 channels).
KM-Ringer is a small unit that can be located on shelves and desktops, or installed
as a plug-in module in a 3U high MX-2100 enclosure only. It occupies three I/O
enclosure slots. KM-Ringer is available in AC (115 to 230 VAC) or DC (-24 VDC or
-48 VDC) power supply versions.
For details see the appropriate Ringer Installation and Operation Manual.

2.3 Equipment Needed

The following describes the equipment needed to run the MX-2100.
Terminal Characteristics
Any standard ASCII terminal or PC emulating an ASCII terminal equipped with an
RS-232 communication interface can be used to control MX-2100 operation.
Make sure to initialize MX-2100 for correct terminal operation as explained in
Initial Setup and Configuration on page 2-21, otherwise some commands may not
work properly.
Software Requirements
The software necessary to run the MX-2100 supervision program is contained in
the program EPROM of the KCL.2 module of the MX-2100. MX-2100 stores all the
configuration information generated or altered during the communication with the
terminal. No information is stored in the terminal.
Supervisory Port Interface Characteristics
MX-2100 has an RS-232 asynchronous DCE port, designated Supervisory Port
Connector (CONTROL-DCE), located on the KCL.2 module. This port has a 9-pin
D-type female connector, and is intended for direct connection to terminals. Since
terminals usually have DTE interfaces, the connection to this port is made by
means of a straight-through cable. For connection to a modem, you need a
cross-cable (null modem cable).

2-8 Equipment Needed

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation

The user can select, for each port, the data rate (9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6 kbps), and
the word format (number of data bits, parity type, and number of stop bits). The
default communication data rate is 9.6 kbps. The default word format consists of
one start bit, eight data bits, no parity, and one stop bit.
The SP (CONTROL-DCE) supervisory port continuously monitors the incoming
data stream and will immediately respond to any input string received through this
port.
Connection of Supervision Terminal
A supervision terminal can be connected either directly to the MX-2100 SP
(CONTROL-DCE) supervisory port, or through a modem or any other type of
full-duplex data link. MX-2100 supports only a dial-in connection.

Handshaking Protocol - CONTROL DCE Port

The handshaking between MX-2100 and the equipment connected to it
(supervision terminal, SNMP management station, modem, etc.) uses the control
lines in the MX-2100 SP connector.
The control lines being used in the DCE and DTE interfacing mode, and the
direction of the control signals, are detailed in the following chart.

Table 2-3. DCE and DTE Interfacing Mode - Control Lines

Control Line Interface Type

DCE DTE
CTS Out Not used
DCD Out Out
DSR Out Out
DTR In In
RI Not used In
RTS In In

Data Terminal Ready (DTR)

The equipment connected to the SP port must set the DTR line ON (active) to gain
control over MX-2100 and start a management session. When the DTR is ON, the
MX-2100 front panel controls are disabled, and the LCD shows: TERMINAL ON
LINE.
To end the current session, the DTR line is switched OFF (inactive). This ends the
control connection, and returns the control to the MX-2100 front panel. If
password protection is used, the password must be entered again the next time the
DTR line is switched ON to start a new session.
Request to Send (RTS)
The RTS line is normally ON (active) during a management session.
When the RTS line is OFF (inactive), MX-2100 interprets any data received from
the terminal on the TD line as MARK.

Equipment Needed 2-9

Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Clear to Send (CTS)

The state of the CTS line is determined by the CTS parameter:
• ON - The CTS line is always ON (active)
• =RTS - The CTS line follows the RTS line.

Data Carrier Detect (DCD)

The state of the DCD line depends on the communication address (node number):
• When the node address is 0, the DCD line is always ON (active).
• When a non-zero node address is used (multidrop operation), the DCD line is
switched ON (active) when data is detected on the RD line, provided
MX-2100 recognizes its own address in the data stream. To simulate DTE
operation, the delay between these events can be set by the user (by means of
the DCD_DEL parameter).

Ring Indication (RI)

The RI line is used only with dial-up modems (DTE interface mode).
The RI line is normally OFF (inactive); when the modem attached to the MX-2100
SP connector detects an incoming call, the RI line is switched ON (active). See also
the DSR line.
Data Set Ready (DSR)
• Usually, the DSR line is configured to track the DTR line. In this case, if the
supervisory port interface is DTE, the DSR line will be switched ON for 5
seconds when the RI line is ON while the DTR line is OFF.
• If the supervisory port interface is DCE, the DSR line can also be configured to
be continuously ON. However, if the DTR line switches to OFF, the DSR line
will also switch to OFF for 5 seconds.
In addition, MX-2100 always switches the DSR line OFF (inactive) for 5
seconds when the EXIT command is executed, and when the disconnect
time-out expires.
AUTOBAUD Function
When the AUTOBAUD function is enabled, MX-2100 can identify the rate of
incoming data by analyzing the timing of three consecutive pairs of Carriage
Return and Line Feed characters (generated by pressing three times the carriage
return key). The detected data rate is then used for the current communication
session. The automatic baud rate identification procedure is performed (or
repeated) whenever three consecutive carriage returns are received after one of
the following events occurs:
• The DTR line has been switched OFF
• The EXIT command has been executed
• The idle disconnect time-out expired because no data has been exchanged
with the supervision terminal.

In case one of these events occurred, MX-2100 assumes that the current
communication session has been terminated. Therefore, when the password
protection is enabled the password must be entered again before the supervision
terminal can resume communication with MX-2100.

2-10 Equipment Needed

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation

Handshaking Protocol with Dial-up Modem

The handshaking procedure between MX-2100 and a dial-up modem uses the
control signals in the optional MNG connector, and is essentially similar to the
handshaking with a terminal. The difference is that the directions of the control
signals are reversed relative to their direction in the SP (CONTROL DCE)
connector when the SP interface is set to DCE. The control lines and the direction
of the control signals in the MNG connector is detailed in the following chart.

Table 2-4. MNG Connector - Control Lines

SP (CONTROL DTE) Control Line Direction

CTS In
DCD In
DSR Out
DTR In
RI In
RTS Out

2.4 Package Contents

The MX-2100 package includes the following items:
• MX-2100/2104 unit
• Power cable
• WAN connectors
• Optional I/O modules
• MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual.

Package Contents 2-11

Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

2.5 Installation and Setup of MX-2100

To install a MX-2100, refer below to MX-2100. To install a MX-2104, refer below
to MX-2104.
MX-2100
MX-2100 is intended for installation on shelves and racks. Do not connect power
to the enclosure before it is installed in the designated position.
For rack installation, it is necessary to install two brackets to the sides of the unit
(Figure 2-1). As illustrated below, you may install the brackets in two ways, to
orient the unit in accordance with your requirements (either with the MX-2100
front panel toward the front of the rack, or the module panels toward the front).

Install Brackets Here

if you want Access to Module Panels
from the Front of the Rack

Install Brackets Here

if you want the Front Panel
toward the Front of the Rack

Figure 2-1. Attachment of Brackets

After attaching the brackets, fasten the enclosure to the rack by four screws (two
on each side).
After fastening the enclosure, install the required modules and set the jumpers and
switches. Refer below to KPS Module.
MX-2104
The MX-2104 is intended for 19" rack installation. Before installing the enclosure,
check whether the required I/O modules are in place, in accordance with the
installation plan.

2-12 Installation and Setup of MX-2100

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation

The enclosure is fastened to the rack by four screws (two on each side). Do not
connect power to the enclosure before it is installed in the designated position.
KPS Module

Setting the Internal Jumpers

The KPS modules include one internal jumper, designated FG=SG. The location
of the jumper is shown in Figure 2-2. This jumper controls the connection between
the internal signal ground and the frame (enclosure) ground. The module is
delivered with the jumper set to YES. Set the jumper to NO if you need the signal
ground to float with respect to the frame ground. If redundant modules are
installed, make sure that the jumper is set to the same position on both modules.

YES
NO

SGND = FGND

YES
Signal Ground Connected to
Frame Ground

Signal Ground not Connected

NO to Frame Ground

Figure 2-2. Typical KPS Module, Location of Internal Jumper

Installing the KPS Module

➤ To install the KPS module:
1. Insert the KPS module in slot 1.
2. If an additional redundant module is used for MX-2100 only, install it in slot 2.
For example, a KPS.7 module can be used as a backup to an AC power supply
module with similar rating, e.g., KPS.6.
Note
You can install a redundant module in an operating enclosure without turning off
the enclosure power. In this case, after the module is installed, connect its power
cable and set its power switch to ON.

Installation and Setup of MX-2100 2-13

Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

KCL.2 Module

Setting the Internal Switches and Jumpers

The KCL.2 module has two four-section DIP switches, and three user-selectable jumpers. Their
locations are shown in Figure 2-3. Table 2-5 describes switch and jumper functions.

Figure 2-3. Module KCL.2, Internal Switch and Jumpers

Note
In addition to the switches and jumpers described in this section, the KCL.2 module
has other switches and jumpers that are set by the manufacturer and may not be
changed by the user.

Table 2-5. Module KCL.2, Internal Switch and Jumper Functions

Item Function
Jumper JP5 Enables /disables the internal watchdog function during maintenance
ON - watchdog enabled (normal operation)
OFF - watchdog disabled
Default: ON

2-14 Installation and Setup of MX-2100

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation

Table 2-5. Module KCL.2, Internal Switch and Jumper Functions (Cont.)

Item Function
Switch SW2 (Switch is externally accessible from the panel)
1 Determines whether the Supervisory Port is used as a direct terminal or
for a SLIP connection:
ON - direct terminal
OFF - SLIP connection
SP Parameters: 9600 bps, 8,1,N

2 Currently not in use

3 Local basic software download:

OFF - normal function
ON - download software

4 For debugging purposes. Should always be set to OFF

Switch SW3
1 Sets MX-2100 as a Master. Should always be set to OFF
(Master only)

2 Database initialization. Should always be OFF

3 Determines whether MX-2100 requires a password when working with a

terminal:
ON - requires password
OFF - does not require password

4 Not in use. Should always be set to OFF

Note
For MX-2104, the access to DIP Switch SW3 is through a hole in the upper cover.

Note
You should load the default supervisory port password and communication
parameters (by setting sections 2 and 3 of DIP Switch SW3 to ON) if the current
parameters are not known, and the supervision terminal cannot communicate with
the MX-2100 enclosure. In such a case, first make sure the supervision terminal is
set for the correct parameters.

Installing the KCL.2 Module

Install the KCL.2 module in slot 5 of MX-2100.

Installation and Setup of MX-2100 2-15

Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

2.6 Interfaces and Connections

BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS INSTRUMENT, the protective earth terminals
of this instrument must be connected to the protective ground conductor of
the (mains) power cord. The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket
Warning outlet provided with a protective earth contact. The protective action must not
be negated by use of an extension cord (power cable) without a protective
conductor (grounding).
Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the
instrument) or disconnecting the protective earth terminal can make this
instrument dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Make sure that only fuses of the required rating, are used for replacement. The
use of repaired fuses and the short-circuiting of fuse holders is forbidden.
Whenever it is likely that the protection offered by fuses has been impaired,
the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any
unintended operation.

KPS Module
HIGH VOLTAGE: Dangerous voltages are present inside the KPS module when
it is connected to power. Do not connect the KPS module to power before it is
properly installed within the MX-2100 enclosure, and disconnect the input
Warning power from the module before removing it from the enclosure. The
installation and preparation of the module shall be done by a qualified person
who is aware of the hazards involved.

Rear Panels
The rear panels of the various types of KPS modules are shown in Figure 2-4. The
following table also lists the functions of the components located on these panels.

Table 2-6. KPS Modules, Rear Panels

Item Description
POWER Switch Turns the power on/off. Lights when the input voltage is
connected.
Label Indicates the nominal mains operating voltage of the
module and the fuse rating
Power Connector Connector for the module input power voltage:
(with integral fuse for KPS.4, and KPS.6 only)
KPS.3 and KPS.7: -48 VDC
KPS.4, KPS.6: 100 to 240 VAC
KPS.5: -24 VDC

2-16 Interfaces and Connections

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation

KPS.3 KPS

Grounding ON/OFF
POWER
Grounding ON/OFF Terminal Switch
POWER
Terminal Switch
Label
(Supply PS.4
100-240VAC
3A T 250V
Voltage) CAUTION : FOR CONTINUED
PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF
FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME
VDC-IN TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.

Power Fuse
0 -48 Connector
Power
Connector

Module KPS.3 Module KPS.4

KPS.5 KPS KPS.7

Grounding ON/OFF
POWER
Grounding ON/OFF Terminal Switch Grounding ON/OFF
POWER POWER
Terminal Switch Terminal Switch
Label
(Supply PS.6
100-240VAC
3A T 250V
Voltage) 48V
VDC-IN
+
Power Fuse -
0 -24 Connector
Power CAUTION : FOR CONTINUED
PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF
FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME
Power
Connector TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE.
Connector

Module KPS.5 Module KPS.6 Module KPS.7

Figure 2-4. KPS Modules, Rear Panels

Power Connection
3. Check that the ON/OFF switches on the KPS modules are set to OFF. Refer to
Figure 2-4.
4. Connect the power cable first to the connector on the KPS module, then to
the mains outlet. Refer to Figure 2-4.
Note
When redundant power supplies are used, it is recommended to connect the
power cables to outlets powered by different circuits.
The KPS.3 and KPS.5 modules do not have a power switch, and will start operating
as soon as power is connected.

KCL.2 Module

Rear Panel
Figure 2-5 shows the rear panels of the KCL.2 module. The KCL.2 is ordered with
one of the following three Management Port interfaces:
• 9-pin Dial Port
• UTP Ethernet interface
• BNC Ethernet interface.

Table 2-7 describes the functions of the panel components.

Interfaces and Connections 2-17

Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

KCL.2 KCL.2 KCL.2

RESET RESET RESET
Reset Switch Reset Switch Reset Switch
TEST ALARM TEST ALARM TEST ALARM
Test Indicator Test Indicator Test Indicator
Alarm Indicator Alarm Indicator Alarm Indicator
C C C
O O O
Supervisory Port N Supervisory Port N Supervisory Port N
T T T
Connector R Connector R Connector R
O O O
L L L

E E
T T
BNC Ethernet H
E UTP Ethernet H
E Dial Port M
N
Connector R
N Connector R
N Connector G
E E
T T

External External External

DIP Switch DIP Switch DIP Switch

Alarm Relay Alarm Relay Alarm Relay

ALM RLY ALM RLY ALM RLY

Figure 2-5. Module KCL.2, Rear Panel

Table 2-7. Module KCL.2, Rear Panel

Item Function
RESET Push-button Pressing the RESET push-button causes the reinitialization of all the
modules in the MX-2100 enclosure
TEST Indicator Indicates that a test (or test loop) is being performed on one of the local
MX-2100 modules, or on the main link modem.
When downloading is activated, the TEST indicator lights when a test is
activated by the remote MX-2100 modules
ALARM Indicator Indicates that a fault has been detected in one of the MX-2100
modules
CONTROL 9-pin D-type female connector, for connection to an optional ASCII
(Supervisory Port) connector supervision terminal or to a SNMP network management station.
Connector pin allocation is given in Appendix A
MNG/ETHERNET connector One of the following, according to Management Port interface option
ordered:
• 9-pin D-type female connector used as a Dial Port (dial-in/dial-out)
• UTP connector to an Ethernet network
• BNC connector to an Ethernet network.
Connector pin allocation is given in Appendix A

2-18 Interfaces and Connections

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation

Table 2-7. Module KCL.2, Rear Panel (Cont.)

Item Function
External DIP switch (SW2) Described in Table 2-5
ALM RLY connector 6-pin RJ-12 connector with dry contacts for relaying alarms from the
MX-2100 to activate external equipment (such as lamps, buzzers, fans).
The Alarm Relay connector can also be used to relay external
equipment information to the MX-2100 (such as external sensor
information, or fan failure).
Connector rating: Max current is 500 mA, Max voltage is 50V
For pinout refer to Appendix A.

Connections to the Supervisory Port – KCL.2 Module

Find the supervision cable intended for connection to the enclosure, and connect
it to the SP connector on the KCL.2 module.
If the optional dial-out port is to be used, connect the corresponding cable to the
MNG connector on the KCL.2 module.

Connections to the Alarm Relay Connector – KCL.2 Module

Connect the external equipment to the RJ-12 Alarm Relay connector according to
the pin assignment described in Appendix A.
The connector functions as a dry contact relay. Under normal conditions, the
Normally Closed (NC) pin is shorted with the Common contact. When a MX-2100
alarm occurs, the Common contact will instead be shorted to the Normally Open
(NO) pin and the device connected to the connector will be activated (similarly to
how the Alarm LED on the MX-2100 front panel is activated).
Connections to KML, Options, I/O Modules, and Ringers
Refer to the corresponding module/ringer Installation and Operation Manual.
MX-2104

Rear Panel
Figure 2-6 shows a typical rear view of the MX-2104 enclosure and identifies the
I/O slots.
Table 2-8 explains the components located on the MX-2104 rear panel.
FUSE 4 5 7 8
3
ALM ON
Power RST
CONTROL MNG 1234
TST
ALM RLY

∼100-240VAC 0.8A T 250V

X.21
1
9
2

Figure 2-6. MX-2104 Enclosure, Typical Rear View

Interfaces and Connections 2-19

Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table 2-8 MX-2104, Rear Panel Components

No. Item Description

1 Power connector (with Connector for the MX-2104 input power
integral fuse in AC version
only)
2 Label Indicates the nominal operating voltage of the
MX-2104, and the fuse rating
3 POWER switch Turns the power on/off
4 RST push-button Pressing the RST push-button causes the reinitialization
of all the modules in the MX-2100 enclosure
ALM indicator Indicates that a fault has been detected in one of the
MX-2100 modules
TST indicator Indicates that a test (or test loop) is being performed on
one of the local MX-2100 modules, or on the main link
modem.
When downloading is activated, the TEST indicator
lights when a test is activated by the remote MX-2100
modules
5 CONTROL connector 9-pin D-type female connector, for connection to an
optional ASCII supervision terminal or to a SNMP
network management station.
Connector pin assignment is given in the Alarms
appendix
6 MNG connector 9-pin D-type female connector used as a Dial Port
(dial-in/dial-out).
Connector pin assignment is given in the Alarms
appendix
7 External DIP Switch (SW2) Described in Table 2-5
8 ALM RLY connector 6-pin RJ-12 connector with dry contacts for relaying
alarms from the MX-2100 to activate external
equipment (such as lamps, buzzers, fans). The Alarm
Relay connector can also be used to relay external
equipment information to the MX-2100 (such as
external sensor information, or fan failure).
Connector rating: Max current is 500 mA, Max voltage
is 50V
For pin assignment refer to Appendix A.
9 Main Link connector (X.21 Connector for built-in main link. Pin assignments and
in this case) pin functions are same as for the corresponding plug-in
main link modules of the KM-2100 – described in each
main link Installation and Operation Manual.

2-20 Interfaces and Connections

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation

2.7 Initial Setup and Configuration

When starting a management session for the first time, it is recommended to
prepare MX-2100 for communication with the supervision terminal as explained
below. The preparations include the setting of switch SW2/3 on the KCL.2 module
(refer to KCL.2 Module on page 2-14 for more information), and the connection of
the terminal to MX-2100 (refer to Interfaces and Connections on page 2-16 for
more information).

Internal MX-2100 Settings

The default settings of all the sections of the switch SW3 on the KCL.2 module are
OFF. To ensure successful establishment of communication with the terminal, you
may need to change the settings of the PSWRD section, switch SW3 in section 3.
In general, you must enter a password when you start a management session. If
the password is incorrect, MX-2100 will not respond. The PSWRD section is used
to restore the default MX-2100 password (RAD).
With this section in the OFF position, you can define your own communication
parameters, password. To change to the default values, set the sections to ON, and
then press the RESET push-button of the KCL.2 module (if not, the change will
take effect the next time MX-2100 is turned on). The default values are then
loaded and stored.
After performing this procedure, return the switch sections to OFF.

Supervision Terminal
Configure the terminal for the communication parameters you selected for the
MX-2100 SP port (default values are listed above), select the full-duplex mode,
and turn terminal echo off.
Connections
Refer to Interfaces and Connections on page 2-16.
After making the required connections, turn the supervision terminal on. When
applicable, also turn on the modems and any other communication equipment
used to connect the terminal to MX-2100.

Initial Configuration
The prompt PASSWORD> indicates that password protection is enabled, and you
must enter the current password to proceed. However, if you set the PSWRD
section of the DIP switch to ON, a null password and node address is used,
therefore after pressing ENTER you will obtain the working prompt.
Press ENTER several times to see the working prompt of MX-2100, which is by
default >.
After the MX-2100 prompt is displayed on the terminal, define the terminal
control sequences using the command F or using the command init F[].
Refer to the Command Set Description appendix for more information. Typical
terminal control sequences are given in the following table.

Initial Setup and Configuration 2-21

Chapter 2 Installation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table 2-9. Typical Terminal Control Sequences

Function Terminal Type

TV920 VT52 VT100 Freedom 100/110 Freedom 220
Clear Screen 1B2A0000 N/A 1B5B324A 1B2A0000 1B5B324A
Cursor Home 1E000000 1B480000 1B5B4800 1E000000 1B5B4800
Cursor Right 0C000000 1B430000 1B5B3143 0C000000 1B5B3143

If the MX-2100 system is not yet configured, use the command DEF SYS to
define at least one PS module and one KCL.2 module. Refer to the Command Set
Description appendix for more information.

Supervisory Port Configuration

After completing the procedure given above, the supervisory port of MX-2100 uses
the default values. If necessary, change the configuration of the SP (supervisory)
port of MX-2100 by entering the command DEF SP. Refer to the Command Set
Description appendix for more information.
You will see the supervisory port configuration data form. A typical form with the
default values is shown below:
SPEED DATA PARITY INTERFACE CTS DCD_DEL DSR
9.6 8 NONE DCE ON 10 ON
POP_ALM PWD LOG_OFF AUXILLARY_DEVICE
NO NO NO NMS-SLIP

After selecting the required parameters, you may have to change the configuration
of the supervision terminal, to match the new values.
Set the IP address using the DEF AGENT command. Refer to the Command Set
Description appendix for more information. Then reset by pressing “power on” or
by using the RESET LOC command.

2-22 Initial Setup and Configuration

 Chapter 3
Configuring MX-2100

3.1 Introduction
In this chapter you will find detailed instructions for configuring MX-2100. The
information in this chapter includes:
• General description of MX-2100 control, display and push-button functions,
and menu organization
• Setting the configuration parameters for MX-2100.

Refer to the Operation chapter for a description of the MX-2100 front panel, and
the syntax, usage and commands of the MX-2100 supervision language.

3.2 Control of MX-2100 Operation

General
MX-2100 operating mode is determined by a set of parameters stored in the
internal non-volatile memory of the KCL.2 module. These parameters are selected
by the user, using the MX-2100 front panel push-buttons, a supervision terminal,
or a SNMP network management station. When main link bandwidth is allocated
to the MX-2100 management channel, the parameters that must be used by both
MX-2100 units connected by the main link can also be downloaded from one of
the units to the other unit.
After the operating parameters have been selected, a process called configuration
set-up, the MX-2100 no longer requires operator attendance.
The configuration stored in the MX-2100 memory is not affected when the power
is turned off. Upon power-up, the stored configuration is retrieved and its validity
is checked during the power-up self-test:
• If everything is OK, after power-up the MX-2100 assumes the last selected
configuration and is immediately ready for operation (unless the user wants to
change the system configuration).
• If errors are detected in the configuration data, the MX-2100 lets you load a
default configuration in its place. The default configuration, prepared by the
manufacturer, is stored in the program EPROM. The user can later modify the
default values as required.

Control of MX-2100 Operation 3-1

Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100 MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Front Panel Operating Instructions

All the operations that can be performed from the front panel are performed using
an interactive, menu-driven, user-friendly interface.
The user interface is controlled by means of the LCD display and three
push-buttons. The MX-2100 guides you in the execution of the required task by
means of simple and clear messages, presents the range of available functions and
parameter values, and checks your inputs.
Moreover, the MX-2100 will present to you only those functions and parameter
values available in the currently-configured operating mode for the modules
installed in your MX-2100.
If you make a configuration error, e.g., you select a parameter value that conflicts
with the current operating mode, the MX-2100 rejects the erroneous selection,
displays for a few seconds an error message that identifies the error, and then the
display returns to its previous state.
You will find detailed instructions for operating the MX-2100 in Chapter 4,
Operation. The configuration error messages, and instructions for correcting the
problem that is indicated by the error message, are given in the Alarms appendix.
Front Panel Menu
Figure 3-1 shows the organization of the front panel menu. The menu is
automatically enabled after successfully completing the power-up self-test. For
your convenience, the normal power-up message is shown in Figure 3-1.
The MX-2100 has several groups of configuration parameters. These groups are
listed in Table 3-1.
In addition to the configuration functions, the MX-2100 menu includes diagnostic
functions, reached under the ALARM BUFFER, TEST OPTION, and REM TEST ST
groups. These functions are described in Chapter 5, Diagnostics.

3-2 Control of MX-2100 Operation

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100

Table 3-1. MX-2100 Front Panel Configuration Parameters

Display Parameter Description Refer To...

SYSTEM Display and selection of system parameters: Configuring
PARAMETER – Main link master clock source the System
– Main link fallback clock source Parameters
– Downloading on page 3-9
– Main link operating mode
– Active main link
LINK PARAMETER Display and selection of main link parameters Configuring
the Main Link
Parameters
on page 3-11
CH PARM Display and selection of parameters for the various Configuring
types of modules and module channels the Channel
Parameters
on page 3-11
SP PARAMETERS Display and selection of the supervisory port Configuring
parameters: the SP
– Data rate Parameters on
– Number of data bits page 3-12
– Parity
– Interface type
– Management by SNMP network management stations

In addition to the parameters that can be configured from the front panel, the
MX-2100 has parameters that can be controlled only from a supervision terminal
or an SNMP network management station. These parameters are presented in
Chapter 4, Operation.

Control of MX-2100 Operation 3-3

Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100 MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

KM SW. REV XXX

POWER-UP MESSAGE
SELF TEST

ALARM BUFFER
ALARM BUFFER
EMPTY

ALARM BUFFER
SCROLL CLEAR
SYSTEM PARAMETER
SYSTEM PARAMETER
CLK_MASTER : INT

SYSTEM PARAMETER
CLK_FBACK : NONE

SYSTEM PARAMETER
DL_BW_A
TEST OPTION See Figure 3-2B
SYSTEM PARAMETER
DL_BW_B

SYSTEM PARAMETER
ML_MODE : SINGLE

SYSTEM PARAMETER
ACTIVE_ML : AUTO

LINK PARAMETERS See Figure 3-3C

SP PARAMETER
SP PARAMETERS
SPEED : 9600

SP PARAMETER
PARITY : NONE

See Module SP PARAMETER

CH. PARM A:B
Manuals in Part II INTERFACE : DCE

SP PARAMETER
DATA : 8
Legend:
A:B - Module: Channel Identification

Figure 3-1. Organization of Front Panel Menu (Part I)

3-4 Control of MX-2100 Operation

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100

TEST OPTION TEST OPTION OFF

TEST OPTION LED

TEST OPTION LED
MONITOR: A:B

TEST OPTION LED

MONITOR: OFF

TEST OPTION ML
TEST OPTION ML
REMOTE LOOP: OFF

TEST OPTION ML
LOCAL LOOP: OFF

TEST OPTION ML
LOOP2 V.54: OFF

TEST OPTION ML
LOOP3V.54: OFF

TEST OPTION A:B

TEST OPTION A:B
LOCAL LOOP: OFF

TEST OPTION A:B

REMOTE LOOP: OFF

TEST OPTION A:B

TONE INJECT: OFF (Only for Voice Channels)

TEST OPTION A:B TEST OPTION A:B

PRBS PRBS [GOOD] : ON

TEST OPTION A:B

PRBS [BAD] : ON
(Only for Data
Channels)
TEST OPTION A:B TEST OPTION A:B
BERT [GOOD]: ON BERT [GOOD] : ON

TEST OPTION A:B

BERT [BAD] : ON

TEST OPTION A:B

Legend: LOOP2 V.54 : OFF
A:B - Module: Channel Identification
TEST OPTION A:B
LOOP3 V.54 : OFF

Figure 3-2. Organization of Front Panel Menu (Part II)

Control of MX-2100 Operation 3-5

Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100 MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

LINK PARAMETER
LINK PARAMETER
SPEED: 64 KBPS

LINK PARAMETER
TIMING: E-DCE

LINK PARAMETER
BUFFER_SIZE: 8
(KML.1 to KML.6 only)

LINK PARAMETER
DSR&CT: INT
(KML.1 to KML.3 only)

LINK PARAMETER
INTERFACE: DTE
(KML.1 to KML.5, KML.7, KML.8)

LINK PARAMETER
FRAME : ESF

LINK PARAMETER
SYNC : FAST
(KML.7, KLM.8 only)

LINK PARAMETER
I TS CODE : 00

LINK PARAMETER
MASK: 000
(KML.7 only)

LINK PARAMETER
CRC-4: YES
(KML.8 only)

LINK PARAMETER
CODE: B8ZS
(KML.7 only)

LINK PARAMETER
START TS: 00
(KML.7, KLM.8 only)

LINK PARAMETER
BPTS 16: YES (KML.8 only)

LINK PARAMETER
MODE: SWITCHED

LINK PARAMETER
EURO_ISDN
(KML.10 only)

LINK PARAMETER
B CH: B1

Figure 3-3. Organization of Front Panel Menu (Part III)

3-6 Setting Configuration Parameters

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100

3.3 Setting Configuration Parameters

Before starting any configuration action:
• Obtain a list of the required parameters from your system administrator.
• Review the relevant configuration parameters given in the Configuration
Parameters appendix.

During the configuration set-up procedure, MX-2100 presents only those

parameters available for the modules installed in the enclosure in the currently
selected mode. Therefore you must perform the configuration according to this
order:
1. Select the system parameters.
2. Select the main link parameters.
3. Set the channel parameters.
In addition, when a supervision terminal is used to control the MX-2100, the
communication parameters of the supervisory port must also be defined.

Note For control of MX-2100 test options, refer to the Diagnostics chapter.

General Configuration Procedure

The following steps are used to perform any configuration activity. The general
procedure given below is followed by special considerations for each group of
parameters.
Note
Before starting the configuration procedure, always disconnect all the user-initiated
loopbacks (select OFF on TEST OPTIONS).
Refer to the Alarms appendix for an explanation of the configuration error messages
the MX-2100 displays when you make an error.

Setting Configuration Parameters 3-7

Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100 MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table 3-2. Procedure for Performing Configuration Activity

Step Action Key Display

1 Bring the cursor under the top row (if CURSOR
not already there).
2 Scroll to display the desired group of SCROLL The second row shows the first
parameters in the top row. parameter in the selected group and its
current value.
Note: For channel parameters, the top
row includes an additional field (at the
rightmost side of the top row): this field
is used to select the channel. In this
case, use the CURSOR key to bring the
cursor to the channel identification
field, then SCROLL to show the desired
channel.
3 Bring the cursor under the left-hand CURSOR
field (parameter name) in the second
row.
4 Scroll to display the desired parameter SCROLL The second row shows the parameter
in the selected group. name and its current value.
5 Bring the cursor under the right-hand CURSOR
field (the parameter value) in the
second row.
6 Scroll to set the required value for the SCROLL The second row shows the available
displayed parameter. values.
7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 until values SCROLL The second row shows the current
are assigned to all the parameters in selection.
the group.
8 When the last parameter in this group ENTER The MX-2100 checks the validity of the
is displayed, select the new parameter selected values. If the values are valid,
values. the cursor returns to the first field in
the top row. The second row displays
Note: You must press ENTER after
shortly CONFIG ENTER, and then
changing parameters of a certain
returns to the normal display.
group, e.g., SYSTEM, LINK, or those of
a given module, etc. If you change
If an error is detected, you will see a
parameter values, but return the cursor
CONFIG ERROR message, then the
to the first field and scroll to another
display returns to its previous state.
group without pressing ENTER, the
changes made so far in this group are
discarded and you will see the message
CONFIG LOST. If downloading is
enabled, the relevant parameter
changes are also sent to the remote
MX-2100.

3-8 Setting Configuration Parameters

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100

Table 3-2. Procedure for Performing Configuration Activity (Cont.)

Step Action Key Display

9 Repeat steps 1 through 8 until values SCROLL The second row shows the current
are assigned to all the parameters in selection.
the desired groups.
10 After completing the configuration SCROLL The top row shows:
actions, you can use steps 1, 2 to ALARM BUFFER
return to the ALARM BUFFER. If alarm
messages are stored in the alarm buffer,
ALARM BUFFER is automatically
displayed if no push-button is pressed
for one minute.

Configuring the System Parameters

For a list of the system parameters, refer to Appendix E, Configuration Parameters.
Remember that even if downloading is enabled, you must locally configure the
CLK_MASTER and CLK_FBACK parameters on both the local and the remote
MX-2100 units if the installed main link interface module is KML.1, KML.2, KML.3
or KML.4 (these parameters are not available for KML.5).
• CLK_MASTER - Select the appropriate source: INT or an external timing
reference source, connected to one of the channels of a KLS.1, KHS.1,
KVF.4/S0, KHS.U/S, KHS.U/D, KVF.5/E1/M, or KVF.5/T1/M module. In this
case, you must select the CLOCK MODE of this channel as DTE2 (otherwise,
you will see CONFIG ERROR 01).
• CLK_FBACK - Select NONE or a source different from that selected as master.
If you select as external source a channel that is not configured for operation in
the DTE2 mode, you will see CONFIG ERROR 02.
• To disable switching to the fallback source, select NONE.
In this case, the default fallback clock source is the MX-2100 internal clock
oscillator.
• DWLD_BW_A, DWLD_BW_B - Select the desired mode: NO to disable the
management channel, or enable the management channel by selecting a
specific value in the range of 0.8 through 19.2 kbps and an EXT to indicate if
the ML-7 or ML-8 is a dedicated time slot or time slot 0.
• These parameters must be set in order to allow in-band configuration of a
remote MX-2100. For more information about in-band communication, refer
to the Remote Management section in the General Information chapter.
Note
When selecting a speed for the download parameter, consider the MX-2100 link's
total bandwidth. Since the bandwidth is shared, make sure that the speed chosen
for the download parameter is high enough to allow the link to work efficiently, but
enough bandwidth is left for data transfer.

Setting Configuration Parameters 3-9

Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100 MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• ML_MODE - When the MX-2100 includes two KML modules, you must
define how to use the modules:
− SINGLE - Single main link operation.
− REDUND - The two KML modules operate as a redundant pair.
− DUAL LNK - The two KML modules provide two independent links.
− PRI BMP - The two KML modules provide two parallel links with priority
bumping.
− SW BACK - One of the KML modules serves as the main link and the other
module serves as a switched backup link.
− SWITCH - Single main link over an ISDN line.
− DUAL SWITCH - Two main links over an ISDN line.
− SINGLE and SWITCH - One main link operation and one main link over an
ISDN line.
Note
Only the SINGLE and REDUND modes can be actually configured from the front
panel. The other modes appear only for compatibility with the supervision terminal.
If one of the other modes is selected, you will see CONFIG ERROR 19.
If the MX-2100 is equipped with only one KML module, and you are trying to select
any mode except SINGLE, you will see CONFIG ERROR 51.

• ACTIVE_ML - When redundancy is enabled, you must specify the active KML
module:
− AUTO - Automatic selection of active module, in accordance with the
redundancy switch-over criteria. The module is selected as default after
power-up is KML-A.
− ML-A - Module KML-A is selected as the active module. Redundancy is
disabled.
− ML-B - Module KML-B is selected as the active module. Redundancy is
disabled.
Note
You can use the ML-A and ML-B selections to enforce the selection of a certain
active module, and then enable again the redundancy function by selecting AUTO.

3-10 Setting Configuration Parameters

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100

Configuring the Main Link Parameters

For a list of the main link parameters, refer to the Configuration Parameters
appendix. Remember that even if downloading is enabled, you must locally
configure the main link SPEED and TIMING on both the local and remote
MX-2100 units.
• SPEED - Select the main link data rate specified for your MX-2100: 9.6, 14.4,
19.2, 28.8, 32, 48, 56, 64, 128, 192, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, or
1536 kbps.
Note
If you are reducing the main link data rate, the following error conditions may occur
while the main link rate is reconfigured:
The total data rate of the currently-active channels may exceed the new rate. This
will result in CONFIG ERROR 07 (bandwidth overflow).
With a main link data rate of 256 kbps, it is not possible to select a KHS.1 channel
rate of 192 kbps. This will result in CONFIG ERROR 9.
With a main link data rate of 768 kbps, it is not possible to configure a KVC.1
module (this module is not supported at this main link rate). This will result in
CONFIG ERROR 9.
To correct the problem, change the channel parameters as required.

• TIMING - Select the timing mode specified for your MX-2100:

− When the installed module is KML.1, KML.2, KML.3 or KML.4, the
available selections are DTE, DCE or E-DCE. With DCE and E-DCE, a
reference timing source must be selected as explained for the system
parameters.
− When the installed module is KML.5 or KML.6, the available selections are
INT and LBT.
− When the installed module is KML.7, KML.8 or KML.F, the available
selections are DCE, INT and LBT.
• When the timing reference is the internal oscillator (irrespective of the installed
main link module), it is not recommended to select clock mode DTE2 for data
channels.
• BUFFER_SIZE - If the selected interface type is DTE or E-DCE, select the
appropriate buffer size, in accordance with the communication link media:
±256 bits for satellite links and ±8 bits for any other medium.
• DSR&CTS - If the installed interface module is KML.1, KML.2, or KML.3, select
the desired method of handling the DSR and CTS lines: INT if you want these
lines to be ignored, or EXT if you want the transmit data to be held at MARK
when either of these lines is OFF.

Configuring the Channel Parameters

The configuration parameters available for each MX-2100 user module and for
their channels and for specific configuration instructions, refer to the

Setting Configuration Parameters 3-11

Chapter 3 Configuring MX-2100 MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

corresponding module Installation and Operation Manual contained in Part II of

this manual.
Configuring the SP Parameters
For a list of the SP parameters, refer to Appendix E, Configuration Parameters. You
must always configure the supervisory port parameters locally, irrespective of the
use of downloading.
• SPEED - Select AUTO whenever feasible. In this case, start the communication
by pressing <ENTER> three times, to ensure positive identification of terminal
data rate.
Note
The automatic baud rate recognition procedure should be repeated after the DTR
line in the SP connector had been switched to OFF and then ON again.

• DATA - Select the required number of data bits (same as on the terminal).
• PARITY - Select the required parity (same as on the terminal).
− Select DCE when directly connected to the supervision terminal. In this
case, you need a straight cable.
− Select DTE when connected to a modem. In this case, use a cross-over
cable for connection to the modem.
• MANAGEMENT - Select YES when the MX-2100 will be managed by an
SNMP network management station. Select NO in any other case.

3-12 Setting Configuration Parameters

 Chapter 4
Operation

4.1 General
This chapter describes the normal operation of the MX-2100.
The information in this chapter includes:
• Description of the supervision terminal set of commands: syntax, options,
protocol and descriptions
• Description of the functions of the MX-2100 controls, connectors and
indicators, located on the MX-2100 front panel
• General operating instructions, including turn-on, routine operations, and
turn-off.

For an explanation of the error messages that may be displayed on the supervisory
terminal, refer to Appendix B, Alarms.
The initial configuration of a MX-2100 must always be performed by means of a
supervision terminal connected to its supervisory port, using the procedures
described in the System Installation and Setup chapter. However after initial
configuration, MX-2100 can also be managed by means of a SNMP network
management station.

4.2 MX-2100 Supervision Language

The following presents the MX-2100 supervision language syntax, usage, and
commands.
Command Language Syntax
• Commands can be entered only when the MX-2100 supervisory port prompt
is displayed. The prompt always appears at the beginning of a new line, and
the cursor appears to the right of the prompt.
• The prompt identifies the database being edited:
When you are working on the currently active database, the prompt is
KM2100> for MX-2100
KM2104> for MX-2104
When you are working on the alternate database, the prompt is ALT_DB>

MX-2100 Supervision Language 4-1

Chapter 4 Operation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• Commands are case-insensitive, e.g., you can type commands in either lower
case and/or upper case letters.
• To correct typing errors, press the BACKSPACE key until the error is cleared,
and then retype the correct command.
• Use a space as a separator between command fields and/or parameters.
• Commands must end by pressing ENTER.
• To use a command with the existing parameters, type the command name and
press ENTER.
• To cancel the current command, press the BREAK key, or CTRL-C (that is, hold
the CTRL key down and type C). You will obtain the MX-2100 prompt again.
• To repeat the previous command, press CTRL-A.
• To repeat the previous command followed by pressing ENTER, press CTRL-D.

Command Options
The following general types of options shown in Table 4-1 are available with some
commands. For details refer to the relevant appendix.

Table 4-1. General Command Options

Option Meaning Example of Usage

/A All CLR ALM /A
Clears all the alarms stored by the alarm buffer
/C Clear DSP ALM /C
Display all the alarms stored by the alarm buffer and
then clear all the event alarms
/CA Clear all DSP ALM /CA
Display all the alarms stored by the alarm buffer and
then clear all the alarms
* Display all the relevant DSP REV *
information for the Displays the hardware and software revisions of all the
requested item modules installed in MX-2100

4-2 MX-2100 Supervision Language

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation

Command Protocol

Starting a Session
• If AUTOBAUD is on, start any session by pressing the ENTER key three times
in sequence. This will ensure identification of terminal data rate.
• When password protection is on, the displayed prompt is PASSWORD> and
the addressed MX-2100 waits for the password before continuing. After the
correct password is received, MX-2100 sends the following working prompt:
KM2100> for MX-2100
KM2104> for MX-2104.
If password protection is off, this step is omitted and the working prompt
appears after the node address conditions are fulfilled.
• The first action to be carried out when starting a session is to check and, if
necessary, set the correct terminal control codes, using the F command.

The terminal control codes, determined by the F command, are used to clear the
screen, move the cursor to the screen home position, and move the cursor to the
right by one position. Using the terminal control codes suitable for the type of
terminal connected to MX-2100 is essential to proper display of the information
sent by MX-2100 on the terminal screen: certain combinations of codes can lead
to unclear displays.
If the information on your screen is unclear, issue the INIT F [] command. If
there are no parameters, use the F command to set the desired control codes.

Command Evaluation and Execution

• After the working prompt is displayed, every character typed on the terminal
keyboard is immediately evaluated by MX-2100 and echoed to the terminal
screen. Full duplex communication with the terminal is therefore necessary, to
provide on-line feedback to the terminal operator.
• Command evaluation starts only when the ENTER key is pressed.
• Certain commands, mainly DSP commands, are not accepted for the alternate
database.
• In case an error is detected during command evaluation, the command is not
executed. Instead, MX-2100 will send the erroneous command back to the
terminal, and you will see:
BAD COMMAND OR PARAMETER. TYPE ‘H’ FOR HELP
• The correct command must then be resent.
• The command is executed only after it is validated.
• Command execution can be interrupted by pressing BREAK or CTRL-C. This
will result in the display of the MX-2100 prompt, and a new command can be
entered.

MX-2100 Supervision Language 4-3

Chapter 4 Operation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• After the command is executed, a time stamp is displayed in the following

format:
time: HH:MM:SS date: DAY MMM,DD,YYYY
• where
MMM is written as JAN, FEB, etc.
DAY is written as SUN, MON, etc.
• The supervisory port prompt (KM2100>) is displayed on the line following the
time stamp.

Command Fields
• When a command has several fields, use the space bar to move the cursor
among the various fields. However, for some commands, the ENTER key is
used instead. This is indicated in the command description.
• When a field has a limited range of values, the available values can be
displayed by scrolling. Scrolling is performed by bringing the cursor to the
desired field, and then pressing the F (forward) or B (backward) key until the
desired value is displayed.
• If a certain field is not applicable to the current command, the field shows N/A
and scrolling is not possible. N/A will appear in fields of a DEF command that
specify parameters not used in the selected operating mode.

Ending a Session
• If an idle disconnect time-out is specified, MX-2100 will automatically
disconnect the ongoing session if no command is received from the terminal
for the specified time-out interval.
• The EXIT command disconnects the supervisory port and transfers the control
to the front-panel LCD and push-button.
After ending a session by the EXIT command, you can press any alphanumeric
or editing key to start a new session. It is recommended to press the ENTER
key.

Index of Commands
Table 4-2 lists the MX-2100 commands in alphabetical order. Note that some
commands have both a longhand and an abbreviated format.

Table 4-2. MX-2100 Command Set Index

Command Purpose Options

BYE Return control to the MX-2100 front panel at the end of a TELNET
session.
CLR ALM Clear alarms stored in the MX-2100 alarm buffer /A
CLR LOOP Clear user-initiated loops or tests
CLR LP

4-4 MX-2100 Supervision Language

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation

Table 4-2. MX-2100 Command Set Index (Cont.)

Command Purpose Options

CLR MONITOR Deactivate I/O module channel monitor
CLR M
CONNECT Connect ISDN line between a local and remote MX-2100 AB
SWITCH
DATE Set the date for the MX-2100 internal clock
DEF AGENDA Define a daily schedule for operation in the switched backup mode
DEF AGENT Define the IP parameters to the local MX-2100
DEF ALM Define the debounce time in seconds for each alarm code or mask the
DEBOUNCE alarm
DEF CALL Define the dial-out parameters for the dial-out port
DEF CH Configure the parameters of a selected module channel (voice or data)
DEF CON Define the main link and priorities of each module
DEF DB FLIP Define the times of day for the switching (flipping) between the two
databases
DEF DP Define the parameters of the dial-out port
DEF FRAME Define manually the allocation of main link bits
DEF MANAGER Define or modify the network management stations to which the SNMP
LIST agent sends traps
DEF ML Define parameters for the main link
DEF ML CALL Define the switched backup connection setup parameters (for use in
the switched backup mode)
DEF NAME Define the logical name of MX-2100
DEF NODE Define the node number of MX-2100
DEF NP Define the configuration parameters of the network port
DEF PWD Define new password, and/or display the current password
DEF ROUTE Enables static routing via the ETHERNET management port
DEF SP Configure supervisory port parameters
DEF SYS Configure system parameters
DISCONNECT Disconnect the ISDN line between the local and remote MX-2100 AB
SWITCH
DSP AGENT Display the IP and SNMP agent parameters
DSP ALM Display the contents of the alarm buffer and optionally clear the buffer /C
/CA
DSP BERT Display the result of the BERT test running on an I/O module channel /C
DSP CH CON Display information on connected channels
DSP HDR TST Display hardware faults (detected during the power-on self-test, and
during normal operation)

MX-2100 Supervision Language 4-5

Chapter 4 Operation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table 4-2. MX-2100 Command Set Index (Cont.)

Command Purpose Options

DSP FLIP Display cause of last main link flip
DSP MANAGER Display the network management station to which the SNMP agent
LIST sends traps
DSP KVF5 or Display the configuration parameters of a group of KVF.5 modules
PBX
DSP KVF6 Display the configuration parameters of the KVF.6 modules in the
MX-2100
DSP PRBS_INJ Display the result of the PRBS test running on an I/O module channel /C
DSP REM Display the other MX-2100 connected to the local MX-2100
AGENT
DSP REV Display the hardware and software revisions of the modules *, I
DSP SIG or Display the signaling bits state in KVF.5 or KVF.6 modules
SIGNALING
DST ST FRAME Display information on current frame usage (current bit allocation), as
DSP ST FR defined in the active database
DSP ST ML Display active main link status information
DSP ST SLOT Display I/O module status information
DSP ST SYS Display system status
EDIT DB Select the alternate (not active) database for editing
EXIT End the current control session
F Select the codes for “clear the screen”, “cursor home”,
and “cursor right”
FLIP ML Change active KML module in a redundant system
H Display a concise index of commands and option switches 1
2
3
4
INIT DB Load the default configuration instead of the user configuration.
Table F-6 lists the default parameter values
INIT F Set all the codes for “clear the screen”, “cursor home” TV920
and “cursor right” to 0 VT52
VT100
Freedom 100/110
Freedom 220
LOAD DB 1\2 Loads the MX-2100 database to a file to enable transfer to a remote
MX-2100 via FTP
LOAD IO Software download to KVF.6 or KVF.8 modules, through a DL
connection in the modules front panel

4-6 MX-2100 Supervision Language

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation

Table 4-2. MX-2100 Command Set Index (Cont.)

Command Purpose Options

LOOP or LP Activate a specified loopback or test
ML RECOVERY Recover from a priority bumping event
MONITOR Operate the monitor on the selected I/O module channel
REBUILD Rebuild the MX-2100 frame AB
FRAME
RESET LOC Reset the local MX-2100
RESET IO Reset the I/O module
RESET ML Reset the main link module
TIME Set the time of the MX-2100 internal clock
UPDATE DB 1\2 Updates the MX-2100 database from a file with a database package
that was received from a remote MX-2100 via FTP

4.3 Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Table 4-3 lists the functions of the MX-2100 controls, connectors and indicators,
located on the MX-2100 front panel. The index numbers in Table 4-5 correspond
to the item numbers in Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2.

1 6 9 8 7

VOICE DATA STATUS ON LINE ON LINE

TXD ALARM TXD
RXD TEST RXD
M-LEAD RTS LOCAL LOS B A
E-LEAD DCD SYSTEM REMOTE LOS
CURSOR SCROLL ENTER A POWER SUPPLY
B

CHANNEL MAIN LINK

See Insert 2 3 4 5 10 11
on Next Page

Figure 4-1. MX-2100 Front Panel

CURSOR SCROLL ENTER LOS

ON
REM LOC RX TX LINE TEST ALARM

1 2 3 4

Figure 4-2. MX-2104 Front Panel

Front Panel Controls and Indicators 4-7

Chapter 4 Operation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table 4-3. MX-2100 Controls, Connectors, and Indicators

No Control or Indicator Function

1 Alphanumeric display Liquid crystal display (LCD) used to display messages and status information.
The display contains 2 rows of 16 characters each
2 CURSOR push-button Used to move among the information fields
3 SCROLL push-button Used to scroll among the available options of the selected field
4 ENTER push-button Used to enter the changes made in the MX-2100 configuration, and to
initiate operation in the new set-up
5 TEST indicator Indicates that a test (or test loop) is being performed on one of the local
MX-2100 modules (for main link modules KML.1 through KML.4, this
indicator will also light when a V.54 loop is activated on the modem serving
the main link).
When downloading is activated, also lights when a test is activated by the
remote MX-2100 on one of the local MX-2100 modules
6 ALARM indicator Indicates that a fault has been detected in one of the MX-2100 modules
7 ON LINE indicator Lights steadily when the module is operating properly and is active.
For KML modules, flashes when the module is operating properly, but is in
standby (the other module of the same type is active).
Off when the corresponding module is defective, or is not installed.
ON-LINE indicators are located on the KML and KPS modules
8 TXD indicator Indicates activity on the transmit line of the active KML module.
The indicator is located on the KML module
9 RXD indicator Indicates activity on the receive line of the active KML module.
The indicator is located on the KML module
10 LOCAL SYNC LOSS Lights when the local MX-2100 has lost frame synchronization.
indicator The indicator is located on the KML module
11 REMOTE SYNC LOSS Lights when a loss-of-frame synchronization indication is received from the
indicator remote MX-2100. This indication is available only when downloading is
activated.
The indicator is located on the KML module

In addition, the front panel includes four indicators that can be connected by
means of the TEST OPTIONS-MONITOR menu to any desired channel. The
indicator functions are as follows:

VOICE DATA

TXD

RXD

M-LEAD RTS

E-LEAD DCD

Figure 4-3. Indicator Functions

4-8 Front Panel Controls and Indicators

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation

• TXD - Indicates activity on the transmit path of the selected channel.

• RXD - Indicates activity on the receive path of the selected channel.
• M-LEAD/RTS - If the selected channel is a data channel, shows the state of the
RTS line. If the selected channel is a voice channel, shows the state of the
M lead.
• E-LEAD/DCD - If the selected channel is a data channel, shows the state of the
DCD line. If the selected channel is a voice channel, shows the state of the
E lead.
Organization of MX-2100 Display
The MX-2100 display has two rows of 16 characters each:
• Upper row. Shows the name of the displayed function, group of configuration
parameters, or test option, and when applicable, the number of the I/O
module and module channel that is being configured.
• Lower row. The lower row displays:
Parameter name and value
Status messages
Test status
Error messages
Diagnostics messages.

Using the Front Panel Push-buttons

MX-2100 operation is controlled by means of the display and the three
pushbuttons designated CURSOR, SCROLL and ENTER.
The same control actions are consistently used for all the activities:
• CURSOR - You use this push-button to indicate what you want to change.
Pressing the CURSOR push-button moves the cursor among the fields in the
current display. The cursor is a bar that underlines the selected field.

Some fields list several different items, and then you move the cursor under
the desired item. The item above the cursor will be changed (“scrolled”) when
you press SCROLL.
• SCROLL - Press repeatedly to display the alternatives for the current field/item
indicated by the cursor. Holding the push-button depressed causes automatic
scrolling of the available alternatives.
• ENTER - Press it once to select the value displayed in the field/item indicated
by the cursor.

Pressing ENTER also confirms the selection of all the other values in the group
being currently displayed in the top row, e.g., SYSTEM, LINK, etc. For CH
PARM, the pressing of the ENTER push-button confirms the parameters
selected for all the channels of the current module. Therefore, you need to
press ENTER only once for each parameter group, or for each module.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators 4-9

Chapter 4 Operation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• When you press the ENTER push-button, the MX-2100 checks the validity of
the new value. If the selected value is valid, the MX-2100 displays CONFIG
ENTER, and the new value takes effect immediately.
• If you make an incorrect selection, the selection is not accepted. In this case,
you see a CONFIG ERROR message with a two-digit code in the second
display row. The code indicates what is wrong. After a short time, the error
message disappears and you see the original display again. Now you can
correct the error.

If alarms are present in the alarm buffer and the configuration activities are
interrupted (that is, no push-button is pressed) for more than one minute, the
MX-2100 automatically exits the configuration state and shows the ALARM
BUFFER/SCROLL CLEAR message. Note that in such a case any changes made on
the display without pressing the ENTER key are discarded.
Appendix B, Alarms, explains the codes and what to do to correct the error.
Chapter 5, Diagnostics explains the use of the test options.
Checking Current Operating Configuration
Refer to Chapter 3, Configuring MX-2100 for an explanation of the MX-2100
configuration parameters that can be modified from the front panel.
The following table provides instructions for displaying the current configuration
parameters (diagnostic and test functions are not included), and for modifying the
supervisory port parameters when necessary. The instructions are presented in a
step-by-step format, which will help you familiarize yourself with the use of front
panel pushbuttons.
If you only want to check the current configuration, without modifying any
parameters, do not press the ENTER push-button during the procedure described
below, to prevent any accidental change of parameters.

4-10 Front Panel Controls and Indicators

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation

Table 4-4. Instructions for Displaying Current Configuration Parameters

Step Action Key Display

1 Bring the cursor under the top CURSOR
row (if not already there)
2 Scroll to display SYSTEM SCROLL Second row shows the first system parameter,
PARAMETER in the top row CLK_MASTER, and its current selection
3 Bring the cursor under the CURSOR
left-hand field in the second row
4 Scroll to see the other system SCROLL After each SCROLL pressing, the second
parameters display row shows the current value of the
next system parameters. Continue until the
first parameter, CLK_MASTER, appears again
5 Bring the cursor under the top CURSOR
row
6 Bring to display the next group of SCROLL The second row shows the first main link
configuration parameters - LINK parameter - SPEED and its current value
PARAMETER
7 Repeat steps 3, 4 to see the other SCROLL
main link parameters
8 Scroll to display CH PARM in the SCROLL The right-hand field of the top row identifies
top row the channel being handled now in the format
i:j, where i is the I/O module slot number
(1 through 12), and j is the module channel
number.
Thus, the first channel number is 1:1
9 To change the number of the CURSOR, The second row shows the first parameter of
displayed channel, move the SCROLL the selected channel. The parameter being
cursor under the top row right- displayed depends on the type of channel –
hand field, and scroll to display see the applicable module Installation and
the desired channel identification Operation Manual
10 Bring the cursor under the CURSOR
left-hand field in the second row twice
11 Scroll to see the other parameters
of the selected channel
12 Bring the cursor under the CURSOR
right-hand field in the top row
13 Scroll to display the next desired SCROLL
channel
14 Repeat steps 10, 11 to display all CURSOR
the parameters of this channel SCROLL
15 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to CURSOR,
display the supervisory port SCROLL
parameters - SP PARAMETERS

Front Panel Controls and Indicators 4-11

Chapter 4 Operation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Normal Indications
The top display shows ALARM BUFFER. During normal operation, the second row
should show EMPTY (no alarm messages). If the alarm buffer contains alarms, you
will see SCROLL in the left-hand field of the second row, and CLEAR in the
right-hand field.
To interpret the messages displayed in the second row, refer to the Alarms
appendix. There are two types of alarms, designated as state and event:
• A message indicating a state alarm is displayed only when the alarm condition
is present, and is automatically removed when the condition is cleared (if the
alarm is being displayed, it will disappear only when the display is refreshed by
scrolling).
• A message indicating an event alarm persists even after the event that caused
the alarm condition is cleared.
If the MX-2100 operates normally, but event alarm messages are still
displayed, you can clear the event alarm messages by the following
procedure:
1. Bring the cursor under the second row, under the CLEAR message.
2. Press ENTER to clear the event messages stored in the alarm buffer.
If no state alarms are present, the second row will now show empty.

4.4 Operating Instructions

The MX-2100 can be operated through:
• The supervision terminal
• The MX-2100 front panel.

Supervision Terminal
Before using the supervision terminal, make sure the preparations listed in the
Initial Setup and Configuration section in the System Installation and Setup chapter
were completed and all the relevant equipment has been turned on.

Power-Up
During the power-up procedure, MX-2100 automatically sends information
through its supervisory port to allow the monitoring of the power-up self-test from
a supervision terminal.
Upon power-up, the supervision terminal displays:
<BEL>Kilomux SUPERVISORY PORT ON LINE. TYPE 'H' FOR HELP
where <BEL> stands for the graphic symbol of the <BEL> code (ASCII 07).

4-12 Operating Instructions

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation

While the KCL module performs the power-up self-test, the supervision terminal
displays:
CL Board Self Test In Progress ....

After the self-test is completed, the result, OK or FAILED, is added to the

displayed line. MX-2100 starts reading the installed modules, and the supervision
terminal displays:
Reading Installed Modules .....

After the reading is completed, the state of the installed modules is displayed in
the following format:
SLOT 1 PS-A OK
SLOT 2 PS-B OK
SLOT 3 ML-A OK
SLOT 4 ML-B OK
SLOT 5 CL OK
I/O SLOT 1 I/O 1 OK
I/O SLOT 2 I/O 2 OK
I/O SLOT 3 I/O 3 OK
I/O SLOT 4 I/O 4 OK
I/O SLOT 5 I/O 5 OK
I/O SLOT 6 I/O 6 OK
I/O SLOT 7 I/O 7 OK
I/O SLOT 8 I/O 8 OK
I/O SLOT 9 I/O 9 OK
I/O SLOT 10 I/O 10 OK
I/O SLOT 11 I/O 11 OK
I/O SLOT 12 I/O 12 OK

If you see FAILED for any module, replace that module.

Starting a Session - Single MX-2100

When the terminal is used to control a single MX-2100, always assign node
address 0 to MX-2100. Use the following start-up sequence to connect to a
MX-2100 assigned node number 0.
1. If you use the AUTO (Autobaud) mode, press the ENTER key three times.
This allows MX-2100 to identify the terminal data rate.
Assuming that MX-2100 successfully identified the data rate of the
supervision terminal, you will be notified if MX-2100 failed the power-up
self-test:
If you see Kilomux-2100 SELFTEST FAILED, MX-2100 must first
be repaired before you can continue using it.
If MX-2100 successfully passed the power-up self-test, it displays the
following:

<BEL>Kilomux-2100 SUPERVISORY PORT ON LINE. TYPE 'H' FOR HELP

where <BEL> stands for the graphic symbol of the <BEL> code (ASCII 07).

Operating Instructions 4-13

Chapter 4 Operation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

After the self-test, the MX-2100 prompt should already be displayed on the
terminal screen after the ON-LINE announcement. If you see
PASSWORD>
this indicates that password protection is enabled.
2. In this case, type:
'password' and press ENTER
where 'password' stands for the current password (four to eight characters).
The default password is RAD.
If your password is accepted, you will see the prompt KM2100>.
MX-2100 is now in session under your control.
On your terminal, you will see the prompt:
KM2100>
or
KM2104>

On the MX-2100 front panel, you will see the message:

TERMINAL ON LINE

The front panel controls are disabled as long as MX-2100 is under remote control.
3. Before you continue, use the F command to select the proper cursor control
codes, otherwise the DEF commands may not work properly.

Note While the supervision terminal is in session with MX-2100, the MX-2100 local
operator can regain control by disconnecting the cable from the MX-2100 SP
connector, or by sending the EXIT command. MX-2100 will automatically return to
front panel control if no commands are received for a certain time (controlled by
the LOG_OFF parameter). This time-out can be disabled.

Starting a Session - Multiple MX-2100

When one terminal is used to control several MX-2100 units connected via
modems, node addresses are assigned to each MX-2100. The node addresses, in
the range of 1 through 255, are assigned during the first session, by means of the
command NODE.
Note
If you are using a multidrop configuration, do not assign address 0 to any MX-2100
connected to this terminal.

4-14 Operating Instructions

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation

➤ To establish a session with a specific MX-2100:

1. Press the ENTER key three times.
2. Type NODE, space, the desired MX-2100 node address and another space,
then type the desired command and press ENTER. For example, with node
address 234, type:
NODE<SP>234<SP> 'command' and press ENTER
If the addressed MX-2100 does not use password protection, it will
immediately execute the command.
If the addressed MX-2100 is password protected, you will see the
prompt:

PASSWORD>

3. Type the node address again and then type the password. For example, for
node address 234, type:
NODE<SP>234<SP>'password' and press ENTER
If the password is correct, MX-2100 will execute the command. Otherwise,
you will see:
PASSWORD>

Control Session
1. During the control session, type the desired commands at the terminal
keyboard. You must see the MX-2100 echo character by character.
2. When you see the correct and complete command in the echo line, press
ENTER to execute the command.
MX-2100 will process the command and display the appropriate response.
At the end of the command execution, MX-2100 displays the current time
and date, and then provides a new prompt on the next line.
3. If you changed your mind and want to abort the command, press BREAK or
CTRL-C.
You will receive the prompt again, so you can enter another command.
If your command is not correct, MX-2100 will not execute it, but will echo
the command and display
BAD COMMAND OR PARAMETER. TYPE 'H' FOR HELP
4. Type the correct command.

Ending a Control Session

➤ To end the control session:
• Type:
EXIT
The MX-2100 prompt will disappear. Now you can control MX-2100 from
its front panel.

Operating Instructions 4-15

Chapter 4 Operation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Note
A control session may also be terminated by MX-2100 if the idle disconnect
time-out is enabled, or when the DTR line switches to the inactive (OFF) state.

The following sections describe how to turn MX-2100 on and off, the normal
indications and what to do in case of a malfunction.
Front Panel

Turn On
If the MX-2100 includes a KM-Ringer module, first set the KM-Ringer module
power switch to OFF, and then turn the MX-2100 on by setting the ON/OFF
switches (located on the rear panels) to ON.
Upon turn on, MX-2100 decompresses software in flash (30 seconds) and then
MX-2100 performs self-test. This is indicated by the lighting of the TEST indicator.
Observe the front panel indications.
During the self-test, the MX-2100 displays the software version in the format X.Y:
KM SW. REV X.Y
SELF TEST

After successfully completing the self-test procedure, the MX-2100 switches to the
default display - the ALARM BUFFER.
Note
If the MX-2100 fails the power-up self-test, the LCD displays the detected failure,
for example:
TEST RESULTS
EPROM FAILURE
Try to scroll the second line to see if there are additional fault messages. The
MX-2100 must be repaired before it can be used again. Refer to the Diagnostics
chapter for troubleshooting instructions.
If the configuration data stored by the MX-2100 is corrupted, a DB1 CHKSUM ERR
alarm message is generated. In this case, you must load the default configuration as
explained in the Configuring MX-2100 chapter.

If the MX-2100 includes a KM-Ringer module, you may now turn it on by setting
its POWER switch to ON. The RING VOLTAGE and BATTERY VOLTAGE
indicators must light.
You can verify the MX-2100 configuration as explained in the Configuring
MX-2100 chapter. If the configuration does not require modification, the MX-2100
is ready for operation immediately after self-test is completed. To change the
configuration, refer to Chapter 3, Configuring MX-2100.

4-16 Operating Instructions

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Operation

Normal Indications
• KPS Module(s): The lamp in the power switch of the KPS module(s) lights to
indicate proper operation.
• KML Module(s): The ON-LINE indicator of the active module must light. The
TXD and RXD indicators will light in accordance with the activity on the
corresponding line.
• KCL Module: After the initial power-up self-test, the TEST indicator turns off. It
may turn on again after a test is initiated.
• KM-Ringer Module: The RING VOLTAGE and BATTERY VOLTAGE indicators
must light, to indicate proper operation.
• KAI Module: The KAI module, when installed, reproduces the indications
displayed on the MX-2100 front panel.

If the other communication equipment on the link is not yet operative, the ALARM
indicator, and/or LOCAL SYNC LOSS, and/or REMOTE SYNC LOSS indicator may
light. These indicators must turn off as soon as the link with the remote unit is
established.
If the ALARM indicator continues to light, this indicates the presence of alarms in
the alarm buffer. After the alarms are cleared, the ALARM indicator should turn
off.

What to do in Case of Malfunction

In case a malfunction occurs, perform the following preliminary checks and
actions:
• Check that the modules are properly installed and inserted in the slots
specified by the installation plan.
• Check that all the cable connections were made in accordance with the
installation plan.
• If upon turn-on the MX-2100 displays a DB CHKSUM ERR message, refer to
Chapter 2, Installation and do the following:

1. Turn the MX-2100 off.

2. Remove the KCL module, set section 2 of switch SW3 to ON, and reinstall
the KCL module.
3. Turn the MX-2100 on, wait until the self-test is successfully completed,
then turn the unit off.
4. Remove the KCL module, set section 2 of switch SW3 to OFF, and reinstall
the KCL module.
• The default data base configuration has now been loaded. You may now start
the configuration activities based on the known set of default parameter
values.

Operating Instructions 4-17

Chapter 4 Operation MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• Check the settings of switch SW3 on the KCL module:

Section 1 - Master/Slave: OFF
Section 2 – DB INIT: OFF
Section 3 – PSWRD: OFF
Section 4 – DEBUG: OFF
• Check that all the communication equipment serving the main links operates
properly.
• Check all the configuration parameters against the prescribed set of
parameters.
• Press the RESET push-button of the KCL module.

If these actions do not correct the problem, refer to Chapter 5, Diagnostics to

identify the fault and replace the corresponding module.

Turn Off
➤ To stop equipment operation, use the following procedure:
1. If the MX-2100 includes a KM-Ringer module, first turn the KM-Ringer off
before the MX-2100.
2. Turn the MX-2100 off by setting the ON/OFF switches of the KPS modules
installed in the enclosure to OFF.

4-18 Operating Instructions

 Chapter 5
Diagnostics

5.1 Alarms
The MX-2100 generates two types of alarms, designated as state and event.
• A message indicating a state alarm is displayed only when the alarm condition
is present, and is automatically removed when the condition is cleared (if the
alarm is being displayed, it will disappear only when the display is refreshed by
scrolling).
• A message indicating an event alarm persists even after the event that caused
the alarm condition is cleared.

The alarm messages can be displayed on the front-panel LCD, and are also sent to
the supervision terminal or management station.
Alarms intended for display on the LCD are stored in the alarm buffer for the LCD
display, which can store one alarm event of each type. The MX-2100 operator can
view the contents of the alarm buffer, and can clear event alarms. This procedure
is explained in the Front Panel Controls and Indicators section of the Operation
chapter. Using the DEF ALM DEBOUNCE command, the MX-2100 operator can
define the debounce time (in seconds) for each alarm code or mask the alarm.
Refer to the Alarms appendix for more information, and for a list of the alarm
messages displayed by the MX-2100.
If the problem cannot be corrected by carrying out the listed actions, have the
MX-2100 checked by the technical support personnel.

5.2 Diagnostic Tests

This section describes:
• The TEST OPTIONS operating instructions
• The MX-2100 diagnostic functions.

MX-2100 TEST OPTIONS, General

The diagnostic functions accessed by means of TEST OPTIONS include three
groups:
• LED - Monitoring of a selected user channel by means of the front panel
indicators.

Diagnostic Tests 5-1

Chapter 5 Diagnostics MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• ML - Control and indication of main link loops:

− Local main link loop
− Remote main link loop
− Local ITU-T Rec. V.54 loop
(ITU-T Rec. V.54 loop 2)
− Remote ITU-T Rec. V.54 loop
(ITU-T Rec. V.54 loop 3).
• i:j - Control and indication of channel loops and tests (i indicates the module
slot number, and j indicates the module channel number):
− Local channel loop
− Remote channel loop
− Tone injection (for voice channels only)
− PRBS (pseudo-random sequence) transmission, for data channels only
− BERT (bit error rate test), for data channels only. Can be performed only if
downloading is enabled.

In addition, you can see the test state at the remote MX-2100. This function is
available only when downloading is enabled.

Special Considerations
When using the MX-2100 diagnostic functions, pay attention to the following
points:
• When you select a channel for monitoring, the monitoring of any previously
selected channel is automatically interrupted.
• Generally, at any time, only one loop of a given type can be activated on the
main link, and on each of the user channels. However, the signal paths formed
when certain loops or tests are active inherently disconnect the signal paths
required by other loops.
As a typical example, consider the case of a main link remote loop: if such a
loop is activated on the local MX-2100 in response to a command sent
through the management channel by the remote MX-2100, then the operator
of the local MX-2100 can no longer activate a local main link ITU-T Rec. V.54
loop.
• On the local MX-2100, the following combinations of loops are not possible:
− Simultaneous activation of local and remote main link loops
(CONFIG ERROR 3)
− Simultaneous activation of main link ITU-T Rec. V.54 loop 2 and loop 3
(CONFIG ERROR 3)
− Simultaneous activation of local and remote loops on the same channel
(CONFIG ERROR 4)

5-2 Diagnostic Tests

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics

− Simultaneous activation of local loop and PRBS transmission on the same

data channel (CONFIG ERROR 4)
− Simultaneous activation of local loop and BERT test on the same channel
(CONFIG ERROR 4)
− Simultaneous activation of local loop and tone injection on the same voice
channel (CONFIG ERROR 4).

Test Options Operating Instructions

The following provide detailed instructions for:
• Deactivating all the tests initiated by the local MX-2100
• Activating/deactivating the monitoring of a selected channel
• Activating/deactivating a main link loop
• Activating/deactivating a channel loop
• Activating/deactivating PRBS transmission on a data channel
• Activating/deactivating BERT testing on a data channel
• Activating/deactivating tone injection on a voice channel
• Displaying the state of channel ITU-T Rec. V.54 loops (for KLS.1 – also
activation/deactivation)
• Displaying the state of loops initiated at the remote MX-2100 unit.

Table 5-1. Deactivating all the Tests

Step Action Key Display

1 Bring the cursor under the CURSOR
top row (if not already
there).
2 Scroll to display TEST SCROLL Second row displays the active test (or the
OPTIONS in the top row. first active test, when several tests are
simultaneously active)
3 Bring the cursor under the CURSOR
right-hand field in the top
row, and scroll to display
OFF in this field.
4 Press ENTER. ENTER The tests are deactivated and the TEST
indicator on the front panel of the
MX-2100 turns off

Diagnostic Tests 5-3

Chapter 5 Diagnostics MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table 5-2. Activating / Deactivating the Monitoring of a Selected Channel

Step Action Key Display

1 Bring the cursor under the CURSOR
top row (if not already
there).
2 Scroll to display TEST SCROLL Second row displays the state of the
OPTIONS LED in the top monitoring function:
row.
MONITOR OFF – no channel is being
monitored
MONITOR i:j – the front panel LED's show
the status of channel B of the module
installed in slot A
3 To change, bring the CURSOR,
cursor under the right- SCROLL
hand field in the second
row and scroll to display
the desired module:
channel number or OFF.
4 Press ENTER. ENTER If this is the only active test on this
MX-2100, the state of the front panel TEST
indicator changes

5-4 Diagnostic Tests

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics

Table 5-3. Activating / Deactivating a Main Link Loop

Step Action Key Display

1 Bring the cursor under the top row CURSOR
(if not already there).
2 Scroll to display TEST OPTIONS SCROLL Second row displays the first type of
ML in the top row. main link loop and its state, e.g.,
REMOTE LOOP: OFF
3 To change, bring the cursor under CURSOR, The available selections are:
the left-hand field in the second SCROLL
REMOTE LOOP – if downloading is
row and scroll to display the
disabled, the remote loop is
desired type of main link loop.
connected on the local MX-2100
toward the remote unit.
If downloading is enabled, the
remote loop is connected on the
remote MX-2100
LOCAL LOOP
LOOP3 V.54 – commands the
modem connected to the main link
interface to activate a local loop
LOOP2 V.54 – commands the
remote modem that communicates
with the modem connected to the
main link interface to activate a
remote loop
4 To change the state of the selected CURSOR,
loop, bring the cursor under the SCROLL
right-hand field in the second row
and scroll to display the desired
state: ON or OFF.
5 Press ENTER. ENTER If this is the only active test on this
MX-2100, the state of the front panel
TEST indicator changes

Diagnostic Tests 5-5

Chapter 5 Diagnostics MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table 5-4. Activating / Deactivating a Channel Loop

Step Action Key Display

1 Bring the cursor under the top row CURSOR
(if not already there).
2 Scroll to display TEST OPTIONS i:j SCROLL Second row displays the first type of channel loop
in the top row. and its state: e.g., LOCAL LOOP: OFF
3 To change, bring the cursor under CURSOR, The available selections are:
the left-hand field in the second SCROLL
• LOCAL LOOP
row and scroll to display the
desired type of channel loop. • REMOTE LOOP – The remote loop is
connected on the local MX-2100 toward the
remote unit.
• TONE_INJECT – displayed only for voice
channels
• PRBS – displayed only for data channels. If
you intend to use this function to check for
transmission errors, you must also connect a
physical loopback, or activate an appropriate
loop (e.g., a local or remote main link loop, or
a remote channel loop
• BERT – displayed only for data channels,
provided the downloading function is enabled
4 To change the state of the selected CURSOR,
loop, bring the cursor under the SCROLL
right-hand field in the second row
and scroll to display the desired
state: ON or OFF.
5 Press ENTER. ENTER If this is the only active test on this MX-2100, the
state of the front panel TEST indicator changes

Activating / Deactivating PRBS Transmission on a Data Channel

After the pseudo-random sequence (PRBS) transmission test is activated on the
selected data channel, as explained in the previous section, the next time you
select TEST OPTIONS for this channel, the second display row shows the current
test results:
• PRBS [GOOD]: ON – PRBS transmission is being performed on this channel,
and no error has been detected on the data channel.
• PRBS [BAD]: ON – PRBS transmission is being performed on this channel and
at least one error has been detected. This indication is normal if no loopback is
connected.

Activating / Deactivating BERT Test on a Data Channel

Same as PRBS test, except that when the BERT test is initiated, a remote channel
loop command is automatically sent to the remote MX-2100. In this case, a BERT
[BAD]:ON display always means that errors have been detected.

5-6 Diagnostic Tests

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics

Activating / Deactivating Tone Injection on a Voice Channel

After tone injection is activated on a voice channel, the remote subscriber
connected to this channel should hear the test tone (an 1 kHz tone) clearly and
loudly. If downloading is enabled, you can also activate a remote loop: in this
case, the test tone is also heard by the local subscriber.
MX-2100 Diagnostic Functions, General
The MX-2100 diagnostic functions can be used to test the proper operation of the
MX-2100 system and identify efficiently the faulty components. The available
functions are:
• Connection of a local or remote test loop on the main link
• Connection of a local or remote test loop on the modem serving the main link,
provided the modem supports the ITU-T Rec. V.54 control pins
• Connection of a local or remote test loop on the desired I/O module channel
• Pseudo-random sequence (PRBS) transmission on a selected channel of a data
I/O module
• Bit error rate test (BERT) on a selected channel of a data I/O module, using a
pseudo-random sequence
• Injection of 1 kHz, 0 dBm0 (digital milliwatt) audio signal for testing the
transmit path of the desired voice I/O module channel.

Note that no tests are available for the KCL.2 module, because this module
controls the management interface, i.e., the front-panel controls and the
interfacing with a supervision terminal or an SNMP network management station,
and the MX-2100 operation. Therefore, the KCL.2 module is inherently “tested”
when a proper response is obtained to any operator request, and the MX-2100
operates normally.
If it is necessary to replace the KCL.2 module, you can preserve the existing data
base in two ways:
• The fastest way is to remove the NVRAM component from the replaced
module and installing it on the replacement module.
• If the above way is not possible, the replacement module can be preconfigured in
another MX-2100 and then installed in the desired unit. This allows the
replacement of a defective KCL.2 module without disrupting the operation of the
MX-2100, because the MX-2100 can continue to operate even if the KCL.2
module is temporarily removed.

Caution If you insert a new KCL.2 module in an operating MX-2100 without first either
transferring the NVRAM (or preconfiguring the module), then when the KCL.2
module is inserted in the MX-2100 the system is reset to the default values.

Test control is effected from the TEST OPTIONS menu. In this chapter you will
find information on the tests (loops) available on the main link interface modules
and the main link modems.

Diagnostic Tests 5-7

Chapter 5 Diagnostics MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

You will also find a general description of the test functions applicable to I/O
modules. Specific information on the tests available for each I/O module is
provided in the corresponding module Installation and Operation manual.
Note
In this chapter, local means the MX-2100 unit at which the test command has been
given, i.e., it is always assumed the command has been given using the front panel
controls of, or a supervision terminal connected to, the local MX-2100.

Caution
Do not set up a local loop in a remote MX-2100 with in-band management. Doing
so could cause the main link connection to be lost.

Main Link Loops

The MX-2100 supports two types of main link loops:
• Test loops activated on the KML modules. These loops provide information on
the functioning of the KML modules. However, since the loops are performed
at the interface between the MX-2100 unit and the other system elements,
these loops also provide information on the functioning of the complete unit.
• Test loops activated on the modem serving the main link, provided the
modem supports ITU-T Rec. V.54 loops. These loops provide information on
the transmission equipment that provides the connection between the two
MX-2100 units.

The following explains the main link loops, describes the front-panel indications
that are relevant to the interpretation of the test results, and in addition provide a
recommended testing sequence that allows the identification of the general
location of a fault.

Local Main Link Loop

Always perform a local main link loop on each of the two MX-2100 units.
Local Main Link Loop - Signal Path
When a local loop is activated on a KML module, the main link transmit signal is
returned to the input of the main link receive path at a point just before the line
interface. In order to provide a keep-alive signal to the transmission equipment
serving the link while the loop is activated, the line interface also transmits the
signal to the line. The loop signal path is shown in Figure 5-1.

5-8 Diagnostic Tests

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics

User or Test
User or Test
Equipment
Equipment

Local Remote
MX-2100 MX-2100

Figure 5-1. Local Main Link Loop, Signal Path

Local Main Link Loop – Normal Indications and Fault Isolation

• The TEST indicator of the local MX-2100 lights.
• The TXD and RXD indicators of the local MX-2100 must light. If not, the local
MX-2100 is defective.
• The SYNC LOSS indicator of the local MX-2100 must be off. If it lights, the
local MX-2100 is defective.
Caution
Do not set up a local loop in a remote MX-2100 with in-band management. Doing
so could cause the main link connection to be lost.

Remote Main Link Loop

As a rule, connect the remote main link loop only if both MX-2100s pass the local
main link loop test successfully.
Remote Main Link Loop – Signal Path
The remote loop is connected on the local MX-2100 unit, i.e., the local KML
module returns the received signal toward the remote MX-2100. The loop signal
path is shown in Figure 5-2.

Diagnostic Tests 5-9

Chapter 5 Diagnostics MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Local Remote
MX-2100 MX-2100

Figure 5-2. Remote Main Link Loop, Signal Paths

Remote Main Link Loop – Normal Indications and Fault Isolation

• The TEST indicator of the local MX-2100 lights.
• The TXD and RXD indicators of the local and remote MX-2100 units must
light, and the LOCAL SYNC LOSS indicator of the remote MX-2100 unit must
be off.

If there is a problem, trace the fault by checking the indications in the order given
below:
1. If the TXD indicator of the remote MX-2100 unit does not light, the fault
occurred in the remote MX-2100 unit: check by performing a local main link
loop on the remote unit.
2. If the TXD indicator of the remote MX-2100 unit lights but the RXD indicator
of the local MX-2100 unit does not light, probably there is a problem in the
transmit path to the local unit. There is however a low probability that the fault
occurred in the local or remote MX-2100 units: check by performing local
main link loops.
3. If the RXD indicator of the local MX-2100 unit lights, but its TXD indicator is
off, the local MX-2100 unit is defective.
4. If the TXD indicator of the local MX-2100 unit lights but the remote RXD
indicator is off, probably there is a problem in the transmit path to the remote
unit. There is however a low probability that the fault occurred in the remote
MX-2100 unit: check by performing a local main link loop on the remote unit.
5. If the RXD indicator of the remote MX-2100 unit lights, but its LOCAL SYNC
LOSS indicator lights, a fault is present. The fault is in the remote MX-2100:
check by performing a local main link loop.

5-10 Diagnostic Tests

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics

Local Main Link Modem Loop - Loop 3

The main purpose of the main link modem loop 3 is to check the connections
between the KML module and the local modem. Usually, this loop is activated
after the remote main link loop fails but both the local and the remote MX-2100
units successfully pass the local main link loops. If this loop is successful, the next
loop to be performed is the remote main link modem loop, loop 2.
Therefore, as a rule, perform loop 3 only after successfully performing a local main
link loop on the local MX-2100 unit.
Main Link Loop 3 – Signal Path
When loop 3 is activated on a modem that supports this function, the MX-2100
transmit signal is returned by the local modem on the receive path. The loop signal
path is shown in Figure 5-3.

User or Test
Equipment Local Modem

Local
MX-2100

User or Test
Remote Modem Equipment

Remote
MX-2100

Figure 5-3. Main Link Modem Loop 3, Signal Path

Main Link Loop 3 – Normal Indications and Fault Location

• The TEST indicator of the MX-2100 lights.
• The TXD and RXD indicators of the local MX-2100 must light, and the LOCAL
SYNC LOSS indicator must be off. If not, the connections to the modem, or
the modem itself, are defective.

Remote Main Link Modem Loop - Loop 2

The main purpose of the main link modem loop 2 is to check the link between the
two modems that serve the main link. As a rule, perform loop 2 only after
successfully performing loop 3 on the local MX-2100 unit.
Main Link Modem Loop 2 – Signal Path
When loop 2 is activated on a modem that supports this function, the remote
modem returns the receive signal toward the local modem, therefore the local
MX-2100 transmit signal is returned to the receive path.
The loop signal path is shown in Figure 5-4.

Diagnostic Tests 5-11

Chapter 5 Diagnostics MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

User or Test
Equipment Local Modem

Local
MX-2100

User or Test
Remote Modem Equipment

Remote
MX-2100

Figure 5-4. Main Link Modem Loop 2, Signal Path

Main Link Modem Loop 2 – Normal Indications and Fault Location

• The TEST indicator of the MX-2100 lights.
• The TXD and RXD indicators of the local MX-2100 must light, and the LOCAL
SYNC LOSS indicator must be off. If not, the connections and/or the link
between the two modems, or the modems, are defective.

I/O Module Loops and Tests

The tests available for I/O modules depend on the module type, however in
general all the I/O modules support local and remote channel loops, and the
monitoring of the transmit and receive activity and of the main control signals by
means of the front-panel indicators.
In addition, the MX-2100 supports module-specific tests:
• For data I/O modules, the MX-2100 provides PRBS transmission and BERT
testing on individual channels. PRBS transmission allows supplying a test signal
to a data channel, and the BERT test provides a quick qualitative check of
transmission performance without requiring external data transmission test
equipment.
• For voice I/O modules, the MX-2100 provides test tone injection. The test tone
can be heard by the subscribers connected to the voice channels, thus
providing a quick qualitative check of the voice path.

For specific information on the tests available for each I/O module, refer to the
corresponding module Operation and Installation manual.

5-12 Diagnostic Tests

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics

Local Channel Loop

When a local loop is activated on a channel of an I/O module, the channel
transmit signal is returned to the channel receive path. The transmit signal is still
connected to the transmit path and reaches the remote user. While the loop is
connected, the local user equipment must receive its own signal. The loop signal
path is shown in Figure 5-5. This loop provides a quick check of the connections to
the local user equipment.
Typical Module

CHANNEL 1
User or Test
Equipment

User or Test
Equipment

Local Remote
MX-2100 MX-2100

Figure 5-5. I/O Module, Local Loop on Individual Channel

Remote Channel Loop

The remote loop is connected on the local MX-2100 unit, i.e., the local I/O
module returns the receive signal of the tested channel toward the remote
MX-2100. The loop signal path is shown in Figure 5-6. This loop allows the remote
user to perform a quick check of the end-to-end transmission on this channel.

CHANNEL 1
User or Test
Equipment

User or Test
Equipment

Local Remote
MX-2100 MX-2100

Figure 5-6. I/O Module, Remote Loop on Individual Channel

Diagnostic Tests 5-13

Chapter 5 Diagnostics MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

PRBS Transmission
The PRBS transmission function is used to provide a test signal to a channel of a
data I/O module. By activating a local or remote main link loop, or a remote
channel loop (or by connecting an external loop) while PRBS transmission is
activated, this function can also be used to obtain a qualitative evaluation of data
transmission without using external test equipment.
9
Data transmission is checked by applying a 2 - 1 (511) bit pseudo-random
sequence generated by an internal test sequence generator to the input of the
tested channel transmit path. The transmitted data is returned by means of a loop
somewhere along the data path (e.g., by connecting a remote channel loop if
downloading is enabled, or a local main link loop) to the receive path of the
module. The received signal is routed to a test sequence evaluator. The evaluator
compares the received data, bit by bit, to the original data and detects any
difference (bit error). The output of the evaluator is sampled during module
polling, to check whether errors were detected in the interval between consecutive
pollings.
The test results are displayed as follows:
• On the LCD located on the MX-2100 front panel, the result is displayed either
as GOOD (no error has been detected during the last interval), or BAD (at
least one error has already been detected). Note that if no loop is present
along the signal path, the BAD result is expected, and does not indicate any
problem.
• On a supervision terminal, the test results are displayed as a number in the
range of 0 (no errors detected during the current measurement interval)
through 9999. The number of errors is accumulated from the activation of the
PRBS transmission.

During PRBS transmission, the tested channel is disconnected from the user data
equipment, and the DSR line is turned off. At any time, PRBS transmission can be
activated on only one channel of each data I/O module installed in the MX-2100
unit.

BERT Testing
The BERT test is used to evaluate data transmission through a selected channel of a
data I/O module without using external test equipment. The BERT test can be
activated only when the downloading function is enabled, and the link to the
remote MX-2100 operates normally.
The BERT test is similar to the PRBS transmission test, except that before the
evaluation of the received data starts, a remote channel loop is activated. This
should cause the sequence to be transmitted along the full path. The test results
are displayed as for PRBS transmission.
As for PRBS transmission, the BERT test can be activated on only one channel of
each data I/O module installed in the MX-2100 unit, the tested channel is
disconnected from the user data equipment, and its DSR line is turned off.

5-14 Diagnostic Tests

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Diagnostics

Tone Injection
The test tone is a data sequence repeating at a rate of 1 kHz. This data sequence is
identical to the data sequence that would have been generated if a 1 kHz signal
having a nominal level of 1 mW (0 dBm0) were applied to the input of the
channel codec.
The test tone is connected directly to the output of the tested channel transmit
path, instead of transmitting the subscriber transmit signal. The tone can be
connected to only one channel of a voice module at a time. Tone injection
automatically disconnects the local subscriber signal. Figure 5-7 shows the signal
paths.

CHANNEL 1
User or Test
Equipment
TEST
DONE

User or Test
Equipment

Local Remote
MX-2100 MX-2100

Figure 5-7. Voice I/O Module, Test Tone Injection Path

Diagnostic Tests 5-15

Chapter 5 Diagnostics MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

5-16 Diagnostic Tests

 Appendix A
Connection Data

A.1 Scope
This appendix provides information on the type and pin allocation of the interface
connectors installed on the various MX-2100 modules.
In the direction field, the following conventions are used:
• IN – input to MX-2100
• OUT – output from MX-2100.

A.2 Supervisory Port Connector

The module supervision connector is a 9-pin D-type female connector, designated
Supervisory Port Connector (CONTROL DCE).
• The allocation of pins in the Supervisory Port Connector with DCE emulation
(used for direct connection to the supervisory terminal) is given in Table A-1.
• The pin functions with DTE emulation (used when a cross-over cable is used
for connection to a modem that provides the link to the supervisory terminal)
is given in Table A-2.

Table A-1. Common Logic Module KCL.2, Supervisory Port Connector Pin Allocations for DCE
Emulation

Pin Designation Direction Connected to

Terminal
with 25-pin
Connector
1 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) From MX-2100 8
2 Receive Data (RD) From MX-2100 3
3 Transmit Data (TD) To MX-2100 2
4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) To MX-2100 20

Supervisory Port Connector A-1

Appendix A Connection Data MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table A-1. Common Logic Module KCL.2, Supervisory Port Connector Pin Allocations for DCE
Emulation (Cont.)

Pin Designation Direction Connected to

Terminal
with 25-pin
Connector
5 Signal Ground (SIG) Common reference and DC power supply ground. Can 7
be isolated from chassis ground (AA) (strap-selectable)
6 Data Set Ready From MX-2100 6
7 Request to Send (RTS) To MX-2100 4
8 Clear to Send (CTS) From MX-2100 5
9 Ring Indicator (RI) To MX-2100 22

Note Pins 9, 10 are connected to the +12V and -12V lines through a 300Ω, 1/2W series
resistor.
Direction: IN - input to MX-2100
OUT - output from MX-2100.

Table A-2. Common Logic Module KCL.2, Supervisory Port Connector Pin Allocations for DTE
Emulation

Pin Designation Direction Function

1 FGND – Frame ground
2 TD IN TX data
3 RD OUT RX data
4 DCD IN Carrier detect
5 CTS – Not connected
6 DTR OUT Data terminal ready
7 SGND – Signal ground
8 RTS OUT Request to send
9 +12V OUT See Note below
10 -12V OUT See Note below
11 RELAY M IN/OUT Alarm relay NC contact
12 RELAY F IN/OUT Alarm relay common
13 RELAY B IN/OUT Alarm relay NO contact
14 ALARM OUT Alarm indication
20 DSR IN Data set ready
25 RI IN Ring indicator

A-2 Supervisory Port Connector

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Data

Note
Pins 9, 10 are connected to the +12V and -12V lines through a 300Ω, 1/2W series
resistor.
Direction: IN - input to MX-2100
OUT - output from MX-2100.

A.3 MNG Connector

The MNG connector is a 9-pin female connector, intended for direct connection
to a dial-up modem:
• The connection of the MNG connector to a dial-up modem terminal having a
9-pin connector is made by means of a straight cable.
• The connection to a dial-up modem with 25-pin connector should be made
using a cable wired in accordance with the Connection to Dial-up Modem
with 25-pin Connector column of Table A-3.

Table A-3. Common Logic Module KCL.2, MNG Connector Pin Allocations

Pin Line Direction Connection to Dial-Up

Modem with 25-pin
Connector
1 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) IN 8
2 Receive Data (RD) IN 3
3 Transmit Data (TD) OUT 2
4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) OUT 20
5 Signal Ground (SIG) Common reference and 7
DC power supply ground
6 Data Set Ready IN 6
7 Request to Send (RTS) OUT 4
8 Clear to Send (CTS) IN 5
9 Ring Indicator (RI) IN 22

MNG Connector A-3

Appendix A Connection Data MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

A.4 Alarm Relay Connector

The Alarm Relay connector is a 6-pin RJ-12 connector with dry contacts for
relaying alarms from the MX-2100 to activate external equipment. The Alarm
Relay connector can also be used to relay external equipment information to the
MX-2100. Connector pin functions are given in the following table.

Table A-4. Alarm Relay Connector Pinout

Pin Direction Designation Function

1 Out +5V +5 VDC output
2 In/Out Relay F Main relay –Common contact
3 In/Out Relay M Main relay – NC (Normally
Closed) contact
4 In/Out Relay B Main relay – NO (Normally
Open) contact
5 In/Out FGND –
6 In FAN Fan status input, active low (TTL)

A.5 DC Power Input Connector

The DC input power connector used on the MX-2104 and the KPS.3, KPS.5,
KPS.7, and DC-powered KM-Ringer modules, is a 3-pin terminal block type
connector. Connector pin functions are marked on the panel. Refer to the
DC Power Supply Connection Supplement at the end of this manual for details.

A-4 DC Power Input Connector

 Appendix B
Alarms

B.1 Alarm Messages

Table B-1 lists the alarm messages displayed by the MX-2100. For each alarm, two
versions are given: a concise version (maximum 16 characters) displayed on the
LCD, and the version sent to the terminal. In addition to the text, each message
has a code number. Table B-1 lists the messages in ascending order of their code
numbers, and in addition, indicates their type (state or event) and lists the actions
required to correct the alarm condition. Perform the corrective actions in the given
order, until the problem is corrected.
Note In the following table, i indicates the slot number contained in the alarm message.

Table B-1. LCD Alarm Messages

Code Message - LCD Message - Terminal Alarm Description

Type
1 HDR FAILURE HARDWARE FAILURE, State A technical failure has been detected in
SLOT i the module installed in the specified slot
(ML-A, ML-B, 1 through 12). Replace
the module
2 LOC SY LOSS LOCAL SYNC LOSS State The KML module installed in the
specified slot (ML-A, ML-B) lost
synchronization to the incoming data
stream. May indicate a configuration
error or a technical failure
3 B.R.G FAIL B.R.G FAILURE, The baud rate generator of the module
SLOT i installed in the specified I/O slot
(1 through 12) failed. Replace the
module
4 PS-A 5V FAIL PS-A 5V FAILURE State The 5V voltage provided by the KPS-A
module is missing or is out of the
allowable limits. Replace the module
5 PS-A 12V FAIL PS-A 12V FAILURE State One or both of the ±12V voltages
provided by the KPS-A module is
missing or is out of the allowable limits.
Replace the module
6 PS-B 5V FAIL PS-B 5V FAILURE State The 5V voltage provided by the KPS-B
module is missing or is out of the
allowable limits. Replace the module

Alarm Messages B-1

Appendix B Alarms MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table B-1. LCD Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Code Message - LCD Message - Terminal Alarm Description

Type
7 PS-B 12V FAIL PS-B 12V FAILURE State One or both of the ±12V voltages
provided by the KPS-B module is
missing or is out of the allowable limits.
Replace the module
8,9 DB 1 CHKSUM ERR DB 1 CHKSUM ERROR Event The checksum of one of the data bases
DB 2 CHKSUM ERR DB 2 CHKSUM ERROR stored by the KCL module does not
match the checksum calculated after
power-up. The default data base must
be loaded
10 BANDWIDTH OVF BANDWIDTH State The total bandwidth required for the
OVERFLOW active channels exceeds the main link
data rate. Change channel configuration
as required, or increase the main link
data rate
11 ALM BUF OVF ALARM BUFFER State The number of alarms stored in the
OVERFLOW MX-2100 alarm buffer exceeds the
maximum allowable number (100).
New alarms are now written over
previous alarms
12 FALLBACK CLK USE CLOCK WAS State The fallback timing reference source has
CHANGED TO been selected for use
FALLBACK
13 INTERNAL CLK USE CLOCK WAS State The internal oscillator is now used as a
CHANGED TO timing reference source, as a result of
INTERNAL the simultaneous failure of both the
master and fallback clock sources
14 CL HDR FAILURE CL HARDWARE State A technical failure has been detected in
FAILURE the KCL module circuits. Replace the
module
15 REM SYNC LOSS REMOTE SYNC LOSS, State The KML module installed in the
SLOT i specified slot (ML-A, ML-B) of the
remote MX-2100 unit lost
synchronization. This message is
displayed only when downloading is
enabled
16 DOWNLOAD ERROR DOWNLOAD ERROR State Errors are detected in the data received
through the management channel
17 I/O SYNC LOS I/O SYNC LOSS, State The KLS.2 module installed in the
SLOT i specified I/O slot (1 through 12) of the
local MX-2100 unit lost synchronization

B-2 Alarm Messages

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms

Table B-1. LCD Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Code Message - LCD Message - Terminal Alarm Description

Type
18 ML FLIP MAIN LINK FLIP Event The MX-2100 switched to operation on
OCCURRED OCCURRED the second main link. This message can
be displayed only when the redundancy
mode is used
19 ML SIG LOSS ML LOSS OF SIGNAL, State The KML.5 module installed in the
SLOT i specified slot (ML-A, ML-B) does not
receive data (only for KML.5 module)
20 MDL REMOVE MODULE WAS Event The module that was previously installed
REMOVED, SLOT i in the specified slot (ML-A, ML-B and 1
through 12) has been physically
removed, or has been reset, or the
communication with the module failed
21 BACKUP DIAL FAIL MAIN LINK BACKUP Event The connection of the switched backup
DIAL FAILURE link failed. This message can be
displayed only when the switched
backup mode is selected
22 BACKUP ML ACTIVE SWITCHED BACKUP Event The switched backup link has been
ML IS ACTIVE successfully connected and is actively
carrying traffic. This message can be
displayed only when the switched
backup mode is selected
23 ML RECOVERY MAIN LINK RECOVERY Event The main link has returned to normal
operation. This message can be
displayed only when the switched
backup or priority bumping mode is
selected
24 PB FP TO ML-A MAIN LINK FLIP, ML-A Event Main link A is now the active link, after
ACTIVE a flip from link B. This message can be
displayed only when the priority
bumping mode is selected
25 PB FP TO ML-B MAIN LINK FLIP, ML-B Event Main link B is now the active link, after
ACTIVE a flip from link A. This message can be
displayed only when the priority
bumping mode is selected
26 DB SWITCH TO DB1 DATABASE SWITCH TO State The local MX-2100 unit automatically
DATABASE 1 switched to data base 1, in accordance
with the time specified by means of the
DEF DB FLIP
27 DB SWITCH TO DB2 DATABASE SWITCH TO State The local MX-2100 unit automatically
DATABASE 2 switched to data base 2, in accordance
with the time specified by means of the
DEF DB FLIP

Alarm Messages B-3

Appendix B Alarms MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table B-1. LCD Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Code Message - LCD Message - Terminal Alarm Description

Type
28 PSWRD DW IS ON PSWRD SWITCH IS ON Event The PSWRD switch of the KCL module
is ON. This enforces the default
password
29 SP-PAR DW IS ON SP-PAR SWITCH IS ON Event The SP-PARM switch of the KCL module
is ON. This enforces the default
supervisory port parameters
30 DB-INIT DW IS ON DB-INIT SWITCH IS ON Event The DB-INIT switch of the KCL module
is ON. This will result in the loading of
the default data base parameters when
the MX-2100 will be turned on or reset
31 RTC BATTERY FAIL REAL TIME CLOCK Event The voltage of the battery that provides
BATTERY FAILURE power to the internal real time clock is
too low for proper operation and must
be replaced as soon as possible. The
battery test is performed during the
power-up test only
32 VOICE [Link] VOICE SYNC LOSS, CH State The channel specified by j (1 or 2) of the
voice module installed in the I/O slot
specified by i (1 through 12) of the local
MX-2100 unit lost synchronization
33 MODEM LOOP TAIL-END MODEM ON State The tail-end modem connected to the
LOOP, CH channel specified by j (1 or 2) of the
KLS.1 module installed in the I/O slot
specified by i (1 through 12) of the local
MX-2100 unit reports a loop
34 CSU LBK CSU LBK, SLOT i State The KML.6 module installed in slot
(ML-A, ML-B) performs a CSU loopback
in response to a network loopback
request
35 IDLE SEQ IDLE SEQUENCE, State The KML.6 module installed in slot
SLOT i (ML-A, ML-B) reports the recognition of
an idle code in the data received from
the network
36 OUT OF SERV ML OUT OF SERVICE, State The KML.6 module installed in slot
SLOT i (ML-A, ML-B) reports the recognition of
an out-of-service code in the data
received from the network
37 OUT FRAME ML OUT OF FRAME, State The KML.6 module installed in slot
SLOT i (ML-A, ML-B) reports the recognition of
an out-of-frame code in the data
received from the network

B-4 Alarm Messages

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms

Table B-1. LCD Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Code Message - LCD Message - Terminal Alarm Description

Type
38 DSU LOOP.B DSU LOOPBACK, State The KML.6 module installed in slot
SLOT i (ML-A, ML-B) performs a DSU loopback
in response to a network DSU loopback
request
39 LINK ERROR KTRE/KMBE LINK State The KTRE or KMBE module installed in
ERROR, SLOT i I/O slot (1 through 12) of the local
MX-2100 unit has lost communication
with the remote side
40 LAN ERROR KTRE/KMBE LAN State The KTRE or KMBE module installed in
ERROR, SLOT i I/O slot (1 through 12) of the local
MX-2100 unit reports that the LAN
insertion process failed
41 KDI FRAME OVF KDI FRAME Event Frame overflow occurred. This usually
OVERFLOW happens because the timing of link A is
not locked to the timing of link B
42 PIGB HRD ERR PIGGY-BACK State The KML.7 module installed in the
HARDWARE ERROR A specified slot reports a hardware
problem on the T1 interface board
43 NETWORK LLB NETWORK LLB, Event A network-initiated line loopback has
SLOT i been activated. This loopback cannot be
disconnected by the system
management
44 NETWORK PLB NETWORK PLB, Event A network-initiated payload loopback
SLOT i has been activated. This loopback
cannot be disconnected by the system
management
45 DRIVER FAIL DRIVER FAIL, State The KML.8 module installed in the
SLOT i specified I/O slot reports a hardware
failure in the E1 line driver
46 SIGNAL LOSS SIGNAL LOSS, SLOT i State The KML.8 module installed in the
specified slot reports a loss of input
signal
47 EXECIVE BPV EXECIVE BPV, SLOT i State The number of coding errors detected in
the main link signal received by the
active main link module is too high (the
bipolar violation rate exceeds 1×106 for
1000 consecutive seconds). This may
indicate a fault in the link or in the link
transmission equipment, or a failure in
the active main link module
48 AIS OCCURED AIS OCCURED, SLOT i State The Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), a
framed “all ones” sequence, is received
on the main link

Alarm Messages B-5

Appendix B Alarms MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table B-1. LCD Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Code Message - LCD Message - Terminal Alarm Description

Type
49 AIS RED ALM AIS RED ALM, SLOT i State The local frame synchronization has
been lost because of AIS reception
50 AIS SY LOS AIS SYNC LOSS, State The local frame synchronization has
SLOT i been lost because of AIS reception
51 RED ALARM RED ALARM, SLOT i State Local main link module lost
synchronization to incoming data
stream. May indicate a configuration
error or a technical failure. For T1 links,
this condition is the red alarm
52 [Link] LOS E1 LOCAL SYNC LOSS, State Local main link module lost
SLOT i synchronization to incoming data
stream. May indicate a configuration
error or a technical failure. For T1 links,
this condition is the red alarm
53 L MF ALARM LOCAL MF [Link], Event On an E1 link operating with 256S
SLOT i framing, the local module has lost
multiframe synchronization
54 R MF ALARM REMOTE MF [Link], Event On an E1 link operating with 256S
SLOT i framing, the remote equipment has lost
multiframe synchronization
55 YELLOW ALM YELLOW ALARM, State Remote equipment lost synchronization
SLOT i to the incoming data stream. May
indicate a configuration error or a
technical failure. For T1 links, this
condition is the yellow alarm
56 [Link] LOS: A E1 REMOTE SYNC LOSS State The KML.8 module installed in the
SLOT i specified slot reports remote loss of
frame alignment (ML-A, ML-B)
57 FRAME SLIP FRAME SLIP, SLOT i Event A main link frame slip has occurred. This
is usually caused by incorrect selection
of clock sources
58 BPV ERROR BPV ERROR, SLOT i State The number of coding errors detected in
the main link signal received by the
active module is too high (the bipolar
violation rate exceeds 1×10-6 for 1000
consecutive seconds). This may indicate
a fault in the link or in the link
transmission equipment, or a failure in
the active main link module

B-6 Alarm Messages

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms

Table B-1. LCD Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Code Message - LCD Message - Terminal Alarm Description

Type
59 EXE ERR RAT EXECIVE ERR RATIO, State The error rate detected on the frame
SLOT i synchronization bits is high (as defined
by ITU-T Rec. G.732), and may indicate
hardware problems or defective
connections
60 CRC-4 ERROR CRC-4 ERROR, SLOT i Event The main link module reports the
detection of a CRC error
61 B.R.G FAIL SFIFO B.R.G FAIL, State The baud rate generator of the specified
SLOT i module failed. Replace the module
62 SFIFO SLIP SFIFO SLIP, SLOT i Event The KML.7 module installed in the
specified slot reports that a slip occurred
in the SFIFO
63 INT CLK USE INTERNAL CLOCK IN State The internal oscillator has been selected
USE, SLOT i as a timing reference sources, as a result
of simultaneous failure of both the
master and fallback clock sources
64 DP – DIAL FAIL DP CYCLE DIAL FAILED Event The dial-out cycle failed, and the redial
attempts stopped until a new alarm
reported
65 DP PRI CALL FAIL DP PRIMARY CALL Event The call setup attempts to the primary
FAILED dial-out directory number failed
66 DP [Link] FAIL DP ALTERNATE CALL Event The call setup attempts to the alternate
FAILED dial-out directory number failed
67 FRAMER CARD FAIL FRAMER CARD FAILED State The master KVF.5 module failed
68 MGMT P IS LOP ML-i MGMT PORT IS State Management port is looped and cannot
LOOPED ML-i communicate with the remote MX-2100
due to loopback activation on main link
A or B
69 MGMT DOWN ML-i MGMT PORT IS DOWN State MX-2100 cannot communicate to the
ML-i remote MX-2100 via in-band
management channel in main link A
or B
70 AGETS SAM NET AGENTS WITH SAME Event There is an agent with the same name in
NAME IN NET the network
71 TAK SNMP MMI CONTOLR TAKEN BY Event MX-2100 is controlled by SNMP
SNMP MMI management station
72 TAK TERM MMI CONTOLR TAKEN BY Event MX-2100 is controlled by ASCII terminal
TERM MMI
73 TAK LCD MMI CONTOLR TAKEN BY Event MX-2100 is controlled by LCD
LCD MMI

Alarm Messages B-7

Appendix B Alarms MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table B-1. LCD Alarm Messages (Cont.)

Code Message - LCD Message - Terminal Alarm Description

Type
74 HW ERR:KCL KCL WARE ERROR:KCL State Hardware error occurred during self test
of COMMON LOGIC Card
75 HW ERR:IO-i HARDWARE State Hardware error occurred during self test
ERROR:IO-i of I/O-i (slot 1 through 12) card. It can
also occur due to a slip in the NSFIFO
chip on the card
76 HW ERR:ML-i HARDWARE State Hardware error occurred during self test
ERROR:ML-i of Main Link-i (ML-A or ML-B) card. It
can also occur due to a slip in the
NSFIFO chip on the card
77 ALARM BUFFER ALARM BUFFER EMPTY Event Appears when the user requests the
EMPTY alarm buffer list from a SNMP network
management station and the list is empty
78 FRAGMENTATION FRAGMENTATION IN Event Fragmentation in frame allocation of
FRAME ALLOCATION main link. Can occur when boding is
enabled in KML.10 parameters
79 RED ALARM RED ALARM, SLOT: State Local KVF.5 master module lost
synchronization to incoming data
stream. For KVF.5/T1/M card, condition
is red alarm
80 YELLOW ALARM YELLOW ALARM, SLOT: State The remote PBX that connects to KVF.5
module, lost synchronization to
incoming data stream. For KVF.5/T1/M
card, condition is yellow alarm
81 FRAME SLIP FRAME SLIP, SLOT: State The number of the SLIP detected in the
frame that connects from PBX to KVF.5
card in the slot
82 BPV ERROR BPV ERROR, SLOT: State The number of coding errors detected in
the line that connects from PBX to the
KVF.5 card in the slot
83 PHASOV OVF PHASOR OVERFLOW, Event Internal overflow in the specified
SLOT: module buffer, (slot number 1 through
12), due to difference in clock rates or
insufficient buffer size. Make sure that
the timing modes of the MX-2100 main
link and I/O module are compatible
84 PORT LOSS PORT SYNC LOSS, State ISDN port sync loss
PORT
85 FANS FAIL FANS FAILURE Event The FAN that connected to MX-2100
failed
86 NO SIGNAL PORT LOSS OF SIGNAL State Loss of port signal is received when
signal is less than 15 dB (X2-T6164)
87 OVERFLOW OVERFLOW, PORT : State Port over/under flow

B-8 Alarm Messages

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms

Table B-1. Name of Table (Cont.)

Code Message - LCD Message - Terminal Alarm Description

Type
88 VOICE [Link] VOICE SYNC LOSS, State The port specified by j (1..8) of the voice
PORT : module installed in the I/O slot specified
by i (1..12) of the local MX-2100, lost
synchronization
89 CRC ERROR CRC ERROR, SLOT : Event The I/O module reports detection of a
CRC error
90 SIGNAL LOSS SIGNAL LOSS, SLOT : State The I/O module installed in the specified
slot reports a loss of input signal
91 AIS ALARM AIS ALARM, SLOT : State The Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), a
framed "all ones" sequence, is received
on the I/O module
92 AIS RED ALARM AIS RED ALARM, SLOT : State The local frame synchronization has
been lost because of AIS reception
93 COMP ERROR COMPRESSION ERROR, Event The compression device related to the
PORT : port specified by j (1..8) as the voice
module installed in the I/O slot specified
by i (1..12) of the local MX-2100, has a
technical failure
94 TDM ERROR TDM DEVICE ERROR, Event The TDM device related to the port
PORT : specified by j (1..8) of the voice module
installed in the I/O slot specified by i
(1..12) of the local MX-2100, reports a
technical failure
95 TDM SLIP TDM DEVICE SLIP, State The TDM device related to the port
PORT : specified by j (1..8) of the voice module
installed in the I/O slot specified by i
(1..12) of the local MX-2100, reports a
slip error
96 REMOTE SYNC LOSS,
PORT :

Alarm Messages B-9

Appendix B Alarms MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

B.2 Configuration Error Messages

The MX-2100 provides configuration error messages for the LCD and for the
supervision terminal.
• The configuration error messages displayed on the LCD have the format
CONFIG ERROR, followed by a numerical code.
• The configuration messages have the format ERROR, followed by the
numerical code, and a concise textual description of the error condition.

The error messages are explained below:

ERROR 01 ILLEGAL MASTER CLOCK SOURCE (CARD TIMING/SPEED)

Illegal source for a master clock timing reference source: the selected channel is
not operating in the DTE2 mode.
ERROR 02 ILLEGAL FALLBACK CLOCK SOURCE (CARD TIMING/SPEED)

Illegal source for a fallback clock timing reference source: the selected channel is
not operating in the DTE2 mode.
ERROR 03 ILLEGAL ML LOOP COMBINATION

You are trying to activate simultaneously local and main link loops, or both types
of ITU-T Rec. V.54 main link loops (LOOP 2 and LOOP 3). This combination is
not allowed (refer to the Diagnostics chapter).
ERROR 04 ILLEGAL I/O MODULE LOOP COMBINATION

You are trying to activate simultaneously both a local and remote loop or PRBS
transmission, or BERT test, or tone injection, on the same channel. None of these
combinations are allowed (refer to the Diagnostics chapter).
ERROR 05 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF CHANNEL SPEED AND PROTOCOL

Conflict in the channel parameters of the KLS.1 module being configured: you are
trying to select a data rate of 38.4 kbps, but the channel is configured for
asynchronous operation. The maximum data rate for asynchronous operation is
19.2 kbps.
ERROR 06 ILLEGAL NUMBER OF MODULE CONTROL SIGNALS

The number of control signals that can be transmitted for any module is none, 1, 2
or 4. You are trying to select a forbidden value, e.g., you cannot select RTS on one
channel of a given module, and DTR and RTS on another channel of the same
module.

B-10 Configuration Error Messages

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms

ERROR 07 BANDWIDTH OVERFLOW - ML-<A or B; nothing or PRIORITY>

The total bandwidth required for the active channels exceeds the main link data
rate. Change channel configuration as required, or increase the main link data
rate.
During the definition of channel connections (DEF CON command):
• For dual-link operation: the number of channels you want to connect to a
given main link requires a bandwidth that exceeds the available main link
bandwidth.
• For priority bumping operation: the number of channels assigned HIGH
priority requires a bandwidth that exceeds the available main link bandwidth.

ERROR 08 MASTER AND FALLBACK CLOCKS ARE SAME

You cannot select the same data channel as both main and fallback reference
timing source.
ERROR 09 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF CHANNEL AND ML-<A or B> SPEED
• You are trying to select a channel rate of 192 kbps on a KHS.1 channel while
the main link data rate is 256 kbps. This combination is not allowed, therefore
you must either increase the main link data rate or reduce the channel rate.
• You are trying to connect a KVC.1 card when the main link data rate is
768 kbps. This combination is not allowed.

ERROR 10 ILLEGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING ML REMOTE LOOP

You are trying to activate (on either MX-2100) an illegal combination of loops
which includes the remote main link loop (refer to the Diagnostics chapter).
ERROR 11 ILLEGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING ML LOCAL LOOP

You are trying to activate (on either MX-2100) an illegal combination of loops that
includes the local main link loop. This combination is not allowed (refer to the
Diagnostics chapter).
ERROR 12 ILLEGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING I/O REMOTE LOOP

You are trying to activate (on either MX-2100) an illegal combination of loops that
includes a remote channel loop (refer to the Diagnostics chapter).
ERROR 13 ILLEGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING I/O BERT

You are trying to activate a BERT test on both MX-2100 units.

ERROR 14 ILLEGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING ML V.54 LOOP2

You are trying to activate (on either MX-2100) an illegal combination of loops that
includes a main link ITU-T Rec. V.54 loop 2 (refer to the Diagnostics chapter).

Configuration Error Messages B-11

Appendix B Alarms MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

ERROR 15 ILLEGAL LOOP COMBINATION INVOLVING ML V.54 LOOP3

You are trying to activate (on either MX-2100) an illegal combination of loops that
includes a main link ITU-T Rec. V.54 loop 3 (refer to the Diagnostics chapter).
ERROR 16 ILLEGAL KLS.2 COMPOSITE AND ML-<A or B> SPEED
COMBINATION

The MX-2100 main link rate is 256 or 384 kbps, and you are trying to configure a
KLS.2 module for a composite data rate of 2.4 kbps. This combination of main link
and composite data rates is not allowable, because it would require oversampling.
ERROR 17 ML MODE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH I/O SLOT LINK SELECT

The selected main link mode is not compatible with the selections made for the I/O
modules, i.e., some modules have been connected to main link A and others to main
link B, but the current main link mode is SINGLE, REDUNDANCY, or SWITCHED
BACKUP.
ERROR 18 TIMING/SPEED NOT COMPATIBLE WITH ML MODULE TYPE

You are trying to select a timing mode and/or speed that is not supported by the
installed KML module.
ERROR 19 ILLEGAL ML MODE FOR WORKING WITH LCD

The main link mode selected by the operator on the MX-2100 front panel is not
allowed, because the required parameters cannot be defined using the front panel
controls and the LCD.
ERROR 20 ILLEGAL COMMAND, MODULE NOT INSTALLED

The slot whose number has been specified in the command is empty.
ERROR 21 ILLEGAL COMMAND, CHANNEL IS DISCONNECTED

The channel whose number is specified in the command is not connected (NC).
You must connect the channel before specifying its number in a configuration
command.
ERROR 22 LOOP IS NOT ACTIVE

You are trying to deactivate a loop that currently is not activated.

ERROR 23 ILLEGAL LOOP FOR INSTALLED MODULE

The loop you are trying to activate is not supported by the module whose number
has been specified in the command.
ERROR 24 ILLEGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT ML MODE

The command you have entered is not allowed in the current main link mode.
ERROR 25 CONFLICT BETWEEN CTRL_SIG PARAMETER AND MODULE TYPE

The value entered in the CONTROL SIGNALING field is not supported by the
module whose number has been specified in the command.

B-12 Configuration Error Messages

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms

ERROR 26 MODULE TYPE MISMATCH BETWEEN DATABASE AND HARDWARE

The module type recorded in the MX-2100 data base differs from the module
sensed by the MX-2100.
ERROR 27 ILLEGAL CLOCK SELECTION FOR MODULE TYPE

The selected timing mode is not supported by the module whose number has
been specified in the command.
ERROR 28 ILLEGAL COMMAND FOR INSTALLED MODULE

The command you have entered is not supported by the module whose number
has been specified in the command.
ERROR 30 ILLEGAL DCD_DEL AND INTERFACE COMBINATION

The DCD_DEL parameter is not supported by the selected supervisory port

interface (the DCD DEL parameter must be 0 when the supervisory port interface
is DCE).
ERROR 31 ILLEGAL COMMAND, DOWNLOAD NOT SUPPORTED

The command you have entered cannot be executed when downloading is

disabled.
ERROR 32 ILLEGAL PROTOCOL AND TIMING COMBINATION

You are trying to select a channel timing mode for a data channel configured for
asynchronous operation.
ERROR 33 REDUNDANT ML NOT INSTALLED

No redundant KML module is installed.

ERROR 34 DISCONNECT LOOP BEFORE CONFIGURATION CHANGE

You are trying to change the configuration while a loop is activate this is not
allowed.

ERROR 35 ILLEGAL TIME DIVISION DEFINITION (<day>)

The periods defined by means of the DEF AGENDA commands are not correctly
sequenced.
ERROR 36 ILLEGAL DATA BASE FLIP TIME

You must define two valid data base flip times.

ERROR 37 CONFLICT IN INTERFACE AND DSR PARAMETER

You are trying to select DSR=ON after the supervisory port interface has been set to
DTE.
ERROR 38 ILLEGAL COMMAND, ALTERNATE DATA BASE IS ACTIVE
The command entered by you is not supported on the alternate data base (only
DEF commands are supported).

Configuration Error Messages B-13

Appendix B Alarms MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

ERROR 39 ILLEGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT SYSTEM TYPE

The command entered by you is not supported by the MX-2104.

ERROR 41 ILLEGAL COMMAND NO CONNECTED CHANNELS

You are trying to enter a command that is supported only when the channel
specified in the command is connected.
ERROR 42 CONFLICT IN FRAME MODE AND DOWNLOAD

You can select manual frame bit allocation only when downloading is disabled.
ERROR 43 ILLEGAL FRAME ALLOCATION

An incorrect bit allocation has been detected, i.e., the same bits have been
assigned to different channels, or the specified start or end bit number is invalid.
ERROR 44 ILLEGAL LINK CLOCK AND ML MODE COMBINATION

You can select the main link clock source only when using the dual-link or priority
bumping mode, provided a KDI module is installed in the MX-2100.
ERROR 45 ILLEGAL LINK CLOCK AND ML TIMING COMBINATION

When selecting one main link as the clock source, the timing mode of the other
main link cannot be DTE or LBT.
If both main links use LBT or DTE timing, the LINK_CLK parameter must be set to
NONE.
ERROR 50 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF INTERFACE AND ECHO CANCELLER

You are trying to disable the echo canceller of a voice module, e.g., KVC.2, etc.,
when its interface is 2-WIRE. This is not allowable, because when the link
connecting between the subscribers includes hybrids, the quality of transmission
without echo cancellers is degraded.
ERROR 51 ML_MODE AND HARDWARE CONFIGURATION CONFLICT

The MX-2100 is equipped with only one KML module, but you are trying to select
a main link mode that requires two KML modules (i.e., only the SINGLE mode is
allowed).
ERROR 52 CONFLICT BETWEEN CH1 AND CH2 SPEEDS
• You are trying to configure channels 1 and 2 of a KLS.1 module to operate
with data rates from different groups. This is not allowed.
• For the KVF.4/S0 module, you cannot select a 64 kbps rate for both the B1
and B2 channel.

ERROR 56 ILLEGAL START TIME SLOT ALLOCATION

You are selecting an incorrect starting time slot on the KVF.5 master module.
ERROR 58 ILLEGAL SIGNALING MODE

You are selecting an incorrect signaling parameter in KVF.5 or KVF.6 modules.

B-14 Configuration Error Messages

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarms

ERROR 59 CONFLICT BETWEEN GROUPS DESTINATION

You are selecting a time slot group that is already connected (KVF.5 and KVF.6
cards).
ERROR 60 FRAGMENTATION IN FRAME

MX-2100 can not use the full free frame space for current configuration.
ERROR 201 ML SPEEDS SHOULD BE THE SAME

The main link data rates configured on two MX-2100 connected in a link must be
equal.
ERROR 202 ML TIMINGS SHOULD BE DIFFERENT

The timing modes of two MX-2100 connected in a link must be different. In

particular, do not select the INT source at both ends of a link when KML.5, KML.6,
KML.7, or KML.8 modules are used.
ERROR 203 LOCAL AND REM SLOTS OR PARAMETERS NOT COMPATIBLE
<parameter name>

The values assigned to the specified parameter in two MX-2100 connected in a

link are incompatible.
ERROR 204 LOCAL AND REM MUX ML MODES NOT COMPATIBLE

Incorrect main link configuration of MX-2100 connected in a link:

• For drop & insert configuration, check that the main link mode for the
dropping MX-2100 is dual-link, and that the other units are configured for
single link.
• For other configurations check that identical modes are used at both ends.

ERROR 205 ML-B>ML-A PRIORITY SHOULD EQUAL ML-A>ML-B PRIORITY

Select identical priorities for switching between the two links.

ERROR 206 FRAME ALLOCATION TYPE (AUTO-MANUAL) SHOULD BE THE SAME

The frame allocation mode of two MX-2100 connected in a link must be identical
and correct parameters must be selected:
• For automatic allocation, check the modules in the local and remote units
have compatible offsets and parameters.
• For normal allocation, check that connected channels have compatible
parameters.

ERROR 207 INCOMPLETE FRAME ALLOCATION

Check your manual frame bit allocation and correct.

ERROR 208 CONNECTED MUXES CANNOT BE BOTH REMOTE

Make sure that one of the MX-2100 units connected in a link is defined as local,
and the other as remote.

Configuration Error Messages B-15

Appendix B Alarms MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

ERROR 209 CHANNEL SOURCE OF MASTER/FALLBACK CLOCK DOES NOT EXIST

You are trying to select a channel that is not physically present as the clock source.
ERROR 210 INVALID ML-B CARD TYPE FOR SWITCH BACKUP ML MODE

You can select the switched backed mode only when a KML.1, KML.2, KML.3 or
KML.10 module is installed.
ERROR 211 ML MODE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH NO. OF ML

Before selecting the dual-link or priority bumping mode, make sure to configure
two links.
ERROR 212 CONNECTED MUXES SHOULD HAVE THE SAME NO. OF
CONFIGURATIONS

For two MX-2100 connected in a link, always define the same number of data
bases (either one or two data bases on each unit).
ERROR 213 KM2104 CAN HAVE ONLY ONE LINK

You are trying to define a second link on a MX-2104. This is not supported.
ERROR 214 LOCAL-REM SLOTS OP. HIGHWAY OR ML PRIORITIES,
INCOMPATIBLE

Check configuration of main link priorities for all the modules.

ERROR 215 KM2104 OFFSET, EDIT-AGENT MISMATCH

The current offset and the offset in the edited data base are different.
ERROR 218 ONLY ONE KDI/[Link] IS ALLOWED IN A MUX

Only one KDI or KDI/CH can be installed (or programmed) in a MX-2100.

ERROR 226 ML BITWEIGHT MISMATCH

When performing manual frame allocation, the two MX-2100 connected in a link
must have equal bandwidth allocation units (refer to the General Information
chapter).
ERROR 234 KVF.5 SLAVE CARDS MUST HAVE A MASTER

Make sure a KVF.5/T1/M or KVF.5/E1/M module is installed.

ERROR 235 TOO MANY KVF.5 CARDS IN THE MUX

The total number of KVF.5 modules inserted in the MX-2100 exceeds the
maximum number needed to process the T1 or E1 signal.
ERROR 236 INVALID KVF.5 TS GROUP

You are trying to select an incorrect group of time slots on a KVF.5 slave module.

B-16 Configuration Error Messages

 Appendix C
SNMP Management

C.1 Scope
This appendix provides the specific information required for the management of
the MX-2100 equipment by means of the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP).

C.2 SNMP Environment

General
MX-2100 SNMP management functions are provided by an internal SNMP agent,
located in the KCL.2 module.
SNMP management uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP), which is a
connections-mode transport protocol, part of the Internet Protocol (IP) suite of
protocols. This section covers the information related to the SNMP environment.
SNMP Principles
The SNMP management protocol is an asynchronous command/response polling
protocol: all the management traffic is initiated by the SNMP-based network
management station (except for trap messages), which addresses the managed
entities in its management domain. Only the addressed managed entity answers
the polling of the management station.
The managed entities include a function called an SNMP agent, which is
responsible for interpretation and handling of the management station requests to
the managed entity, and the generation of properly-formatted responses to the
management station.

SNMP Operations
The SNMP protocol includes four types of operations:
• getRequest - Command for retrieving specific management information from
the managed entity. The managed entity responds with a getResponse
message.
• getNextRequest - Command for retrieving sequentially specific management
information from the managed entity. The managed entity responds with a
getResponse message.

SNMP Environment C-1

Appendix C SNMP Management MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• setRequest - Command for manipulating specific management information

within the managed entity. The managed entity responds with a setResponse
message.
• trap - Management message carrying unsolicited information on extraordinary
events (e.g., alarms) reported by the managed entity.

The Management Information Base

The management information base (MIB) includes a collection of managed
objects. A managed object is defined as a parameter that can be managed, such as
a performance statistics value. The MIB includes the definitions of relevant
managed objects. Various MIBs can be defined for various management purposes,
types of equipment, etc.
An object's definition includes the range of values and the access rights:
• Read-only - Object value can be read, but cannot be set
• Read-write - Object value can be read or set
• Write-only - Object value can be set, but cannot be read
• Not accessible - Object value cannot be read, nor set.

MIB Structure
The MIB has an inverted tree-like structure, with each definition of a managed
object forming one leaf, located at the end of a branch of that tree. Each leaf in
the MIB is reached by a unique path, therefore by numbering the branching
points, starting with the top, each leaf can be uniquely defined by a sequence of
numbers. The formal description of the managed objects and the MIB structure is
provided in a special standardized format, called Abstract Syntax Notation 1
(ASN.1).
Since the general collection of MIBs can also be organized in a similar structure,
under the supervision of the Internet Activities Board (IAB), any parameter
included in a MIB that is recognized by the IAB is uniquely defined.
To provide the flexibility necessary in a global structure, MIBs are classified into
various branches, one of them being the experimental branch, and another, the
private (enterprise-specific) branch. Under the private branch of MIBs, each
enterprise (manufacturer) can be assigned a number. The assigned number
designates the top of an enterprise-specific sub-tree of non-standard MIBs.
MIBs of general interest are published by the IAB in the form of a Request for
Comment (RFC) document. In addition, MIBs are also often assigned informal
names that reflect their primary purpose. Enterprise-specific MIBs are published
and distributed by their originator, who is responsible for their contents.

C-2 SNMP Environment

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C SNMP Management

MIBs Supported by the MX-2100 SNMP Agent

The interpretation of the relevant MIBs is a function of the SNMP agent of each
managed entity. The general MX-2100 SNMP agent currently supports RFC 1213
(the standard MIB-II).
In addition, the MX-2100 SNMP agent supports the enterprise-specific MIB
identified as (read the following as a continuous string):
iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4)
.enterprises(1).rad(164).radWAN(3)

Management Domains Under SNMP

SNMP enables, in principle, each management station that knows the MIBs
supported by a device, to perform all the management operations available on that
device. However, this is not desirable in practical situations, so it is necessary to
provide a means to limit the management domains.

SNMP Communities
To enable the delimitation of management domains, SNMP uses communities.
Each community is identified by a name, which is a case-sensitive alphanumeric
string defined by the user (the MX-2100 SNMP agents support community names
of up to 8 characters).
Any SNMP entity (this term includes both managed entities and management
stations) can be assigned by its user community names.

Access Restriction Using SNMP Communities

In general, SNMP agents support two types of access rights:
• Read-only - The SNMP agent accepts and processes only SNMP getRequest
and getNextRequest commands from management stations which have the
same read-only community name.
• Read-write - The SNMP agent accepts and processes all the SNMP commands
received from a management station with the same write community name.
For each SNMP entity it is possible to define a list of the communities which
are authorized to communicate with it, and the access rights associated with
each community (this is the entity’s SNMP community name table). For
example, the SNMP community name table of the SNMP agent of the
MX-2100 can include three community names.

In accordance with the SNMP protocol, the SNMP community of the originating
entity is sent in each message.
When an SNMP message is received by the addressed entity, first it checks the
originator's community: if the community name of the message originator differs
from the community name specified for that type of message in the agent, the
message it discarded (SNMP agents of managed entities report this event by means
of an authentication failure trap).

SNMP Environment C-3

Appendix C SNMP Management MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

MX-2100 Communities
The SNMP agent of the MX-2100 is programmed to recognize the following
community types:
• Read - SNMP community that has read-only authorization, i.e., the SNMP
agent will accept only getRequest and getNextRequest commands from
management stations using that community.
• Write - SNMP community that has read-write authorization, i.e., the SNMP
agent will also accept setRequest commands from management stations
using that community.
• Trap - SNMP community which the SNMP agent will send within trap
messages.

C.3 IP Environment

General
The SNMP agent of the MX-2100 can communicate either out-of-band, or
in-band:

Out-of-Band
Out-of-band communication is performed via the serial ports ‘Serial Link Internet
Protocol’ (SLIP) or Ethernet of the KCL.2 module.

In-Band
The user can select the main bandwidth allocated to management, and the
transmission and routing management protocols.
The bandwidth for management can be one of the following: 2.4, 3.2, 4.8, 9.6 or
19.2 Kbps and depends on main link speed. The user can select the bandwidth for
main link A and/or main link B.
The following are the minimum recommended management bandwidths:
• SNMP - 9.6 kbps
• TELNET - 4.8 kbps
• PING - 2.4 kbps

In the transmit direction, the SNMP agent encapsulates the management messages
in frames and sends them at the selected rate through the selected main link
(KML-A or KML-B).

C-4 IP Environment
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C SNMP Management

IP Environment

IP Address Structure
Under the IP protocol, each IP network element (SNMP agents, network
management stations, etc.) is called an IP host and must be assigned an IP address.
An IP address is a 32-bit number, represented as four 8-bit bytes. Each byte
represents a decimal number in the range of 0 through 255. The address is given
in decimal format, with the bytes separated by decimal points, e.g., [Link].
This format is called dotted quad notation.
An IP address is logically divided into two main portions:
• Network Portion. The network portion is assigned by the Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority (IANA). There are five IP address classes: A, B, C, D, and E.
However, only the classes A, B and C are used for IP addressing.
• Consult your network manager with respect to the class of IP addresses used
on your network.
• The network portion of an IP address can be one, two or three bytes long, in
accordance with the IP address class. This arrangement is illustrated in
Figure C-1.

IP Address
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4

Class A Network Portion Host Portion

Class B Network Portion Host Portion

Class C Network Portion Host Portion

Figure C-1. IP Address Classes

The class of each IP address can be determined from its leftmost byte, in
accordance with the following table.

Table C-1. IP Address Class

Address Class First Byte Address Range

Class A 0 through 127 0.H.H.H through 127.H.H.H
Class B 128 through 191 128.H.H.H through 191.H.H.H
Class C 192 through 223 192.H.H.H through 223.H.H.H

IP Environment C-5
Appendix C SNMP Management MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

In the address range:

numbers - indicate bytes that are part of the network portion
H - indicates bytes that are part of the host portion.
• Host Portion. The host portion is used to identify an individual host connected
to the network. The host identifier is assigned by the using organization, in
accordance with its specific needs.
Note The all-zero host identifier is always interpreted as a network identifier, and must
not be assigned to an actual host.

• Often, the host portion is further sub-divided into two portions:

Subnet Number - For example, subnet numbers can be used to identify
departmental subnetworks. The subnet number follows the network
identifier.
Host Number - the last bits of the IP address.

Net and Subnet Masks

Net and subnet masks are used to help filter the relevant traffic more efficiently:
the function of the net and subnet mask is to specify how many of the IP address
bits are actually used for the net identifier and for the subnet number.
The mask is a 32-bit word that includes “ones” in the positions used for net and
subnet identifications, followed by “zeros” up to the end of the IP address.
For example, the subnet mask corresponding to the Class C IP address
[Link] is [Link].

Recommendations for the Selection of IP Addresses

When the MX-2100 SNMP agent and its management station are connected to the
same network, the network identifier part of the IP address assigned to the SNMP
agent must be identical to the network identifier part of the IP address of the
management station.
However, the agent and the MX-2100 SNMP management station can also be on
different IP networks. In this case, each one will assigned IP addresses according to
its IP network.
Automatic IP Traffic Routing
The SNMP agent of MX-2100 includes an IP router function, used to route
management messages automatically. The IP router function of each SNMP agent
operates both on the in-band, as well as on the out-of-band traffic, depending if
download bandwidth was enabled in the main link for management.
When using in-band communication, the IP router can receive the management
traffic through each main link, via user-specified bandwidth of main link.

C-6 IP Environment
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C SNMP Management

Subnet Addressing
When a large number of MX-2100 units are managed by an SNMP management
station, significant management traffic may be generated. Since large networks
generally have more than one management station, the management traffic load
becomes even higher. The usual approach to the management of a large network
is to split the network into management domains, where each management station
manages a predefined group of MX-2100 units. In this case, from the point of view
of system management, the network can be split into several subnetworks, as
shown in Figure C-2.

Management
Station Network B

MBE/RAS/A

Network A Network C

Management
Station Management
Station

MBE/RAS/A MBE/RAS/A

Figure C-2. Management System Topology Using Subnetting

For this purpose, the IP router function of MX-2100 SNMP agents supports
learning filters. A learning filter is defined by means of a subnet IP address, and a
subnet mask. The IP router will learn only addresses of agent IP addresses, which
when viewed through the mask, match the subnet IP address. Therefore, the IP
router can be instructed to learn only IP addresses of MX-2100 units within
predefined subnetworks. In the example, of Figure C-2, MX-2100 units in network
A need only learn the addresses of other units in the same network, and those of
units in network B; the same is true for the units in networks C and B.
Each pair of subnet IP address and subnet mask is called a net entry, and is
assigned a unique ID. The range of ID's is 1 through 255.

IP Environment C-7
Appendix C SNMP Management MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

C.4 SNMP Traps

The SNMP agent of the MX-2100 supports the MIB-II authentication trap, and in
addition generates the following enterprise-specific traps:
• Each alarm message
• The result of each sanity check.

The following commands are used to set the SNMP traps:

• DEF AGENT
• DEF NAME
• DEF MANAGER LIST.
Note
After using DEF AGENT, you must reset MX-2100.

Note
Identifying a remote agent takes about 1 minute.

C-8 SNMP Traps

 Appendix D
Software Download

D.1 Scope
This section presents procedures for installing new software upgrade releases in the
KCL.2 module. The KCL.2 module stores the software in Flash memory. The
software is stored in compressed format, and is decompressed and loaded into the
module RAM upon power-up. Since the Flash memory is not used to run the
software, new software can be loaded in two ways:
• Off-line, using any PC directly connected to the Supervisory Port of the KCL.2
module. In this case, the MX-2100 system cannot carry traffic while software
downloading takes place. This procedure can be used to upgrade the module
software version, as well as to install software in a new KCL.2 module, e.g., a
repaired module. This installation method is called cold, or local, software
installation.
• The cold software installation process must be performed from the DOS
prompt; only use a DOS window under Windows ’95. The program [Link] is
required for performing the cold installation.
• On-line, use TFTP software, directly or through other MX-2100 systems
without stopping the operation of the MX-2100 system in which the KCL.2
module is installed.
• This procedure can only be used to upgrade the module software version
while the equipment operates, and therefore it is called warm, or remote,
software installation.

Software releases are distributed on diskettes. The diskettes carry the compressed
software file, [Link].

D.2 Cold (Local) Installation Procedure

Preparations
1. Copy the distribution files, [Link] and [Link], to a convenient directory
on your PC.
2. Set DIP switch 3 on the KCL.2 back panel to ON.

Cold (Local) Installation Procedure D-1

Appendix D Software Download MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Downloading Procedure - MX-2100 with Single KCL.2

1. Remove the card or cover from the MX-2100 option slot.
2. Turn MX-2100 on, and wait until LD3 - green LED, on the KCL.2 module turns
off.
3. Set DIP switch 3 on the KCL.2 back panel to OFF, then set it to ON and then
back to OFF. This is needed to prevent erasing the KCL.2 software in case you
mistakenly turn the power on while DIP switch 3 is set to ON.
4. Wait until the TST LED on the KCL.2 back panel is on and the ALM LED on
the KCL.2 back panel is flashing. Now the Flash memory is erased.

Note If a fault occurs during the erase process, the red ALM indicator turns on. In this
case, turn the MX-2100 off, and start the procedure again with DIP switch 3 ON.

5. Connect the serial port of the PC to the Supervisory Port 9-pin connector of
the KCL.2 module (designated CONTROL on the panel). Use a standard
straight communication cable.
6. Run the [Link] program. After the program starts, select the option C, and
configure the PC for downloading as follows:
Select the option P, and then select the PC serial port, COM1 or COM2,
which is connected to the KCL.2 module.
Press ESC.
Select the option F and type [Link] as the file name.
Press ESC.

7. Start sending the file by selecting the option S. The software file is sent to the
MX-2100. You can monitor the progress of file transmission on the PC as the
software is being sent to the MX-2100. The TST LED and the ALM LED of the
KCL.2 module is flashing, while data transfer proceeds normally.
Note
If a fault occurs during file sending, the red ALM indicator of the KCL.2 module
turns on. In this case, turn the MX-2100 off, and start the procedure again with
DIP switch 3 ON.

8. Wait until the sending process has been successfully completed.

9. Quit the [Link] program (select the option Q).
10. Turn off MX-2100 and set DIP switch 3 on the KCL.2 module to OFF. The
new compressed software is loaded into the module Flash.
11. Turn ON MX-2100. The TST indicator flashes during decompression. After the
decompression process is completed, the configuration is preserved and the
software starts running.

D-2 Cold (Local) Installation Procedure

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Software Download

D.3 Warm Installation (Upgrading) Procedure -

Windows-Based Stations
You can upgrade the KCL.2 software during run time using a PC or a workstation
with a TFTP Client application (there is no need to turn off MX-2100).
Preparations
1. Run Windows.
2. Copy the distribution file, [Link] to the desired directory of the PC
used as a management station.
3. Make sure the network management station can communicate with the
MX-2100.
4. When downloading a remote MX-2100, it is necessary to define the
downloading station as a manager on the ASCII terminal using the DEF
MANAGER command (refer to the DEF MANAGER command in the Command
Set Description appendix). This command is available with version 2.0 and up.
Downloading Procedure
1. Run the TFTP application.
2. Set the parameter values in the TFTP client software as follows:
Time-out = 20 sec
Total Retransmission = 200 sec (if available)
Host = IP address of MX-2100
Remote File = [Link]
Local File = Enter full path for the [Link] file
Transfer Mode = Binary
3. When done, press the OK button.
4. The file [Link] is now sent to MX-2100. The TFTP window displays the
number of bytes already sent. If a fault occurs, the transfer stops before the
total number of bytes of the [Link] file is transferred and a TIME OUT
error message is displayed. The KCL.2 resets after a failed download, so wait at
least 2-3 minutes before restarting. Restart by displaying the TRANSFER menu.
5. After the transfer is successfully completed, the KCL.2 module is automatically
reset. Due to module resetting, the new software is decompressed and loaded
into the module RAM.
Note
The red TST indicator flashes during decompression.

Warm Installation (Upgrading) Procedure - Windows-Based Stations D-3

Appendix D Software Download MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

D-4 Warm Installation (Upgrading) Procedure - Windows-Based Stations

 Appendix E
Configuration Parameters

E.1 General
This appendix lists the various parameters that can be used to configure the
MX-2100.
System Configuration Parameters
The following table lists the available system configuration parameters that can be
configured from the front panel, and their functions. The table also lists the
parameter values included in the MX-2100 default configuration. Refer to the
Operation chapter for information on additional system parameters.

Table E-1. System Parameters

Designation Function Values

CLK_MASTER Selects the master timing INT - Internal oscillator
reference for the main link
i:j - Locked to the external clock received
transmit path.
from the indicated data channel. This
This parameter is displayed only
selection is available only when the MX-2100
when the main link interface is
enclosure includes I/O modules with
DCE or external DCE (E-DCE),
synchronous data channels which support the
which are available only with the
DTE2 timing mode, e.g., KLS.1, KHS.1,
KML.1, KML.2, KML.3 KML.4 and
modules with ISDN interface, e.g., KHS.U or
KML.F modules using the TE
KVF.4/S0, or modules with T1 or E1 interface,
mode. It is not displayed when a
e.g., KVF.5. Only channels of such modules
KML.5, KML.6, KML.7, KML.8,
are available for selection on the LCD. Note
KML.10 module is installed.
that the selected channel must actually use a
timing mode which supports the connection
of an external timing reference, e.g., the
DTE2 mode for synchronous data channels,
the TE or LT mode for ISDN channels, or
loopback timing for T1 or E1 interfaces). A is
the MX-2100 I/O slot number (1 through 12).
B is the module channel number, 1 or 2.
Default: INT

General E-1
Appendix E Configuration Parameters MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table E-1. System Parameters (Cont.)

Designation Function Values

CLK_FBACK Selects the alternate (fallback) NONE - No fallback source is used
timing reference for the main link
i:j - Same selections as for CLK_MASTER
transmit path, to be used in case
the master reference fails.
This parameter is displayed under Default: NONE
the same conditions the
CLK_MASTER parameter is
displayed.
Note:
If you selected one of the
channels as main source, do not
select the same channel as
fallback source.
DWLD_BW_A Controls the use of the in-band NO - Disables the in-band management
management channel A channel
In-band management channel data rate:
0.8 kbps
Controls the use of the in-band
DWLD_BW_B 1.6 kbps
management channel B
2.4 kbps
3.2 kbps
4.8 kbps
9.6 kbps
19.2 kbps

Default: NO
ML_MODE Controls the main link operating SINGLE - single main link operation
mode REDUND - the two KML modules operate as
a redundant pair
DUAL_LNK - the two KML modules provide
two independent links
PRI_BMP - the two KML modules provide
two parallel links with priority bumping
SW_BACK - switched backup mode: one of
the KML modules provides the main link and
the other module provides a switched backup
link
SINGLE_SW - the single main link is in switch
mode
DUAL_SW - the two KML modules are in
switch mode
SINGLE&SW - one KML module is in switch
mode, and the other is in single mode
Default: SINGLE

E-2 General
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix E Configuration Parameters

Table E-1. System Parameters (Cont.)

Designation Function Values

ACTIVE_ML When redundancy is enabled, AUTO - Automatic selection of active module
allows the selection of the active
ML-A - Module KML-A is selected
KML module
(redundancy switching is overridden)
ML-B - Module KML-B is selected
(redundancy switching is overridden)
Default: AUTO. In this case, upon power-up,
the KML-A module is selected as default if
both KML modules are installed and operating
normally

Main Link Configuration Parameters

The following table lists the available main link parameters that can be configured
from the front panel, and their functions. The table also lists the parameter values
included in the MX-2100 default configuration.
The available parameters depend on the type of main link module installed in the
MX-2100 enclosure (for a complete description of all the configuration parameters
of main link modules, including the parameters that can be configured only
through the supervision port, refer to the corresponding main link module
Installation and Operation manual).
Note that when two main link modules of the same type are installed in the
MX-2100 enclosure, the selected parameter values are used by both KML
modules; parameters used by modules serving only for backup may differ.

General E-3
Appendix E Configuration Parameters MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table E-2. Main Link Parameters

Designation Function Values

SPEED Determines the main link rate. Data rate in kbps:
9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 32, 48, 56, 64, 128,
The supported data rates depend on
192, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, 1536
the main link module type (refer to
the corresponding module
Installation and Operation Manual).
Default: 64
TIMING Determines the system timing mode. KML.1, KML.2, KML.3 and KML.4:
DTE - DTE timing
For the modules KML.1 through
KML.4, also selects the main link DCE - DCE timing
interface type.
E-DCE - External DCE timing
Default: DTE
KML.5 and KML.6:
INT - Internal timing
LBT - loopback timing
KML.7, KML.8 and KML.F:
INT - Internal timing
LBT - loopback timing
DCE - DCE timing
BUFFER_SIZE Determines the size of the main link 8 - ±8 bits
receive buffer used in the DTE and
256 - ±256 bits, recommended for use on
E-DCE modes (supported by modules
satellite links
KML.1 through KML.6 only).
This parameter is not displayed when
the main link interface is DCE. Default: 8
INTERFACE Displays the physical interface V.35 - V.35 interface
selected by means of an adapter
X.21 - X.21 interface
cable for the KML.3 module.
DSR&CTS Determines the handling of the DSR EXT - When DSR and/or CTS signals are
and CTS signals for the modules OFF, the transmit data line is held at
KML.1, KML.2 and KML.3. MARK.
When these signals are
INT - The states of the external DSR
logically OFF, the transmit data line
and/or CTS signals are disregarded; and
would be held to MARK.
both signals are assumed to be
continuously ON (the transmit data is then
not held to MARK when the state of either
external line is OFF)
Default: INT

E-4 General
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix E Configuration Parameters

Table E-2. Main Link Parameters (Cont.)

Designation Function Values

I TS CODE Selects the code transmitted to fill The available selections are 00 to FF (hexa)
idle (empty) time slots in the frames
transmitted on the T1 or E1 line by Default: 00 for the KML.7,
the KML.7 and KML.8 modules. 3F for the KML.8
FRAME Selects the multiframing mode for the KML.7 module:
KML.7 and KML.8 modules. D4(SF) - 12 frames per multiframe
ESF - 24 frames per multiframe
Default: SF
KML.8 module:
G732N - 2 frames per multiframe
G732S - 16 frames per multiframe
Default: G732N
SYNC Selects the frame synchronization CCITT - Complies with ITU-T Rec. G.732
algorithm used by the KML.7 and (on the KML.8 module only)
KML.8 modules, and thus effects the
62411 - As required by AT&T TR-62411
time required to return to normal
(after 10 seconds)
operation after local loss of
synchronization. FAST - After 1 second
Default: FAST
CRC-4 Enables the generation of check bits NO - CRC-4 option disabled
in accordance with the CRC-4
YES - CRC-4 option enabled
polynomial specified by ITU-T Rec.
G.704 for the frames transmitted on
the E1 line, and the checking of the
check bits carried by the received E1
frames. This parameter is available
only on the KML.8 module. Default: NO
CODE Selects the line coding method used TRAN - Transparent (AMI) coding, no
for zero suppression on the T1 link of processing for zero suppression
the KML.7 module. B7ZS - B7ZS coding
B8ZS - B8ZS coding
Note: Clear channel capability is available
only with B8ZS coding.
Default: B8ZS
FUNCTION Displays the function of the link On KML.7 module only:
interface of the KML.7 and KML.8 DSU - The module has a DSU link
modules. interface
CSU - The module has a CSU link
interface
On KML.8 module only:
DSU - The module has an LTU link
interface

General E-5
Appendix E Configuration Parameters MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table E-2. Main Link Parameters (Cont.)

Designation Function Values

MASK Controls the transmit signal For link interfaces without CSU:
characteristics of the KML.7 module. The following selections indicate the line
The displayed options depend on the length in feet:
link interface hardware (with or
Length (ft) Display
without CSU):
0-133 000 -
– When the link interface does not 133-266 133 -
include a CSU, the transmit signal 266-399 266 -
mask can be selected in accordance 399-533 399 -
with the transmit line length, to meet 533-655 533 -
DSX-1 requirements, as specified by FCC68A Compliance with
AT&T CB-119, or set for compliance FCC Rules Part 68A
with FCC Rules Part 68A.
Default: 0-133
– When the link interface includes a For link interfaces with CSU:
CSU, the transmit signal can be
0 - No attenuation
attenuated by 7.5, 15, or 22.5 dB, to
meet the requirements of FCC Rules 7.5 - Attenuation of 7.5 dB relative to the
Part 68A. nominal transmit level
15 - Attenuation of 15 dB relative to the
nominal transmit level
22.5 - Attenuation of 22.5 dB relative to
the nominal transmit level
Default: 0
MODE Selects the operating mode of the SWITCHED - Operation with ISDN switch
KML.10 module.
LEASED - Operation over leased lines
Default: LEASED
ISDN Selects the service mode for KML.10 5ESS_POINT_TO_POINT - AT&T 4ESS
STANDARD modules. and 5ESS switches, point-to-point service
5ESS_MULTIPOINT - AT&T 4ESS and
5ESS switches, multipoint service
DMS-100 - Northern Telecom DMS-100
switch
NATIONAL-ISDN1 - Bellcore NI1 switch
EURO_ISDN - ETSI Euro-ISDN NET3
NTT_ISDN - NTT Japanese ISDN
implementation
Default: EURO_ISDN
B CH Selects the B-channel used by B1 - B1 channel
KML.10 modules to carry the user's
B2 - B2 channel
data when the main link rate is 64
kbps. Default: B1

E-6 General
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix E Configuration Parameters

Supervisory Port Configuration Parameters

Table E-3 lists the available supervisory port configuration parameters that can be
configured from the front panel, and their functions. The table also lists the
parameter values included in the MX-2100 default configuration.

Table E-3. Supervisory Port Parameters

Designation Function Values

SPEED Selects supervisory port data rate Supervisory port data rate in kbps:
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600
AUTO - Autobaud operation. The MX-2100
automatically identifies the data rate applied to
its supervisory port. To enable positive
identification, the transmission must start with
three consecutive Carriage Returns. Do not
select AUTO when connecting to an SNMP
network management station.
Default: 9600
DATA Selects the number of data bits in the 7 or 8 data bits.
word format
Default: 8
PARITY Controls the use of parity ODD - Odd parity
EVEN - Even parity
NONE - Parity disabled (only with 8 data bits)
Default: NONE
INTERFACE Selects supervisory port interface DCE - The MX-2100 appears as a DCE for the
supervision terminal
DTE - The MX-2100 operates as a DTE, for
connection via modem to the supervision
terminal. A cross-over cable must be used
(Appendix A).
Default: DCE
CTS Selects if the CTS line is always active =RTS
or if it follows the RTS line
ON
Default: ON
DCD_DEL Indicates time delay between In msec:
DCD=ON and the sending of data 0, 10, 50, 100, 200, 300
Default: 0 msec
DSR Selects if the DSR line is continuously ON
ON or if it tracks the DTR line
=DTR
Default: ON

General E-7
Appendix E Configuration Parameters MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table E-3. Supervisory Port Parameters (Cont.)

Designation Function Values

POP_ALARM Controls the automatic display of NO
alarms on the terminal
YES
Default: NO
PWD Controls password protection NO
YES
Default: NO
LOG_OFF Selects idle disconnect time NO
10
MIN: 10
Default: NO
AUXILIARY_ Selects auxiliary device NMS_SLIP
DEVICE
AGENT_SLIP
TERMINAL
Default: TERMINAL

E-8 General
 Appendix F
Command Set Description

F.1 General
This appendix describes the MX-2100 commands. The commands are listed in
alphabetical order. The description includes command format, use, and options.
The following notation conventions are used:
[ ] square brackets enclose an optional entry/parameter
{ } braces enclose a list of entries/parameters from which one must
be selected
<ENTER> indicates the pressing of the ENTER key
<SP> indicates the pressing of the space bar
i indicates an I/O slot number
OP indicates the options slot
j indicates the channel number within the selected I/O slot.

Note The ML-B option is for MX-2100 only.

Some commands may include fields not be relevant for MX-2104. For example, the
ML-B field in the DSP ST SYS command.

General F-1
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

F.2 Commands
The following are the MX-2100 commands.
BYE

Purpose
Return control to the MX-2100 front panel when TELNET session is terminated.

Format
BYE

Use
• Type:
BYE <ENTER>
Note If this command is not used, you will need to wait 10 minutes to start new TELNET
session.

CLR ALM

Purpose
Clear the alarm buffer.

Format
CLR ALM [LOC] [/A]

Use
1. To clear only the event alarms on the local MX-2100, type:
CLR ALM LOC <ENTER> or CLR ALM <ENTER>
To clear all the alarms on the local MX-2100, type:
CLR ALM /A <ENTER> or CLR ALM LOC /A <ENTER>
2. After the desired parameter values are selected, press ENTER to end.
MX-2100 will display the time and date, followed by the MX-2100 prompt.

F-2 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

CLR LOOP

Purpose
Deactivate the specified user-initiated test or loop. Refer to the Diagnostics chapter
for a description of the available tests.

Format
CLR LOOP [looptype] { [ML A] [ML B] [i:j] }
or
CLR LP [looptype] { [ML A] [ML B] [i:j] }

Use
1. To deactivate a specific type of loop on main link A, type:
CLR LOOP L ML A <ENTER> or CLR LP L ML A <ENTER>
CLR LOOP R ML A <ENTER> or CLR LP R ML A <ENTER>
CLR LOOP V54.2 ML A <ENTER> or CLR LP V54.2 ML A <ENTER>
CLR LOOP V54.3 ML A <ENTER> or CLR LP V54.3 ML A <ENTER>

CLR LOOP L ML <ENTER> or CLR LP L ML <ENTER>

CLR LOOP R ML <ENTER> or CLR LP R ML <ENTER>
CLR LOOP V54.2 ML <ENTER> or CLR LP V-54.2 ML <ENTER>
CLR LOOP V54.3 ML <ENTER> or CLR LP V-54.3 ML <ENTER>

Note
For main link A, it is not necessary to specify the link, e.g., you can type
CLR LOOP L ML <ENTER>
instead of
CLR LOOP L ML A <ENTER>.

2. To deactivate a specific type of loop on main link B, type:

CLR LOOP L ML B <ENTER> or CLR LP L ML B <ENTER>
CLR LOOP R ML B <ENTER> or CLR LP R ML B <ENTER>
CLR LOOP V54.2 ML B <ENTER> or CLR LP V54.2 ML B <ENTER>
CLR LOOP V54.3 ML B <ENTER> or CLR LP V54.3 ML B <ENTER>
3. To deactivate all the loops of a certain main link, type:
For main link A: CLR LP ML A <ENTER> or CLR LOOP ML A <ENTER>
For main link B: CLR LP ML B <ENTER> or CLR LOOP ML B <ENTER>
4. To deactivate a specific type of channel loop or test, type:
CLR LOOP L i:j <ENTER> or CLR LP L i:j <ENTER>
CLR LOOP R i:j <ENTER> or CLR LP R i:j <ENTER>
CLR LOOP PRBS_INJ i:j <ENTER> or CLR LP PRBS_INJ i:j <ENTER> (data channel only)
CLR LOOP TONE_INJ i:j <ENTER> or CLR LP TONE_INJ i:j <ENTER> (voice channel only)
CLR LOOP BERT i:j <ENTER> or CLR LP BERT i:j <ENTER> (data channel only)

Commands F-3
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Note
If the desired module is a module for which it is not possible to loops or tests on a
specific channel, e.g., a KLS.2 module, type an asterisk * instead of the channel
number, B.

5. To deactivate all the channel loop and tests, type:

CLR LOOP i:j <ENTER> or CLR LP i:j <ENTER>
Use the asterisk under the conditions explained above.
You will see the time and date, followed by the MX-2100 prompt.
CLR MONITOR

Purpose
Deactivate the monitoring of an I/O module channel.

Format
CLR MONITOR or CLR M

Use
• To deactivate the monitoring of the currently selected I/O channel, type:

CLR MONITOR <ENTER> or CLR M <ENTER>

You will see the time and date, followed by the MX-2100 prompt.
CONNECT SWITCH

Purpose
Dials and connects to the remote MX-2100 from the local MX-2100’s main link
over the ISDN switch line when the following is true:
• The MX-2100’s main link is configured to manual operation and switch mode
(refer to DEF ML command).
• The system is in switch mode (refer to DEF SYS command).

The link will be connected until the DISCONNECT SWITCH command is activated
or until reset. Refer to DISCONNECT SWITCH on page F-32.

Format
CONNECT SWITCH [A] [B]

Use
• Type:
CONNECT SWITCH A <ENTER>
or
CONNECT SWITCH B <ENTER>

F-4 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Note
Use of this command is dependant on the configuration of the local MX-2100. The
main link (A or B) must be attached to a KML.10 card whose parameters (set by the
command DEF ML) are:
- main_link_mode=SWITCH
- switch_mode=MANUAL
and the main link is ‘master ’in_num_mode=NONE (set by the command DEF ML
CALL).

Note
Before using this command be sure that the calling numbers are initiated (refer to
the command DEF ML CALL).
The link will remain connected until the use of the command DISCONNECT
SWITCH or MX-2100 is reset.

DATE

Purpose
Set the date for the MX-2100 internal real-time clock.

Format
DATE

Use
1. To set the date, type:
DATE <ENTER>
MX-2100 sends the date entry form:
Date
Day = 06
Month = 06
Year = 2000

2. Bring the cursor to the first field to be changed by pressing ENTER.

3. To change the selected field, press F to increase and B to decrease the
displayed value.
When done, press ENTER to move to the next field.
4. To end, press ENTER after the YEAR field.
MX-2100 will display the time and date fields (note that the date has
changed), followed by the MX-2100 prompt. The day of the week is
automatically stamped.

Commands F-5
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

DEF AGENDA

Purpose
Define the daily schedule of utilization of the switched backup mode. Separate
schedules can be defined for each day of week. Each 24-hour schedule includes
up to four independent periods, defined by the starting and ending time (hour and
minutes). For each period, you can enable or disable the use of a switched backup
link.

Format
DEF AGENDA [day]
where
day stands for SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI or SAT.

Use
1. To select the schedule for a specific day, e.g., for Sunday, type:
DEF AGENDA SUN <ENTER>
The first part of the daily schedule parameters data form is displayed. A
typical data form is shown below:
[——Zone 1——] [——Zone 2——] [——Zone 3——] [——Zone 4——]
START END/START END/START END/START END
00:00 hh:mm hh:mm hh:mm 24:00

where:
hh - hour (00 through 23)
mm - minutes (00 through 59)
2. Change parameters as follows:
Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by
pressing the space bar.
Change the selected field by pressing F or B to scroll among the
available selections. When the desired selection is displayed, press the
space bar to move to the next field.

3. After the desired parameter values are selected, press ENTER to end.
MX-2100 will display the time and date fields, followed by the MX-2100
prompt.
4. After the last change, press ENTER.
The second line of the data form, used to control the use of the switched
backup link, is displayed:
[——Zone 1——] [——Zone 2——] [——Zone 3——] [——Zone 4——]
START END/START END/START END/START END
00:00 hh:mm hh:mm hh:mm 24:00
BACKUP: YES YES NO YES

F-6 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

5. Use the procedure described above to select the desired value for each
period:
YES - The use of the switched backup link is allowed.
NO - The use of the switched backup link is not allowed.

6. After the desired parameter values are selected, press ENTER to end.
MX-2100 will display the time and date fields, followed by the MX-2100
prompt.
DEF AGENT

Purpose
Display and modify the current SNMP agent parameters.
Note
To enable SNMP and TELNET management, it is necessary to define all the
parameters.

Format
DEF AGENT

Use
1. Type:
DEF AGENT <ENTER>
MX-2100 displays the following SNMP data form:
OLD AGENT PARAMETERS
--------------------
IP ADDRESS IS : = [Link]
SUBNET MASK IS : = [Link]
DEFAULT GATEWAY IS : = [Link]
READ COMMUNITY IS : = public
WRITE COMMUNITY IS : = private
TRAP COMMUNITY IS : = public
TELNET_APATHY_TIME 10 MIN
IP_ADDRESS [Link]
SUBNET MASK [Link]
DEFAULT GATEWAY [Link]
SNMP READ COMMUNITY
SNMP WRITE COMMUNITY
SNMP TRAP COMMUNITY
where X stands for the digits of the current IP address, Subnet Mask and
Default Gateway.

2. Change a parameter by placing the cursor on the desired field, delete the
current value, and type the new value. The only exception is
TELNET_APATHY_TIME, which is selected by pressing the F or B keys.
Remember that community names are case-sensitive.

Commands F-7
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

3. Continue until all the parameters are defined, and then press ENTER to end.
A typical display, as seen after all the parameters are selected, is shown
below:
CURRENT AGENT PARAMETERS
--------------------
IP ADDRESS IS : = [Link]
SUBNET MASK IS : = [Link]
DEFAULT GATEWAY IS : = [Link]
READ COMMUNITY IS : = public
WRITE COMMUNITY IS : = private
TRAP COMMUNITY IS : = public
where X stands for the digits for the current IP address, Subnet Mask and
Default Gateway.

The agent parameters displayed on the data form, and their range of values, are as
follows:
• TELNET_APATHY_TIME - Press the F or B key to select the time (in minutes)
after which a TELNET connection will automatically be terminated if no
incoming activity is detected. The available values are 10MIN, 15MIN and
20MIN.
• IP_ADDRESS - Type the IP address assigned to the SNMP agent in the
dotted-quad form (four groups of digits ranging 0 through 255, separated by
periods).
• SUBNET MASK - Type in the subnet mask in the dotted-quad format. The
mask consists of four groups of digits in the range of 1 through 255, separated
by periods. The net section must consist of 1’s.
• DEFAULT GATEWAY - Type in the IP address assigned to the DXC SNMP
agent in the dotted-quad format (four groups of digits in the range of 0 through
255, separated by periods).
• READ COMMUNITY - Type the name of the SNMP community that has
read-only authorization. The SNMP agent will accept only getRequest and
getNextRequest commands from management stations using that
community. You may enter up to seven alphanumeric characters.
• WRITE COMMUNITY - Type the name of the SNMP community that has
read-write authorization. The SNMP agent will also accept getRequest
commands from management stations using that community. You may enter
up to seven alphanumeric characters.
• TRAP COMMUNITY - Type the name of the SNMP community to which the
SNMP agent will send traps. You may enter up to seven alphanumeric
characters.

F-8 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

DEF ALM DEBOUNCE

Purpose
Define the debounce time (in seconds) for each alarm code, or mask the alarm.
The debounce time is the amount of time allowed for the alarm code to settle into
the “on” state. If the alarm reaches the “on” state during the debounce time, the
alarm string with the debounce number is reported to the user.

Format
DEF ALM DEBOUNCE

Use
1. Type:
DEF ALM DEBOUNCE
MX-2100 displays the following:
ALARM NUMBER (1 to 86) =

2. Enter the number of alarm codes you want to change and press ENTER.
MX-2100 displays the following:
ALARM DEBOUNCE (0 to 255) =

3. Enter the debounce number. The debounce number can be one of the
following:
0 - Default of debounce, e.g. after initiate database
255 - Mask the alarm and do not report to the user
1 to 254 - Debounce (in seconds).

4. Press ENTER.
The alarm string with debounce number will display.
DEF CALL

Purpose
Define the call-out parameters for the MX-2100 dial-out port (connector
CONTROL-DTE). The call-out function is enabled by means of the DEF DP port.
The specified call-out parameters are used by MX-2100 to build the call command
that is sent to the dial-out modem. The modem connected to the CONTROL-DTE
connector must be set up as follows (for convenience, the Hayes commands
required to select the specified parameters are listed in brackets):
• Auto-answer mode (AT S0=1)
• Call set up in response to the CONNECT string (AT X0)
• No echo (AT E0)
• Verbose mode (no codes, e.g., CONNECT string instead of 0) (AT V1).

Commands F-9
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Format
DEF CALL

Use
1. To define the MX-2100 call-out parameters, type:
DEF CALL <ENTER>
You will see the first page of the call-out parameters data form. A typical
display is shown below.
NUM_OF_RETRIES WAIT_FOR_CONNECT DIAL_MODE ALT_NUM_MODE
0 60SEC TONE NO

2. Change the parameter values as follows:

Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by
pressing the space bar.
To change the selected field, press F or B to scroll among the available
selections.
When the desired selection is displayed, press the space bar to move to
the next field.
The call-out parameters are displayed on the first page of the data form.
Call-out parameters, their functions and their range of values, are shown in
Table F-1.

Table F-1. Call-out Parameters

Designation Function Values

NUM_OF_RETRIES Controls the number of dialing tries, and 0 - no redialing attempts are made in case
applies to both the primary and the alternate the call is not established on the first
numbers. attempt.

• If the call is not established after dialing 1 through 8 - in case the call is not
the primary directory number the established on the first attempt, MX-2100
specified number of times, MX-2100 will redial the specified number of times.
attempts to establish the call by dialing
the alternate directory number
(provided the use of an alternate
number is enabled by means of the
ALT_NUM_MODE parameter).
• If the call cannot be established within
the specified number of redialing
attempts on neither of the two
directory numbers, MX-2100 stops the
call attempts. When a new alarm
report must be sent, the call attempts
are started again.
The user is notified that the call attempts failed
by a message recorded in the alarm buffer
(separate messages are provided for each
directory number).

F-10 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Table F-1. Call-out Parameters (Cont.)

Designation Function Values

WAIT_FOR_CONNECT Specifies the time MX-2100 will wait for an 30, 45 or 60 seconds
answer after each dialing attempt. If the called
station does not answer within the specified
time, MX-2100 disconnects. If additional call
attempts are allowed, MX-2100 will redial
immediately after disconnecting.
DIAL_MODE Selects the dialing mode. TONE - The modem is instructed to use
DTMF dialing.
The appropriate dialing mode depends on the
dialing mode supported by the telephone PULSE - The modem is instructed to use
network. pulse dialing.
ALT_NUM_MODE This parameter is used to control the use of an NO - no alternate number. In this case,
alternate number. The alternate number is MX-2100 stops the call attempts after the
dialed used after the specified number of call specified number of call attempts on the
attempts on the primary number failed. primary number failed.
YES - The use of an alternate number is
enabled.

3. When done, press ENTER.

The second page of the call-out parameters data form is displayed. A
typical display is shown below:
NEW PRIMARY NUMBER [MAX 20 CHARS] =
CURRENT PRIMARY NUMBER = 'primary number'

The second page is used to enter a new primary directory number, and the
second row displays the current primary directory number. The directory
number can include up to 20 digits, including the * and # symbols.
4. After entering the desired directory number, press ENTER:
If the ALT_NUM_MODE parameter is NO (no alternate number),
MX-2100 will display the TIME and DATE fields, followed by the
MX-2100 prompt.
If the ALT_NUM_MODE parameter is YES, you will see the third page
of the call-out parameters data form, used to enter a new alternate
directory number. A typical display is shown below.

NEW ALTERNATE NUMBER [MAX 20 CHARS] =

CURRENT ALTERNATE NUMBER = 'alternate number'

5. After entering the desired directory number, press ENTER to end.

Commands F-11
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

DEF CH

Purpose
Define the configuration parameters of a module or module channel. Refer to the
relevant module Installation and Operation Manual for a complete listing of the
available parameters, and for typical channel parameter data forms for each
module.

Format
DEF CH {[i:j] [i:*]}

Use
1. To define the parameters of a specific module channel, type:
DEF CH i:j <ENTER>
where i is either OP (to select the options slot) or a number in the range of 1
through 12, and j depends on the number of configurable channels of the
module installed in the specified slot.
2. To define the parameters of all the module channels, type:
DEF CH i:* <ENTER>
The data form of the selected module or module channel is displayed. The
form presents the current parameter values as defaults.
3. Change the parameters as follows:
Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by
pressing the space bar.
To change the selected field, press F or B to scroll among the available
selections. When the desired selection is displayed, press the space bar
to move to the next field.

4. After the desired parameter values are selected, press ENTER to end.
MX-2100 displays the time and date fields, followed by the MX-2100
prompt.
DEF CON

Purpose
Define the main link to be used by each I/O module.
The command is relevant only for dual-link configurations and switch mode.
When using the priority bumping or switched backup mode, this command is also
used to define the priority of each module.

Format
DEF CON

F-12 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Use
1. Type:
DEF CON <ENTER>
The main link selection screen is displayed. The screen lists the I/O slots
(including the options slot) and the main link currently used by each I/O
slot. A typical display is shown below:
[Link] con
I/O GROUP OPERATED_HIGHWAY PB[A–>B] PB[B–>A] SWITCH
============================================================================
OP ALL ML-A N/A N/A N/A
1 ALL ML-B N/A N/A N/A
2 ALL ML-A N/A N/A N/A
3 ALL ML-A N/A N/A N/A
4 ALL ML-B N/A N/A N/A
5 ALL ML-B N/A N/A N/A
6 ALL ML-A N/A N/A N/A
7 ALL ML-A N/A N/A N/A
8 ALL ML-A N/A N/A N/A
9 ALL ML-A N/A N/A N/A
10 ALL ML-A N/A N/A N/A
11 ALL ML-A N/A N/A N/A
12 ALL ML-A N/A N/A N/A
Checking Frame Structure…
Updating Frame Structure…

2. Use the space bar to move the cursor to the desired slot number, and press the
F or B key to change the main link used by this I/O slot.
If priority bumping is used, the third row shows the priority assigned to
each module when a flip occurs from main link A to main link B.
If priority bumping and switched backup are disabled, this row shows N/A
for all the I/O slots.
3. Use the space bar and the F and B keys to change the priorities as necessary.
A fourth row appears, showing the priorities for flips from main link B to
main link A.
If the two main links operate at the same data rate or the switched
backup mode is used, MX-2100 automatically sets the same priorities
for flips in either direction. Then this line shows N/A for all the I/O slots.
If the data rates of the two main links are different and the priority
bumping mode is used, you can select the priorities for each I/O slot
using the same procedure as above.

Commands F-13
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

4. Use the space bar and the F and B keys to change the priorities as necessary.
A fifth row appears, showing the priorities for automatic switch mode
calling with the KML.10 card.
The HIGH priority enables MX-2100 to make the I/O connection over
the ISDN link.
− The I/O card must be one of the cards that can trigger the
connection and must be set as follows:
- The system mode is SWITCH
- The main link mode is SWITCH
- Switch_mode is AUTO.

5. When the desired selections are obtained for all the I/O slots, press ENTER.
Note
If system mode is not SWITCH, the SWITCH line show N/A for all the I/O slots.

DEF DB FLIP

Purpose
Define the times of day (hour and minutes) for switching from one database to the
other, or cancel this function.
This command can be used only when an alternate database has already been
defined.

Format
DEF DB FLIP

Use
1. Type:
DEF DB FLIP <ENTER>
The first line of the database flip time definition screen is displayed. A
typical display is shown below:
HH:MM
FLIP TIME TO DATABASE 1 : 00:00
where:
HH – the desired flipping hour (00 through 23), or NA to disable the
switching
MM – the desired flipping minute (00 through 59), or NA to disable the
switching.

F-14 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

2. Change parameters as follows:

Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by
pressing the space bar.
To change the selected field, press F or B to scroll among the available
selections. When the desired selection is displayed, press the space bar
to move to the next field.

3. After the desired parameter values are selected, press ENTER

The second line of the database flip time definition screen is displayed:
HH:MM
FLIP TIME TO DATABASE 2 : 00:00

4. Define the second flipping time.

Note
To disable the switching between the two databases, select NA for all the four
fields. You should always select NA if the switched backup database is ALTERNATE
(see DEF ML CALL command).

5. After the desired values are selected, press ENTER key to end.
MX-2100 displays the time and date fields, followed by the MX-2100
prompt.
DEF DP

Purpose
Define the communication parameters of the dial-out port.
The communication parameters depend on the KCL.2 module version:
• For KCL.2 modules with RS-232 interfaces, this command is used to define the
communication parameters of the dial-out port, select its operating mode
(network management access port or dial-out), and when applicable, control
the use of the call-out function. The communication parameters of the dial-out
port can be different from the communication parameters of the CONTROL
port, which are selected by means of the DEF SP command.
• For KCL.2 modules with Ethernet interfaces, there is only the
ROUTING_PROTOCOL field.

Format
DEF DP

Commands F-15
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Use
1. Type:
DEF DP <ENTER>
If the KCL.2 module has an Ethernet interface, the following is displayed:
ROUTING_PROTOCOL
NONE
where NONE is the default value.
If the KCL.2 module has RS-232 interfaces, the following is displayed:
SPEED DATA PARITY CALL_OUT_MODE
9600 8 NONE NO
where the parameter values are the default values.

2. Change the parameter values as follows:

Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by
pressing the space bar.
To change the selected field, press F or B to scroll among the available
selections.
When the desired selection is displayed, press the space bar to move to
the next field.
• When done, press ENTER.
The second line of parameters is displayed. The following is a typical
display:
LOG_OFF AUXILIARY_DEVICE ROUTING_PROTOCOL
NO NMS_SLIP NONE

Table F-2 shows the dial-out parameters and their values.

Table F-2. Dial-out Parameters

Designation Function Values

SPEED Selects the dial-out port data rate. 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 and
57600 bps
DATA Selects the number of data bits in the 7 or 8 data bits
dial-out port word format:
PARITY Controls the use of parity. ODD - Odd parity
ODD - Odd parity
EVEN - Even parity
NO - Parity disabled (only available with 8 data bits).
CALL_OUT_MODE Controls the use of the call-out NO - Call-out function is disabled.
function:
YES - MX-2100 will initiate a call after each new
alarm.

F-16 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Table F-2. Dial-out Parameters (Cont.)

Designation Function Values

LOG-OFF Control the idle disconnect time. NO - Automatic session disconnect disabled.
10_min - Automatic disconnection after 10 minutes,
if no input data is received by the dial-out port.
AUXILIARY DEVICE Selects the management mode NMS SLIP - The dial-out port connects to an SNMP
supported by the dial-out port: management station and/or TELNET host using the
SLIP protocol.
AGENT SLIP - The dial-out port is connected to
another agent port using the SLIP protocol.
NMS PPP - Same as NMS SLIP, except the PPP
Note: At any time, only one of the protocol is used.
two ports of the KCL.2 module can be
AGENT PPP - Same as AGENT SLIP, except the PPP
used for management access.
protocol is used.
ROUTING PROTOCOL Controls the transmission of routing NONE - Routing not supported.
tables which allows management
PROPRIET - Routing of management traffic by means
traffic to be routed through the dial-
of the MX-2100 proprietary protocol.
out port:

DEF FRAME

Purpose
Define manually the allocation of bits in the main link frame. This activity is
necessary when a KDI module is used to bypass data between the MX-2100 main
links.
Manual allocation is enabled by means of the DEF SYS command.
The DEF FRAME command must be repeated after each change in the main link
data rate, and/or in the data rate of MX-2100 channels.

Format
DEF FRAME

Use
1. To perform manual bit allocation on the desired main link, type:
DEF FRAME A <ENTER> or DEF FRAME B <ENTER>
A typical DEF FRAME screen is shown below.
SLOT OPERATED_HIGHWAY SIZE DATA START
001 ML-A 013 000
006 ML-A 012 014

Commands F-17
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

The screen displays the current main link used by each module (in
ascending order of slot numbers) and number of main link bits required for
each module. The screen fields are as follows:
OPERATED_HIGHWAY - Displays the main link on which the module
installed in the corresponding slot is allocated bandwidth (this
parameter is selected by means of the DEF CON command).
SIZE - Displays the total number of bits assigned to the module installed
in the corresponding slot (this parameter is determined by the
parameters selected for the corresponding by means of the DEF CH
command).
DATA_START - Displays the number of the first bit in the block of bits
assigned to the module installed in the corresponding slot.

2. You can change the order in which modules are assigned blocks of bits on the
main link. To perform the change, bring the cursor to the desired field and
then scroll using the F and B keys to display the desired number.
Note
Appendix B in the Installation and Operation Manual of the KDI module contains
planning forms to help you in the allocation task.

3. When the allocation is completed, press ENTER.

The supervision terminal will display the time and date fields, followed by
the MX-2100 prompt.
4. To verify the allocation, use the DSP ST FRAME command.
DEF MANAGER LIST

Purpose
Define or modify the network management stations to which the SNMP agent of
MX-2100 sends traps. You can define up to five managers. Each network
management station is defined by entering its IP address and the corresponding
subnet mask.

Format
DEF MANAGER LIST

Use
1. To define a management station, type:
DEF MANAGER LIST <ENTER>
The first line of the managers list data form appears. This is used to define
the IP address of the first management station.
2. Type in the IP address of the desired management station. Use the dotted-
quad format (four groups of digits ranging from 1 through 255, separated by
periods).

F-18 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

3. After filling in the required address, press ENTER.

The next line is displayed.
4. Type in the subnet mask in the dotted-quad format. The mask consists of four
groups of digits ranging from 1 through 255, separated by periods. The net
section must consist of 1’s.
After defining the first management station, a typical data form appears as:
IP ADDRESS 1 IS := [Link]
SUBNET MASK 1 IS := [Link]

5. Press ENTER to proceed to the next lines.

6. Repeat the above procedure to define additional management stations
(2 through 10).
The current list in the following format appears:
CURRENT MANAGERS LIST PARAMETERS
--------------------------------
IP ADDRESS 1 IS := [Link]
SUBNET MASK 1 IS := [Link]
IP ADDRESS 2 IS := [Link]
SUBNET MASK 2 IS := [Link]
IP ADDRESS 3 IS := [Link]
SUBNET MASK 3 IS := [Link]
.
.
.
IP ADDRESS 10 IS := [Link]
SUBNET MASK 10 IS := [Link]

DEF ML

Purpose
Define main link parameters. The applicable parameters depend on the type of
main link module and on the main link mode. Refer to the relevant module
Installation and Operation Manual for a complete listing of the available
parameters, and for typical parameter data forms for each type of main link
module.

Format
DEF ML [A] [B]

Use
1. If the main link mode is SINGLE, type:
DEF ML <ENTER>

Commands F-19
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

This command defines the parameters of the installed module, irrespective of

the enclosure slot in which it is located (slot 3 for main link A, or slot 4 for
main link B).
2. To define the parameters of main link A in a dual-link configuration, type:
DEF ML <ENTER> or DEF ML A <ENTER>
3. To define the parameters of main link B in a dual-link configuration, type:
DEF ML B <ENTER>
The corresponding main link parameters data form is displayed.
4. Make the desired changes, and after the desired parameter values are
selected, press ENTER to end.
MX-2100 displays the time and date fields, followed by the MX-2100
prompt.
DEF ML CALL

Purpose
Define the parameters used to control the setup of a backup dial-up connection
when MX-2100 operates in the switched backup mode. The switched backup
mode is selected by means of the DEF SYS command.
Before using this command, define the configuration parameters of the two main
link modules using the DEF ML command.

Format
DEF ML CALL [A] [B]

Use
1. Type the command corresponding to the KML.10 module installed in slot 3 or
slot 4:
DEF ML CALL <ENTER>
The main link call parameters data form is displayed. The data form
depends on the type of main link module installed in slot 3 or slot 4, the
KML.10 ISDN interface module, or other type of module.
Data Form for KML.10 Modules
A typical US ISDN standard form is shown below:

F-20 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

IN_NUM_MODE CALL_TIME_OUT SW_BACKUP_DB

NONE 45sec ONLINE
ABSTRACT TERMINAL #1
=====================
SUB ADDRESS......:
DIRECTORY NUMBER.:
SPID.............:
TEI NUMBER.......:

ABSTRACT TERMINAL #2
=====================
SUB ADDRESS......:
DIRECTORY NUMBER.:
SPID.............:
TEI NUMBER.......:

FIRST BACKUP SUB ADDRESS [------]

FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER [----------------]

SECOND BACKUP SUB ADDRESS [------]

FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER [----------------]

Note
TEI NUMBER only exists if the TEI MANAGER parameter is set to Static TEI in the
DEF ML B command.

A typical form of other standards (not US ISDN standard) is shown below:

IN_NUM_MODE CALL_TIME_OUT SW_BACKUP_DB
NONE 45sec ONLINE
LOCAL SUB ADDRESS [------]
LOCAL DIRECTORY NUMBER [-------------------]

BACKUP SUB ADDRESS [------]

BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER [----------------]

2. Select the parameter values as follows:

• IN_NUM_MODE - Controls the handling of incoming calls.
For the MX-2100 unit configured as master, always select NONE, to
cause the KML.10 module to reject all incoming calls (the master unit
need only initiate calls).
For the MX-2100 unit configured as slave, you can select ALL, to cause
the KML.10 module to accept incoming calls from all the source
addresses, or LOCAL, to cause the KML.10 module to accept calls only
from the address specified in the BACKUP_CALL_NUMBER field.

Commands F-21
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• CALL TIME OUT - Specifies the maximum time MX-2100 will wait for the
connection of the switched backup link.
If this time expires, MX-2100 aborts the connection attempt, and generates
alarm message 22. The available selections are 30, 45, 60, and 120 seconds.
• SW_BACKUP_DB - Selects the database that will be used to determine the
configuration of the backup link when the switched backup mode is used.
ONLINE - The currently active (on-line) database. The channels to be
carried by the backup link must be assigned HIGH priority, using the
DEF CON command.
ALTERNATE - When switching to the backup link, MX-2100
automatically switches to the alternate database. For this mode, the
alternate database is dedicated only to backup configuration, and must
not be used for other purposes (refer to DEF DB FLIP command).
The channels to be carried by the backup link must be assigned HIGH
priority in the background database, using the DEF CON command.
Also, the DEF SYS, DEF ML B, and DEF ML commands need to be
configured in the background database. After the main link returns to
normal operation and the backup link is disconnected, MX-2100
automatically returns to the main database.
• SUB ADDRESS - Enter the sub address of the local ISDN directory number.
• DIRECTORY NUMBER - Enter the ISDN directory number of the line
connected to the KML.10 module (up to 20 digits).
• SPID - The Service Profile ID. This field is only relevant for US standard.
ATT/5ESS - AT&T 4ESS and 5ESS switches
NT/DMS-100 - Northern Telecom DMS-100 switch
NI1 - Bellcore National - ISDN1.

The ISDN service provider provides the SPID number when you subscribe.
The SPID number represents the type of service provided. The SPID number is
used by the TE interface registration before any calls are established.
• TEI NUMBER - Enter the TEI number (0-63). This parameter is only relevant
for Static TEI Management.
Note
KML.10 only supports basic data 64K unrestricted service.

• BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER - Up to two

numbers that can be used for backup in master configuration, or for Calling
Line Identification (CLI) in slave configuration. Type the numbers in the
appropriate field, and press ENTER. To erase a number, type a minus sign (-)
before the first digit, and press ENTER.

F-22 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

For master configuration - 64K call: Use only the FIRST BACKUP SUB
ADDRESS and BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER as the called number.
For master configuration - 128K call: If both 64K calls are for the same
number (as in the ETSI standard) use only the FIRST BACKUP SUB
ADDRESS and FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER. For the US
standard, if the called number is composed of two abstract terminals,
enter the first called number in the FIRST BACKUP SUB ADDRESS
and FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER and the second in the
SECOND BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and SECOND BACKUP
DIRECTORY NUMBER.
For slave configuration - 64K call: Use only the FIRST BACKUP SUB
ADDRESS and FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER as the calling
number (i.e., the number from which a call is expected).
For slave configuration - 128K calls: If both 64K calls are expected from
a remote KML.10 which is configured with one directory number (as in
the ETSI standard) or has one abstract terminal, use only the FIRST
BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY
NUMBER.
For the US standard, if the calling number is composed of two abstract
terminals, enter the first expected number in the FIRST BACKUP
SUB ADDRESS and FIRST BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER and
the second in the SECOND BACKUP SUB ADDRESS and SECOND
BACKUP DIRECTORY NUMBER.

3. After the desired selections are made, press ENTER to end.

The supervision terminal displays the time and date fields, followed by the
MX-2100 prompt.
Data Form for Other Module Types
A typical data form for a main module which is not a KML.10 module is shown
below:
BACKUP_MODE CALL_TIME_OUT SW_BACKUP_DB
PSTN 60 sec ONLINE

The display fields are as follows:

• BACKUP_MODE - Defines the type of switched channel:
PSTN - Public switched telephone network. In this mode, MX-2100
assumes that analog modems are used.
ISDN - Integrated Services Digital Network. In this mode, MX-2100
assumes direct connection to a B channel of a basic rate ISDN line,
using an external NTU device.
• CALL TIME OUT - Specifies the maximum time MX-2100 will wait for the
connection of the switched backup link. If this time expires, MX-2100 aborts
the connection attempt, and generates alarm message 22. The available
selections are 30, 45, 60, and 120 seconds.

Commands F-23
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• SW_BACKUP_DB - Selects the database that will be used to determine the

configuration of the backup link when the switched backup mode is used.
Refer to the section dealing with the KML.10 module for a description of this
parameter.

DEF NAME

Purpose
Define the MX-2100 node name (up to eight alphanumeric characters).

Format
DEF NAME

Use
4. To define the MX-2100 node name, type:
DEF NAME <ENTER>
MX-2100 displays the node name entry form:
ENTER NODE NAME (MAX 8 CHARACTERS)=
CURRENT NODE NAME = 'name'

5. Type the desired node name, and then press ENTER.

The name appears on the second line.
DEF NODE

Purpose
Define the node number of the MX-2100. The allowable range of node numbers is
0 through 255.

Format
DEF NODE

Use
1. To define the MX-2100 node number, type:
DEF NODE <ENTER>
MX-2100 displays the node entry form:
NODE (0 to 255) = 0

2. Type the desired node number, and then press ENTER.

Note
Before entering a node number, make sure that the PSWRD switch located on the
MX-2100 main board is not set to ON, because in such a case the node number is
forced to 0.

F-24 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

DEF NP

Purpose
Define the configuration parameters of the network port.
The configuration parameters depend on the KCL.2 module version:
• For KCL.2 modules with RS-232 interfaces, this command is used to define the
communication parameters of the network port, select its operating mode
(network management access port or dial-out), and when applicable, control
the use of the call-out function. The communication parameters of the
network port can be different from the communication parameters of the
CONTROL port, which are selected by means of the DEF SP command.
• For KCL.2 modules with Ethernet interfaces, there is only the
ROUTING_PROTOCOL field.

Format
DEF NP
Use
1. Type:
DEF NP <ENTER>
If the KCL.2 module has an Ethernet interface, the following is displayed:
ROUTING_PROTOCOL
NONE
where NONE is the default value.
If the KCL.2 module has RS-232 interfaces, the following is displayed:
SPEED DATA PARITY CALL_OUT_MODE
9600 8 NONE NO
where the parameter values are the default values.

2. Change the parameter values as follows:

Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by
pressing the space bar.
To change the selected field, press F or B to scroll among the available
selections.
When the desired selection is displayed, press the space bar to move to
the next field.

3. When done, press ENTER.

The second line of parameters is displayed. The following is a typical
display:
LOG_OFF AUXILIARY_DEVICE ROUTING_PROTOCOL
NO NMS_SLIP NONE

The network parameters and their values are listed in Table F-3:

Commands F-25
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table F-3. Network Parameters

Designation Function Values

SPEED Selects the network port data rate. The available values are 9600, 19200 38400 and
57600 bps.
DATA Selects the number of data bits in the 7 or 8 data bits
network port word format:
PARITY Controls the use of parity: ODD - Odd parity
EVEN - Even parity
NO - Parity disabled (only available with 8 data
bits).
CALL_OUT_MODE Controls the use of the call-out function: NO - Call-out function is disabled.
Note: If the network port interface is YES - MX-2100 will initiate a call after each new
configured as DCE, this field displays NO alarm.
to indicate that the call-out function is
disabled.
LOG-OFF Controls the idle disconnect time. NO - Automatic session disconnect disabled.
10_min - Automatic disconnection after 10
minutes, if no input data is received by the
network port.
AUXILIARY DEVICE Selects the management mode supported NMS_SLIP - the network port connects to an
by the network port: SNMP management station and/or TELNET host
using the SLIP protocol.
AGENT_SLIP - The network port is connected to
another agent port using the SLIP protocol.
NMS_PPP - Same as NMS_SLIP, except the PPP
Note: At any time, only one of the two protocol is used.
ports of the KCL.2 module can be used
AGENT_PPP - Same as AGENT_SLIP, except the
for management access.
PPP protocol is used.
ROUTING PROTOCOL Controls the transmission of routing tables NONE - Routing not supported.
which allows management traffic to be
PROPRIET - Routing of management traffic by
routed through the network port:
means of the MX-2100 proprietary protocol.

DEF PWD

Purpose
Define the user password (remember that the user password can only be used
when the PSWRD switch located on the KCL module is set to OFF).

Format
DEF PWD

Use
1. To define the user password, type:
DEF PWD <ENTER>

F-26 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

The password entry screen appears, e.g.,

NEW PASSWORD (4 to 8 CHARS) =
CURRENT PASSWORD = 'password'

2. Type the required password (spaces are recognized as valid characters in a

password).
The password appears on the second line.
3. Carefully check that the specified password has been indeed typed in, and
then press ENTER.
The new password takes effect, and the MX-2100 prompt reappears.
DEF ROUTE

Purpose
Enables static routing of management information to network devices that do not
support the proprietary RIP routing protocol used by the MX-2100. The IP
addresses of such devices should be defined here.
By using this command you can declare an IP address on the list as an Ethernet
address. When an agent searches for this IP address, it will be directed to the
Ethernet.

Format
DEF ROUTE

Use
• Type:
Def route <ENTER>
The MX-2100 displays the following data form:
KM2100>def route
CURRENT ROUTE PARAMETERS
-------------------------
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 1 IS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 2 IS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 3 IS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 4 IS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 5 IS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 6 IS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 7 IS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 8 IS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 9 IS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS 10 IS :[Link]

ROUTE IP ADDRESS :[Link]

ROUTE IP ADDRESS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS :[Link]
ROUTE IP ADDRESS :[Link]

Commands F-27
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

DEF SP

Purpose
Assign values to supervisory port parameters. See section Supervisory Port
Configuration Parameters in Appendix E for parameter description and allowable
ranges, and section Configuring the SP Parameters in Chapter 3 for practical
selection recommendations.

Format
DEF SP

Use
1. Type
DEF SP <ENTER>
The supervisory port parameters data form is displayed. The data form lists
the parameters on two separate lines. A typical complete form is shown
below. The form presents the current parameter values as defaults.
SPEED DATA PARITY INTERFACE CTS DCD_DEL DSR
9.6 kbps 8 NONE DCE ON 10 ON
POP_ALM PWD LOG_OFF AUXILIARY_DEVICE
NO NO NO NMS_SLIP

2. Change parameters as follows:

Bring the cursor to the beginning of the first field to be changed by
pressing the space bar.
To change the selected field, press F or B to scroll among the available
selections. When the desired selection is displayed, press the space bar
to move to the next field.

3. After the desired parameter values are selected, press ENTER to end.
MX-2100 will display the time and date fields, followed by the MX-2100 prompt.
In addition to the parameters listed in Supervisory Port Configuration Parameters
in the Configuration Parameters appendix, Table F-4 lists parameters which can be
programmed only from the terminal:

Table F-4. Terminal Programmed Parameters

Designation Function Values

SPEED Selects the data rate. 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 or 57.6 kbps
CTS - ON The CTS line is always ON (active). =RTS - The CTS line follows the RTS line.
DCD_DELAY With the MX-2100 supervisory port 0, 10, 50, 100, 200, 300 msec
defined as DTE, indicates delay (in
msec) between DCD=ON and the
sending of data.

F-28 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Table F-4. Terminal Programmed Parameters (Cont.)

Designation Function Values

PWD Controls password protection. YES – Password is protected.

NO – Password is not protected.
LOG_OFF Controls the idle disconnect time: NO - Automatic session disconnection disabled.
10_MIN - Automatic disconnection after ten minutes if
no input data is received by the MX-2100 supervisory
port.
DSR - ON The DSR line is continuously on. It =DTR - The DSR line tracks the DTR line. When
will switch to OFF for five seconds INTERFACE=DTE, the DSR line will switch to ON for
after the DTR line is switched OFF. five seconds when the RI line is ON while the DTR line
is OFF.
POP_ALM Controls the automatic display of YES - The terminal automatically displays every 10
alarms on the terminal. minutes the alarm status (or whenever a new ON
alarm is received, or an ON/OFF alarm changes state
from OFF to ON.
NO - The automatic display feature is disabled.
AUXILIARY-DEVICE Selects the management mode NONE - Control port is not operational.
supported by the Control port:
TERMINAL - Control port supports only management
by means of a supervision terminal.
Note: At any time, only one of the NMS SLIP - The Control port connects to an SNMP
two ports of the KCL.2 module can be management station and/or TELNET host using the
used for management access. SLIP protocol.
AGENT SLIP - The network port is connected to
another agent port using the SLIP protocol.
NMS PPP - Same as NMS SLIP, except the PPP
protocol is used.
AGENT PPP - Same as AGENT SLIP, except the PPP
protocol is used.
Note: The SLIP and PPP selections are supported only
when the Control port interface (selected by means of
the internal KCL.2 switches).

DEF SYS

Purpose
Assign values to system parameters.

Format
DEF SYS

Use
1. To define system parameters, type:
DEF SYS <ENTER>

Commands F-29
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

The first line of the system parameters data form is displayed. A typical
form is shown below. The form presents the current parameter values as
defaults.
CLK_MASTER CLK_FBACK DWLD_BW_A DWLD_BW_B ML_MODE ML_RECOVERY
N/A N/A NO NO DUAL_LNK AUTO
FRAME_MODE LINK_CLK RESET_VOICE
MANUAL ML-A DISABLE

The parameters displayed on the first page are listed in Table F-5.

Table F-5. System Parameters

Designation Function Values

CLK_MASTER, CLK_FBACK Selects the main and fallback clock

sources when the main links use
independent timing, i.e., when
NONE is selected for the LINK_CLK
parameter.
When using a KDI module for drop
and insert purposes, it may be
necessary to lock the main link
timing, by selecting ML-A or ML-B
for the LINK_CLK parameter: in this
case, this field shows N/A (not
applicable).
DWLD_BW_A, DWLD_BW_B Controls the use of management NO - Disables management channel.
channels A or B.
0.8 to 19.2 kbps - Management channel is
Note: These parameters must be set enabled and uses the specified bandwidth.
in order to allow in-band
EXT - Management channel is enabled and
configuration of a remote MX-2100.
uses either the dedicated time slot or time slot
When selecting a speed for the 0 (KML.8) or FDL (KML.7).
download parameter, consider the
MX-2100 link’s total bandwidth.
Since the bandwidth is shared,
make sure that the speed chosen for
the download parameter is high
enough to allow the link to work
efficiently, but that enough
bandwidth is left for data transfer.

F-30 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Table F-5. System Parameters (Cont.)

Designation Function Values

ML_MODE When MX-2100 includes two KML SINGLE - Single main link operation.
modules, you must define how to
REDUNDANCY - The two KML modules
use the modules:
operate as a redundant pair.
When using a KDI module, always
DUAL LINK - The two KML modules provide
select the DUAL LINK mode.
two independent links.
PRIORITY BUMPING - The two KML modules
provide two parallel links with priority
bumping.
SWITCHED BACKUP - One of the KML
modules provides the main link, and the other
module provides the switched backup link.
SWITCH - Single main link over ISDN line.
DUAL SWITCH - Two main links over ISDN
line.
SINGLE and SWITCH - Single main link
operation and single main link over ISDN line.
ML_RECOVERY When using the redundancy, MANUAL - Recovery upon manual command.
priority bumping, or switched
AUTO - Automatic recovery. The criterion for
backup mode, selects the method
recovery is controlled by means of the
used to return to normal operation
FLIP_INTEG time.
after a failure on the main link is
corrected:
FRAME_MODE Selects the main link bit allocation MANUAL – Manual allocation. This is the
mode: mode required for using the bypassing and
multidrop functions supported by the KDI
module.
AUTO – Automatic allocation.
LINK_CLK When a KDI module is installed in ML-A – Main link B timing is locked to main
MX-2100, selects the timing link A timing.
reference for the main links:
ML-B – Main link A timing is locked to main
link B timing.
NONE – Main link A and main link B derive
their timing references from the same external
clock source, which is selected by means of the
CLK_MASTER and CLK_FBACK fields.
FLIP_INTEG Specifies the integration interval for SHORT – normal interval.
determining whether it is necessary
LONG – longer interval, used if the link is
to switch to the backup link, and to
marginal and it is necessary to wait a longer
detect return to normal operation of
time before declaring that the link has indeed
a failed link when using the AUTO
returned to normal operation .
method for main link recovery

RESET_VOICE Not in use. Always set to DISABLE.

Commands F-31
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

2. After the desired parameter values are selected, press ENTER.

The next line of the system parameters data form is displayed:
SLOT: 3 4 OPTION
TYPE (DB): KML.1 KML.10 ---

3. After the desired modules are selected, press ENTER.

The next line of the system parameters data form is displayed. A typical
line is shown below:
SLOT: 1 2 3 4 5 6
TYPE (DB): --- KLS.2 --- --- KLS.2 ---

If you want to include in the MX-2100 database a module that is not physically
installed, e.g., to preprogram parameters so when the module is installed, it
will start immediately to operate in the desired mode, select the desired
module type for each empty slot as mentioned above. You can select a
module type only if the slot is empty. If the slot is not empty, it
automatically shows the type of the module physically installed in the slot.
If the installed module is changed, the module type is automatically
changed in the database.
4. After the desired modules are selected, press ENTER.
The last line of the system parameters data form is displayed:
SLOT: 7 8 9 10 11 12
TYPE (DB): --- --- --- --- --- ---

5. After the desired parameter values are selected, press ENTER to end.

DISCONNECT SWITCH

Purpose
Disconnects the remote MX-2100 from the local MX-2100’s main link over the
ISDN switch line when the following is true:
• The MX-2100’s main link is configured to manual operation and switch mode
(refer to DEF ML command).
• The system is in switch mode (refer to DEF SYS command).

F-32 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Format
DISCONNECT SWITCH [A] [B]

Use
1. Type
DISCONNECT SWITCH A <ENTER>
Or
DISCONNECT SWITCH B <ENTER>
Note Use of this command is dependant on the configuration of the local MX-2100. The
main link (A or B) must be attached to a KML.10 card whose parameters (set by the
command DEF ML) are:
- main_link_mode=SWITCH
- switch_mode=MANUAL
and the main link is ‘master ’in_num_mode=NONE (set by the command DEF ML
CALL)

DSP AGENT

Purpose
Display the IP and SNMP agent parameters.

Format
DSP AGENT

Use
• Type:
DSP AGENT
The following is displayed:
NAME = KM-RAD
CURRENT AGENT PARAMETERS
IP ADDRESS IS :[Link]
SUBNET MASK IS :[Link]
DEFAULT GATEWAY IS :[Link]
READ COMMUNITY IS :public
WRITE COMMUNITY IS :private
TRAP COMMUNITY IS :public
MAC ADDRESS IS :[Link].1C.17
DATE: Thu 1998-07-30 TIME: [Link]

Note
Refer to the command DEF AGENT for an explanation of the information displayed
by this command.

Commands F-33
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

DSP ALM

Purpose
Display the contents of the alarm buffer. This buffer can contain up to 100 alarms.

Format
DSP ALM [/C][/CA]

Use
• To display all the local MX-2100 alarms, type:
DSP ALM <ENTER>
• To display all the local MX-2100 alarms and then clear the event alarms, type:
DSP ALM /C <ENTER>
• To display all the local MX-2100 alarms and then clear all the alarms, type:
DSP ALM /CA <ENTER>
Display Format
Each block of alarms received from a MX-2100 is preceded by a header. The
header lists the MX-2100 node number and name, and it serves as an easily-
identified separator between the alarms transmitted by different MX-2100 units.
The contents of the alarm buffer are displayed as a table with four columns:
ALARM NUMBER, ALARM SYNTAX, ALARM STATE, and ALARM OCCURRENCE
TIME.
For a description of the alarm messages that can be displayed by the terminal,
refer to the Alarms appendix.
DSP BERT

Purpose
Display the result of the BER test running on the specified I/O module channel.

Format
DSP BERT {i:j} [/C]

Use
1. To display the current result of the BER test, type:
DSP BERT i:j <ENTER>

If for the selected module, e.g., for a KLS.2 module, only the composite
channel BER test can be performed, type an asterisk * instead of the channel
number in all the following commands. For example:
DSP BERT i:* <ENTER>

F-34 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

The terminal displays the current value of the BERT counter of the
specified channel. The BERT count range is 0 through 65535. If the
maximum value is reached, the counter holds this value until cleared (see
next command option).
2. To display the current value of the BER counter, and then clear the counter,
type:
DSP BERT i:j /C <ENTER>
3. For continuous monitoring of the BER test running on the selected channel,
type:
DSP BERT i:j <ENTER>
4. To stop the monitoring, press BREAK or CTRL-C.
DSP CH CON

Purpose
Display the configuration of all the connected channels, i.e., all the channels for
which a main link bandwidth allocation has been defined, even if not actually
used.

Format
DSP CH CON

Use
• Type:
DSP CH CON <ENTER>
The connected channels configuration table is displayed. A typical screen is
shown below:
ML SPEED CONTROL SIGNALS
CH. A:1 ML-A 9.6KBPS LOCAL
CH. A:2 ML-A 19.2KBPS LOCAL
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
COMP A:* ML-B 9.6KBPS N/A

The display fields are explained below:

• CH i:j - Lists the channel identification.
For modules for which there are no configurable channels, e.g., for KLS.2
modules, only the composite data can be displayed; in this case, the display
shows COMP i:*.
• ML - Indicates the main link to which the channel is currently connected.
• SPEED - Shows the channel data rate, in kbps.

Commands F-35
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• CONTROL SIGNALS - Displays the control signal support mode for the
corresponding channels. The following codes can appear:
LOCAL - Channel configured for local control signal support (data
channel only).
RTS - Channel configured for end-to-end transmission of RTS line state
(data channel only).
DTR&RTS - Channel configured for end-to-end transmission of DTR
and RTS lines states (data channel only).
SIGNALING - Channel configured for end-to-end transmission of E and
M signaling (voice channel only).
N/A - Not applicable: displayed in lines with COMP i:*.

DSP FLIP

Purpose
Display the cause of the last switching (flip) from one main link to the other.
This command is accepted only when MX-2100 operates in the switched backup,
priority bumping, or redundancy mode.

Format
DSP FLIP

Use
• Type:
DSP FLIP <ENTER>
The following message is displayed:
LAST FLIP CAUSED BY: 'cause'
The following 'cause' descriptions can be displayed:
NO FLIP - No flip occurred.
FORCED FLIP - Flipping occurred as a result of operator's command
(FLIP ML).
ML CTS OR DSR IS OFF - Flipping occurred because the CTS or DSR
line in the interface of the KML module serving the previously used link
had been switched off by the modem. This cause can appear only
when the DSR&CTS main link parameter is set to EXT.
ML HARDWARE FAILURE - Flipping occurred after a hardware failure
has been detected in the KML module serving the previously used link.
ML LOCAL SYNC LOSS - Flipping occurred because the local KML
module serving the previously used link lost frame synchronization.
ML REMOTE SYNC LOSS - Flipping occurred because the remote KML
module serving the previously used link lost frame synchronization.
ON LINE ML REMOVED - Flipping occurred because the KML module
that was previously on-line has been removed from its slot.

F-36 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

DSP HDR TST

Purpose
Display the results of the last hardware test of the KCL and KPS modules (made
during power-up self-test and during regular operation).

Format
DSP HDR TST

Use
• To display the hardware test report, type:
DSP HDR TST <ENTER>
Display Format
The display shows NO ERROR if everything checks good, or lists the detected
problem:
DATABASE 1 CHKSUM ERROR
DATABASE 2 CHKSUM ERROR
I/O EXPANDER ERROR
COUNTER ERROR
PS-A 5 VOLT FAILURE
PS-A 12 VOLT FAILURE
PS-B 5 VOLT FAILURE
PS-B 12 VOLT FAILURE

Refer to the Alarms appendix for an interpretation of the error messages.

DSP MANAGER LIST

Purpose
Display the network management stations to which the SNMP agent of MX-2100
sends traps. Each network management station is displayed by its IP address and
the corresponding subnet mask.

Format
DSP MANAGER LIST

Use
• To display all the IP and SUBNET MASK addresses, type:
DSP MANAGER LIST <ENTER>

Commands F-37
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

The following is displayed:

MANAGERS LIST PARAMETERS
--------------------------------
IP ADDRESS 1 IS := [Link]
SUBNET MASK 1 IS := [Link]
IP ADDRESS 2 IS := [Link]
SUBNET MASK 2 IS := [Link]
IP ADDRESS 3 IS := [Link]
SUBNET MASK 3 IS := [Link]
.
.
.
IP ADDRESS 10 IS := [Link]
SUBNET MASK 10 IS := [Link]

DSP KVF5
or
DSP PBX
Purpose
Display the configuration parameters of the KVF.5 modules that comprise a group
connected to the PBX interface.

Format
DSP PBX
or
DSP KVF5

Use
• Type:
DSP PBX <ENTER>
or
DSP KVF5 <ENTER>
Display Format
A typical data form for a T1 group is shown below:
I/O CARD
SLOT TYPE TS_GROUP FROM_PBX TO_PBX CCS ABCD POLARITY EXIST
5 KVF5/T1/M 05/1,2,3,4 A B N/A 0101 NORMAL YES
6 KVF5/T1/S 05/5,6,7,8 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A NO

F-38 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

The fields appearing on the data form are as follows:

• SLOT - Displays the slot in which each module of the group is installed.
• CARD TYPE - Displays the module type installed in the corresponding slot:
KVF5/T1/M or KVF5/T1/S for KVF.5 modules for T1, KVF5/E1/M or KVF5/E1/S
for KVF.5 modules for E1 interface.
• TS_GROUP - Group of time slots served by the module installed in the
corresponding slot.
• FROM_PBX - Signaling to be transferred through the MX-2100s.
• TO_PBX - Signaling to be transmitted to the PBX.
• CCS - If the selected signaling mode is CCS (from and to PBX), then this field
will indicate which time slot will carry the CCS information.
• ABCD - If the selected signaling mode is CAS (any bits selected except CCS),
then the default A,B,C,D to be transmitted to the PBX is displayed in this field.
• POLARITY - Polarity of a bit, Normal/Inverted (for master module only).
For the slave modules, displays N/A.
• EXIST - Indicates whether the module includes a sub interface.

DSP KVF6

Purpose
Display the configuration parameters of the KVF.6 modules in the MX-2100.

Format
DSP KVF6

Use
• Type:
DSP KVF6 <ENTER>
Typical data for E1/T1 cards is shown as follows:
IO SLOT CARD_TYPE FRAME SIG_MODE TS A B C D EXIST

3 KVF6/T1/24 SF(D4) CAS N/A A B N/A N/A YES

6 KVF6/E1/16 G.732S CAS N/A A B A B NO
7 KVF6/T1/12 ESF CAS N/A A OT_A O 1 YES
8 KVF6/E1/31 G.732N CAS 5 N/A N/A N/A N/A YES

The fields appearing on the data form are as follows:

• SLOT - Displays the slot in which each module of KVF.6 is installed.
• CARD_TYPE - Displays the module type installed in the corresponding slot:
KVF.6/T1/24, KVF.6/T1/12, KVF.6/E1/31, or KVF.6/E1/16.

Commands F-39
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• FRAME - Displays the framing format of the KVF.6 module.

− For KVF.6/E1/31 or KVF.6/E1/16 displays G.732N or G.732S.
− For KVF.6/T1/24 or KVF.6/T1/12 displays SF(D4) or ESF.
• SIG_MODE - Displays the signaling operation mode of the KVF.6 module:
CAS or CCS.
• TS - Displays the time slot number which carries the CCS information in the
KVF.6 module, only if SIG_MODE is CSS. IF SIG_MODE is CAS, the N/A will
be displayed in this field.
• A,B,C,D - Displays the information that will be sent through this bit to the PBX.
The options are: A, B, C, D, NOT_A, NOT_B, NOT_C, NOT_D, 0, or 1.
• EXIST - Indicates whether the module exists in the MX-2100 or not.

DSP SIGNALING
or
DSP SIG

Purpose
Display the signaling bits state in KVF.5 or KVF.6 modules.

Format
DSP SIGNALING {i}
or
DSP SIG {i}

Use
Displays the 4 CAS bits (A, B, C, D) of signaling for KVF.5 and KVF.6 modules for
connected time slots. For each card that carries CAS information (signaling mode is
CAS), all the connected timeslots will be displayed accompanied by their 4 CAS
bits current information.
DSP PRBS_INJ

Purpose
Display the result of the PRBS test running on the specified I/O module channel.

Format
DSP PRBS_INJ {i:j} [/C]

Use
Same as for the DSP BERT command, except the use of PRBS_INJ instead of
BERT. Note that if the PRBS test is activated without closing a loop along the
signal path, errors will always be reported.

F-40 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

DSP REM AGENT

Purpose
Display the other MX-2100 connected to the local MX-2100.

Format
DSP REM AGENT

Use
• Type:
DSP REM AGENT <ENTER>
MX-2100 displays the following:
NAME = mid
IP Address MUX Name Distance Physical_Distance
---------- -------- -------- -----------------
[Link] down 006 1
[Link] up 006 3

TIME: HH:MM:SS DATE: Day MM,DD,YY

DSP REV

Purpose
Display the list of modules installed in the MX-2100 module and the hardware and
software versions of each module.

Format
DSP REV { [*] [i] }

Use
1. To display information on all the modules, type:
DSP REV * <ENTER>
The supervision terminal displays the list of slots in which modules that
include programmable components can be installed, the type of module
installed in each slot, and the module hardware and software revision. The
general organization of the display is illustrated below.

Commands F-41
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

CARD TYPE SOFTWARE REV. HARDWARE REV

SLOT 3 ML [Link] [Link]
SLOT 4 [Link] [Link]
SLOT 5 [Link] [Link]
SLOT OPTIONS [Link] [Link]
SLOT 1 [Link] [Link]
SLOT 2 [Link] [Link]
. [Link] [Link]
. [Link] [Link]
SLOT 12 [Link] [Link]

2. To display the information related to a specific module, type:

DSP REV i <ENTER>
where i is the number of the MX-2100 slot of the desired module
(3, 4, 5, OP, and I/O slots 1 through 12).
DSP ST FRAME

Purpose
Display information on the frame structure and the use of the available main link
bandwidth. Refer to the General Information chapter for additional information.

Format
DSP ST FRAME {A B} or DSP ST FR {A B}

Use
1. To display frame information for main link A, type:
DSP ST FRAME A <ENTER> or DSP ST FR A<R>
If MX-2100 is equipped with only one main link module, it is not necessary to
identify the main link.
2. To display frame information for main link B, type:
DSP ST FRAME B <ENTER> or DSP ST FR B<R>
Display Format - AUTO Frame Bit Allocation
A typical DSP ST FRAME display when the frame bit allocation mode (selected by
means of the DEF SYS command) is automatic is shown below:
FRAME LENGTH = XXX BIT (XXX KBPS)
BIT WEIGHT = XXX KBPS
DATA USAGE = XXX KBPS
CONTROL USAGE = XXX KBPS
DOWNLOAD USAGE = XXX KBPS
SYNC USAGE = XXX KBPS
TOTAL USAGE = XXX KBPS
TOTAL FREE = XXX KBPS

F-42 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

The display fields are as follows:

• FRAME LENGTH - Total number of bits contained in one main link frame, and
the main link data rate, in kbps.
• BIT WEIGHT - Main link bandwidth allocation unit, in kbps.
• DATA USAGE - The main link bandwidth allocated to user data, in kbps.
• CONTROL USAGE - The main link bandwidth allocated to the transfer of user
end-to-end signaling in kbps.
• SYNC USAGE - The main link bandwidth allocated to the frame
synchronization word, in kbps.
• DOWNLOAD USAGE - The main link bandwidth allocated to the
management channel, in kbps.
• TOTAL USAGE - The total main link bandwidth currently allocated, in kbps.
• TOTAL FREE - The total main link bandwidth, in kbps, that is not yet allocated
and is free.

Display Format - MANUAL Frame Bit Allocation

A typical DSP ST FRAME display when the frame bit allocation mode (selected by
means of the DEF SYS command) is manual is shown below:
FRAME LENGTH = 160 BIT (128.0 KBPS)
BIT WEIGHT = 0.800 KBPS
BYPASS_START = 16 BYPASS_SIZE = 20
I/O CH1_START CH1_SIZE CH2_START CH2_SIZE CNTRL_START CNTRL_SIZE LAST_BIT
SLOT
01 000 012 000 000 012 001 012
06 014 012 000 000 000 000 025

The display shows the number of bits in the frame, and the bit “weight” (main link
bandwidth allocation unit), followed by the bypass information and bandwidth
utilization of each slot:
• BYPASS_START - The number of the first bit in the block of bits being
bypassed.
• BYPASS_SIZE - The total number of bits being bypassed.
• CH_START - The number of the first bit in the block of bits assigned to the
channel of the module installed in the corresponding slot.
• CH_SIZE - The total number of bits assigned to the channel of the module
installed in the corresponding slot.
• CNTRL_START - When end-to-end transmission of control signals is used,
shows the number of the first bit in the block of bits assigned to carry the
control signals of the module installed in the corresponding slot.
• CNTRL_SIZE - When end-to-end transmission of control signals is used, shows
the total number of bits assigned to carry the control signals of the module
installed in the corresponding slot.
• LAST_BIT - The number of the last bit in the block of bits assigned to the
module installed in the corresponding slot.

Commands F-43
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

DSP ST ML
Purpose
Display the status of the desired KML module.

Format
DSP ST ML {A B}

Use
• To display the status of the KML module installed in slot 3, type:
DSP ST ML <ENTER> or DSP ST ML A <ENTER>
• To display the status of the KML module installed in slot 4, type:
DSP ST ML B <ENTER>
General Display Format
A typical DSP ST display is shown below:
ACTIVE ML= ML-A
SOFTWARE REVISION= [Link]
HARDWARE REVISION= [Link]
ALARMS= NONE
INTERFACE TYPE= V.35
ML LOOP= NONE

The display fields are as follows:

• ACTIVE ML - Displays the currently-active KML module: ML-A for the KML
module installed in slot 3, ML-B for the module installed in slot 4, or BOTH for
a MX-2100 operating in the dual link, priority bumping or switched backup
mode.
• SOFTWARE REVISION - The software revision of the KML module.
• HARDWARE REVISION - The hardware revision of the KML module.
• ALARMS - Displays the alarms related to the corresponding main link:
NONE - No alarm has been reported.
LOCAL SYNC LOSS - The local MX-2100 lost frame synchronization.
REMOTE SYNC LOSS - The remote MX-2100 reports the loss of frame
synchronization. This message can appear only when down-loading is
enabled.
• INTERFACE TYPE - Displays the interface type of the selected KML module.
• ML LOOP - Displays the state of the loops on the selected KML module:
NONE - No loop is active
R - Remote loop active
L - Local loop active
L-V54.2 - The V.54 loop 2 is active
L-V54.3 - The V.54 loop 3 is active.

F-44 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Display Format - KML.10 Module

A typical DSP ST display for a KML.10 module is shown below.
ACTIVE ML= ML-B
SOFTWARE REVISION= 1.1
HARDWARE REVISION= 1.2
ALARMS= NONE
INTERFACE TYPE= ISDN
ML LOOP= NONE

MAIN LINK B INTERFACE - ISDN STATUS PARAMETERS

==============================================
ISDN INTERFACE = S
PIGGYBACK INTERFACE TYPE = IB-SW/'ISDN VERSION' REL. 2.0
ISDN DISCONNECT CAUSE =
ISDN CALL STATUS = CONNECTED
ISDN LAYER1 = CONNECTED
ISDN LAYER2 = CONNECTED

The general display fields are as follows:

• ACTIVE ML - Displays the currently-active KML module:
ML-A for the KML module installed in slot 3,
ML-B for the module installed in slot 4, or
BOTH for a MX-2100 operating in the dual-link, priority bumping or
switched backup mode.
• SOFTWARE REVISION - The software revision of the KML.10 module.
• HARDWARE REVISION - The hardware revision of the KML.10 module.
• ALARMS - Displays the alarms related to the corresponding main link:
NONE - No alarm has been reported.
LOCAL SYNC LOSS - The local MX-2100 lost frame synchronization.
REMOTE SYNC LOSS - The remote MX-2100 reports the loss of frame
synchronization. This message can appear only when downloading is
enabled.
• INTERFACE TYPE - Displays the interface type of the selected KML.10
module, ISDN.
• ML LOOP - Displays the state of the loops on the KML.10 module:
NONE - No loop active
R - Remote loop active
L - Local loop active.

The ISDN-specific display fields are as follows:

• ISDN INTERFACE - Displays the interface type: S for a KML.10/S module, and
U for a KML.10/U module.

Commands F-45
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• PIGGYBACK INTERFACE TYPE - For operation on switched lines, displays the

ISDN implementation version currently selected for use on the selected
module, and the release number of the ISDN support package installed on the
module. For operation on leased lines, displays LEASED LINE.
• ISDN DISCONNECT CAUSE - displays the last disconnect cause code. The
codes are in the range of 001 through 127, and they comply with the ITU-T
Rec. Q.921.
• ISDN CALL STATUS - Displays the status of the ISDN call in which the
KML.10 module is engaged:
DIALING - The call is being set up.
CONNECTED - The call is connected.
DISCONNECTING - The call is in the process of being disconnected.
DISCONNECTED - The call has been disconnected.
• ISDN LAYER1 - Displays the current state of the layer 1 protocol:
CONNECTED - Layer 1 is connected.
DISCONNECTED - Layer 1 is not connected.
• ISDN LAYER2 - Displays the current state of the layer 2 protocol:
CONNECTED - Layer 2 is connected.
DISCONNECTED - Layer 2 is not connected.

DSP ST SLOT

Purpose
Display information on the module installed in one of the slots OP, and I/O slots 1
through 12.

Format
DSP ST i

Use
• To display information on the module installed in the desired I/O slot, type:
DSP ST i <ENTER>
where i is the I/O slot number, in the range of 1 through 12, or OP (for the
OPTIONS slot).

F-46 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Display Format
A typical DSP ST SLOT status is shown below:
DATABASE: module type
HARDWARE: module type
SOFTWARE REVISION: [Link]
HARDWARE REVISION: [Link]
HARDWARE FAILURE: YES, NO
OPERATED HIGHWAY: ML-A
CONNECT INTERFACE LOOP
CH i:1 YES V35 NONE
CH i:2 NO V35 NONE

The display fields are as follows:

• DATABASE - Lists the module type, as stored in the database.
• HARDWARE - Lists the module type of each active installed module, as
reported by the module itself.
• SOFTWARE REVISION - Lists the software revision of the module.
• HARDWARE REVISION - Lists the hardware revision of the module.
• HARDWARE FAILURE - Indicates whether a hardware failure has been
detected in this module during the power-up self-test or during regular
operation.
• OPERATED HIGHWAY - Indicates the internal MX-2100 bus to which the
specified module is connected:
ML-A - Module connected to the bus of main link A.
ML-B - Module connected to the bus of main link B.
NC (PB) - Module is not connected to a main link bus (displayed only
when the priority bumping or the switched backup mode is used).

In addition, the display provides the following information for each of the channels
available on this module.
The channel number, B, is identified in the left-hand column (CH i:j). If the
module installed in the selected slot does not include channels recognizable by the
MX-2100 KCL module, e.g., it is a KLS.2 module, the information is presented only
for the module composite channel, and the left-hand column shows COMP A:*.
• CONNECT - Indicates whether this channel has been allocated bandwidth on
the main link (is “connected” to the main link):
YES - The channel has been allocated main link bandwidth and
therefore it can carry traffic.
NO - The channel cannot carry traffic.
• INTERFACE - Shows the channel interface selected by means of the internal
interface changer boards. This field is relevant only to data I/O modules with
selectable interface, e.g., KHS.1: for other modules, this field shows NA (not
applicable).

Commands F-47
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

• LOOP - Indicates the tests and/or loops that are currently activated on this
channel, or NONE. For the list of tests and loops available on each module,
refer to the relevant module Installation and Operation Manual.

When using the KVF.5 I/O module with A and B signaling, this command displays
the A and B signaling state. MX-2100 receives the A and B signaling state from the
PBX.
The status display of a typical KVF.6 I/O module adds the following information:
FRAME = G732S
CRC4 = NO
OOS = F-I
GAIN LIMIT = SHORT_H(dsu)
E1/T1 LOOP = NONE
ECHO CODING TX RX FAX CH TIME_SLOT
SPEED CNCL LAW GAIN GAIN GAIN TYPE LOOP GROUP
CH 01:1 4*4.8 OFF a_Law 0dBm 0dBm -9.5dBm V+F NONE 1,2,3,4
CH 01:2 4*4.8 OFF u_Law 0dBm 0dBm -9.5dBm V+F NONE 5,6,7,8
CH 01:3 4*4.8 OFF u_Law 0dBm 0dBm -9.5dBm V+F NONE 9,10,11,12
CH 01:4 4*4.8 OFF u_Law 0dBm 0dBm -9.5dBm V+F NONE 13,14,15,16

For an explanation of the display fields, refer to the Configuration chapter of the
KVF.6 Installation and Operation Manual.
DSP ST SYS

Purpose
Display system status information.

Format
DSP ST SYS [option]

Use
• To view the current system status, type:
DSP ST SYS <ENTER>
Display Format
A typical system status display, including typical module type identifications,
is shown below:

F-48 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

NAME = [mux name]

LAST RESET = [date and time of last reset on KCL.2]
ON LINE DATABASE = 1
NODAL CLOCK = ML
ACTIVE ML = ML-A
ACTIVE ML TIMING = DTE
ML MODE = SINGLE
MONITOR = NONE
ALARM RELAY = ON

INSTALLED MODULES:
ML/IO: ML-A ML-B OPTION 1 2 3
DB: ML --- --- --- KLS.1/N ---
HW: ML.1 --- --- --- KLS.1/N ---

IO: 4 5 6 7 8 9
DB: --- KVF.5/E1/M --- --- --- KVF.4/S0
HW: --- KVF.5/E1/M --- --- --- KVF.4/S0

IO: 10 11 12
DB: --- --- ---
HW: --- --- ---
TIM[Link] DATE:Mon Jun,08,1998

The display fields are as follows:

• NAME - Lists the logical name assigned to MX-2100.
• LAST RESET - Displays the date and time of the last reset on KCL.2.
• ON LINE DATABASE - Indicates the number of the active database:
1 or 2.
• NODAL CLOCK - Indicates the source for the link transmit clock: the internal
oscillator, a module channel, or the main link (ML). ML can only appear when
the main link timing mode is DTE. Refer to the Configuration Parameters
appendix for additional information.
• ACTIVE ML - Indicates the currently-active KML module(s): ML-A for the KML
module installed in slot 3, and/or ML-B for the module installed in slot 4, or
BOTH for a MX-2100 operating in the dual link, priority bumping or switched
backup mode.
• ACTIVE ML TIMING - Source clock of the agent.
• ML MODE - Indicates the current main link mode: SINGLE, REDUNDANCY,
DUAL LINK, PRI_BMP, SW_BACK.
• MONITOR - Indicates the module channel monitored by means of the
MX-2100 front panel indicators, or NONE.
• ALARM RELAY - Indicates the status of MX-2100 alarm relay contacts: ON or
OFF.
• INSTALLED MODULES - Lists, for each slot, the installed module and the
module programmed in the database.

Commands F-49
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

EDIT DB

Purpose
Select a database on which the following commands will be executed. The
selected database is identified by the working prompt:
• KM2100> for the on-line database (the database now used by MX-2100)
or
KM2104> for the on-line database (the database now used by MX-2104)
• ALT_DB> for the off-line database.

Format
EDIT DB

Use
1. To select the other database while working on the on-line database, type at
the KM2100> or KM2104> prompt:
EDIT DB <ENTER>
The working prompt changes to ALT_DB>.
2. To select the on-line database while working on the alternate database, type at
the ALT_DB> prompt:
EDIT DB <ENTER>
The working prompt changes to KM2100> or KM2104>.
Note
When you exit the configuration program and return the control to the LCD, the
database currently defined to be on-line (irrespective of the database being edited)
is forced to remain the on-line database.

EXIT

Purpose
End the current session and return control to the MX-2100 front panel.

Format
EXIT

Use
• Type:
EXIT <ENTER>
The DSR line of the SP port is switched off for 5 seconds. The supervisory
port prompt disappears, and the TERMINAL ON LINE message
previously displayed by MX-2100 is replaced by the default display,
ALARM BUFFER.

F-50 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Purpose
Define the codes used to be sent to the supervision terminal to perform the
following terminal control functions:
• Clear screen
• Move cursor to screen home position
• Move cursor to the right by one position.

This command lets you enter manually the desired codes. However, if you are
using a VT-52, VT-100, TV-920, FREEDOM-100, FREEDOM-110, or
FREEDOM-220 terminal, or a terminal which is compatible with one of the
terminals listed above, you can use the INIT F command to select automatically
the corresponding control sequences.

Format
F
Use
1. To display the current codes, type:
F <ENTER>
The terminal function entry screen is displayed. The screen includes three
separate lines, displayed one after the other. A typical screen, showing all
the three lines, is shown below:
CLEAR SCREEN =hhhhhhhh (clear screen code)
CURSOR HOME =hhhhhhhh (cursor home code)
CURSOR RIGHT =hhhhhhhh (cursor right code)
where h indicates hexadecimal digits.

2. To change a code, bring the cursor under the first digit of the code to be
changed, by pressing ENTER, then enter the appropriate hexadecimal digit.
3. Repeat the procedure until all the necessary digits are changed.
FLIP ML

Purpose
Change the active KML module in a redundant system.

Format
FLIP ML

Commands F-51
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Use
• To change the active KML module, type:
FLIP ML <ENTER>
HELP

Purpose
Display an index of the supervisory port commands and the options available for
each command.

Format
H [1] [2] [3] [4]

Use
• To display all the pages of the HELP system, type:
H <ENTER>
• To display a specific page of the HELP system, e.g., page 1, type:
H 1 <ENTER>
INIT DB

Purpose
Load the default parameters values instead of the user configuration in the
MX-2100 database (see Table F-6).
This command is available only on a master MX-2100.

Format
INIT DB

Use
1. To load the default parameters, type:
INIT DB <ENTER>
2. MX-2100 displays the time and date fields, followed by the MX-2100 prompt.

F-52 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Table F-6. MX-2100 Default Configuration Used with Supervision Terminal

Parameter Type Parameter Designation Default Value

System CLK_MASTER INT
CLK_FBACK NONE
DOWNLOAD_BW MIN
ML MODE SINGLE
ACTIVE_ML AUTO
Link SPEED 64K
INTERFACE DCE
BUFFER_SIZE 8
Channel PROTOCOL ASYNC
SPEED NC
ASYNC_DATA 6
TIMING DCE
CTRL_SIG LOCAL
CTS ON
RTS_CTS_DEL MIN
INTF 4-WIRE
TX_LEVEL +8dBm
RX_LEVEL +2dBm
OOS F-B
SP (Supervisory Port) SPEED_BPS 9600
DATA 8
PARITY NONE
INTERFACE DCE
General CLEAR SCREEN 00000000
CURSOR HOME 00000000
CURSOR RIGHT 00000000

INIT F

Purpose
Set all the terminal control codes (cursor home, cursor right, and clear screen) to 0,
or select the control codes corresponding to one of the supported terminals:
VT-52, VT-100, TV-920, FREEDOM-100, FREEDOM-110, or FREEDOM-220.
If your terminal is not compatible with one of the supported terminals, use the F
command to enter manually the required sequences.
The codes used by typical terminals are listed in the following table.

Commands F-53
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Table F-7. Codes Used by Typical Terminals

Function Terminal Type

TV920 VT52 VT100 Freedom 100/110 Freedom 220
Clear Screen 1B2A0000 N/A 1B5B324A 1B2A0000 1B5B324A
Cursor Home 1E000000 1B480000 1B5B4800 1E000000 1B5B4800
Cursor Right 0C000000 1B430000 1B5B3143 0C000000 1B5B3143

Format
INIT F 'terminal'

Use
1. To select the control codes for one of the supported terminal types, type:
INIT F 'terminal' <ENTER>
where 'terminal' stands for the terminal name.
2. To reset the control codes to 0, type
INIT F <ENTER>
LOAD DB 1\2

Purpose
Loads the MX-2100 database to a file to enable transfer to a remote MX-2100 via
TFTP. This enables you to control a remote MX-2100 database and to configure
other MX-2100s with the same database. Refer to the Update DB 1\2 command.

Note Loading the database is performed from a file named [Link]. Configure the
local/remote file of your TFTP application to point to this file.

Use
1. Load db 1 <ENTER> for the first database of the MX-2100
2. Load db 2 <ENTER> for the second database of the MX-2100
LOAD IO
Purpose
Software download to KVF.6 or KVF.8 modules, through a DL connection in the
modules front panel.

Format
LOAD IO i

F-54 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

Use
1. To perform software download to KVF.6 or KVF.8 module installed in the
MX-2100, type:
LOAD IO i <ENTER>
where i is the I/O slot number (1 through 12)

2. Wait until the TST LED in the card starts to blink. Connect your download
cable to the specified DL connection in the card and connect the other end to
one of the communication ports in the PC. Use your download application in
the PC to load the software.
LOOP

Purpose
Activate tests. For main link test loops, you can define their duration: after the
specified time, the loop is automatically disconnected. If you do not specify the
loop duration, it remains permanently connected.
• Refer to the Diagnostics chapter for the allowable loop combinations.
• Refer to the Diagnostics chapter for a description of the loops available on the
MX-2100 main link.
• Refer to the relevant module Installation and Operation Manual, for a
description of the tests available on the corresponding module.

Format
LOOP [loopname] {ML A ML B i:j}
or
LP [loopname] {ML A ML B i:j}

Use
1. To activate a specific type of loop on main link A, type:
LOOP L ML A <ENTER> or LP L ML A <ENTER>
LOOP V54.2 ML A <ENTER> or LP V54.2 ML A <ENTER>
LOOP V54.3 ML A <ENTER> or LP V54.3 ML A <ENTER>
2. To activate a specific type of loop on main link B, type:
LOOP L ML B <ENTER> or LP L ML B <ENTER>
LOOP V54.2 ML B <ENTER> or LP V54.2 ML B <ENTER>
LOOP V54.3 ML B <ENTER> or LP V54.3 ML B <ENTER>
Note
If MX-2100 operates in the SINGLE mode, it is not necessary to specify the link, e.g.,
you can type LOOP L ML <ENTER> instead of LOOP L ML A <ENTER> or LOOP L
ML B <ENTER>.

3. To activate a test or loop on the desired channel, type:

LOOP L i:j <ENTER> or LP L i:j <ENTER>
LOOP R i:j <ENTER> or LP R i:j <ENTER>

Commands F-55
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

LOOP PRBS_INJ i:j <ENTER> or LP PRBS_INJ i:j <ENTER> (data channel only)
LOOP BERT i:j <ENTER> or LP BERT i:j <ENTER> (data channel only)
LOOP TONE_INJ i:j <ENTER> or LP TONE_INJ i:j <ENTER> (voice channel only)

ML RECOVERY
Purpose
When MX-2100 is configured for operation with manually controlled switched
backup or priority bumping (refer to DEF SYS command), this command is used to
initiate recovery from a priority bumping or switching to the backup link event,
and return to normal operation.

Format
ML RECOVERY <ENTER>

Use
• To initiate return to normal operation, type:
ML RECOVERY <ENTER>
MONITOR
Purpose
Select the desired I/O module channel for monitoring.

Format
MONITOR i:j or M i:j

Use
• To select a module channel, type:
MONITOR i:j <ENTER> or M i:j <ENTER>
where i is the number of the I/O slot number (1 through 12).
REBUILD FRAME
Purpose
Rebuild the MX-2100 frame.
The MX-2100 frame is updated according to the activated channels (in the order
they were inserted). When an I/O card is taken in/out, the frame is updated.
REBUILD FRAME should be used after a change in the MX-2100 channels.

Format
REBUILD FRAME [A] [B]

Use
• To rebuild the MX-2100 frame, type:
REBUILD FRAME [A] <ENTER> or REBUILD FRAME [B] <ENTER>
for ML-A channels or ML-B channels.

F-56 Commands
MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Command Set Description

The following message appears:

Updating Frame
DATE: xxx yyyy-dd-mm TIME: hh:mm:ss

RESET LOC

Purpose
Reset the local MX-2100.

Format
RESET LOC

Use
• To reset the local MX-2100, type:
RESET LOC <ENTER>
RESET IO

Purpose
Reset I/O module

Format
RESET IO i

Use
• To reset the I/O module installed in the MX-2100, type:
RESET IO i <ENTER>
where i is the I/O slot number, (1 through 12).

RESET ML

Purpose
Reset ML module

Format
RESET ML {A or B}

Use
• To reset ML module type:
RESET ML {A or B} <ENTER>
where A is referenced to ML_A slot, and B to ML_B slot.

Commands F-57
Appendix F Command Set Description MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

TIME
Purpose
Set the time for the MX-2100 internal real time clock.

Format
TIME

Use
1. To set the time, type:
TIME <ENTER>
MX-2100 sends the time entry form:
Time
Hour = 12
Minute = 25
Second = 16

2. Bring the cursor to the first field to be changed by pressing ENTER.

3. Change the selected field by pressing F to increase and B to decrease the
displayed values. When done, press ENTER to move to the next field.
4. Set the time about one minute beyond the current time, and then press
ENTER at the correct instant.
MX-2100 displays the time and date fields (note that time has changed),
followed by the MX-2100 prompt.
UPDATE DB 1\2

Purpose
Updates the MX-2100 database from a file with a database package that was
received from a remote MX-2100 via TFTP.
This enables you to control a remote MX-2100 database and to configure other
MX-2100s with the same database. Refer to the Load DB 1\2 command.
Note
Updating the database is performed from a file named [Link]. Configure the
local/remote file of your TFTP application to point to this file.

Use
• Update db 1 <ENTER> for the first database of the MX-2100
• Update db 2 <ENTER> for the second database of the MX-2100

F-58 Commands
 Index

Connection Data
—A— Common Logic Module, KCL.2, A-1
ACTIVE_ML, 3-10 DC Power Input Connector, A-4
Alarm Messages, 5-1 Connection Methods, 2-9
Application Considerations Control Logic Modules, 1-10
Basic System Structure, 1-16 Control Session, 4-15
Data Channel Clock Modes, 1-45 CRC-4, E-5
Dual Link Operation, 1-22 CTS, 2-10, E-7
Main Link Interface Characteristics, 1-48 Current and Power
Priority Bumping, 1-27 Power Supply Modules, 2-3, 2-6
Redundancy, 1-20
Sub Link Timing, 1-48
—D—
Switch Mode, 1-30
Data, 3-12
Switched Backup Operation, 1-28
System Timing Considerations, 1-39 DATA, E-7
Timing Modes of ISDN Channels, 1-47 Data Carrier Detect, 2-10
AUTOBAUD Function, 2-10 Data Channel Clock Modes, 1-45
Automatic IP Traffic Routing, C-6 Data Set Ready, 2-10
AUXILIARY_DEVICE, E-8 Data Terminal Ready, 2-9
DC Power
—B— Input Connector, A-4
B CH, E-6 DCD, 2-10
Basic Dual-Link Configurations, 1-22 DCD_DEL, E-7
Basic System Structure, 1-16 DCE Timing, 1-42
BERT Testing, 5-14 Description, Functional, 1-1
BUFFER_SIZE, 3-11, E-4 Diagnostics
Bypassing Configurations, 1-23 Capabilities, 1-6
LED, 5-1
ML, 5-2
—C—
Dial Port Connector, 1-38
Channel Parameters - Specific Configuration
Downloading Procedure
Instructions, 3-12
General, D-3
Checking Current Operating Config, 4-10 Single KCL.2, D-2
Clear to Send, 2-10 DP Connector, A-3
CLK_FBACK, 3-9, E-2 DSR, 2-10, E-7
CLK_MASTER, 3-9, E-1 DSR&CTS, 3-11, E-4
Clock Modes, 1-45 DTE Timing, 1-40
CODE, E-5 DTR, 2-9
Cold (Local) Installation Procedure, D-1 Dual Link Operation
Commands, F-2 Basic Dual-Link Configurations, 1-22
Language Syntax, 4-1 Bypassing Configurations, 1-23
Options, 4-2 Multidrop Configurations, 1-26
Protocol, 4-3 DWLD_BW_A, E-2
Common Logic Module, KCL.2, A-1 DWLD_BW_A, DWLD_BW_B, 3-9
DP Connector, A-3
DWLD_BW_B, E-2
Communication Port, 1-38
Configuration Error Messages, B-10

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual I-1

—E— —I—
Ending a Control Session, 4-15 I TS CODE, E-5
Equipment Management Methods I/O Module Applications, 1-50
General, 1-32 I/O Module Loops and Tests, 5-12
In-Band, 1-34 I/O Modules, 1-12
Local Management, 1-33 In-Band Management, 1-5
Out-of-Band, 1-35
Index of Commands, 4-4
Remote Management, 1-33
Initial Setup and Configuration, 2-21
Error Messages, Configuration, B-10
Installation
Ethernet Port, 1-38
Grounding, 2-2
External DCE Timing, 1-41 KCL.2 Module, 2-15, 2-17
MX-2100 Enclosure, 2-12
—F— MX-2104 Enclosure, 2-12
Features, Main System, 1-1 KPS Module, 2-13
FRAME, E-5 Site Requirements, 2-2
Front Panel INTERFACE, E-4, E-7
Controls and Indicators, 4-7 Internal Timing, 1-43, 1-44
MX-2100, 1-8 IP Address Structure, C-5
MX-2104, 1-10 IP Environment, C-4, C-5
Operating Instructions. See Front Panel Operating Automatic IP Traffic Routing, C-6
Instructions IP Address Structure, C-5
Front Panel Operating Instructions ISDN STANDARD, E-6
Checking Current Operating Config, 4-10
Front Panel Controls and Indicators, 4-7 —K—
General, 3-1, 4-9 KAI, 1-12
Normal Indications, 4-12 KCL.2 Module
Organization of MX-2100 Display, 4-9 Installation, 2-15, 2-17
Using the Front Panel Push-buttons, 4-9 KCL.2, 1-10
FUNCTION, E-5 Setting Internal Jumpers, 2-14
Functional Description KDI,General, 1-12
Diagnostic Capabilities, 1-6 KHS, 1-13
General, 1-1 KHS.703, 1-14
Main System Features, 1-1
MX-2100
System Supervision and Configuration, 1-4
Physical Description, 1-6
MX-2100 Enclosure
—G— Installation, 2-12
General Configuration Procedure, 3-7 MX-2104
General Information Physical Description, 1-8
Application Considerations, 1-16 MX-2104 Enclosure
Functional Description, 1-1
Installation, 2-12
Grounding, 2-2 KLS, 1-13
KMBE, 1-15
—H— KML
Handshaking Protocol General, 1-10
AUTOBAUD Function, 2-10 Module Redundancy, 1-21
Clear to Send (CTS), 2-10
KPS Module, 2-13
Data Carrier Detect (DCD), 2-10
Data Set Ready (DSR), 2-10
KTRE, 1-15
Data Terminal Ready (DTR), 2-9 KVC, 1-12
Dial-up Modem, 2-11
Request to Send (RTS), 2-9 —L—
Ring Indication (RI), 2-10 LED, 5-1
Hardware Requirements, 2-8 Local
Connection Methods, 2-9 MX-2100 Management, 1-4
Supervisory Port Interface Characteristics, 2-8 Main Link Modem Loop - Loop 3, 5-11
Terminal Characteristics, 2-8 Local Channel Loop, 5-13

I-2 MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

Local Configuration Set-up Procedure ML, 5-2
Channel Parameters, 3-12 ML_MODE, 3-10, E-2
General Configuration Procedure, 3-7 MODE, E-6
Main Link Parameters, 3-11 Modules
SP Parameters, 3-12 Control Logic, 1-10
System Parameters, 3-9, E-1 I/O, 1-12
LOG_OFF, E-8 Main Link, 1-10
Loopback Timing, 1-43 Option, 1-12
Power Supply, 1-11
—M— Multidrop Configurations, 1-26
Main Link Configuration Parameters Multiplexing, 1-16
B CH, E-6
BUFFER_SIZE, E-4 —N—
CODE, E-5 Normal Indications, 4-12, 4-17
CRC-4, E-5
DSR&CTS, E-4
—O—
FRAME, E-5
FUNCTION, E-5
Operating Instructions
I TS CODE, E-5 Front Panel Controls and Indicators, 4-7
INTERFACE, E-4 Malfunction, 4-17
ISDN STANDARD, E-6 Normal Indications, 4-17
MASK, E-6 Turn Off, 4-18
MODE, E-6 Turn On, 4-16
SPEED, E-4 Option Modules, 1-12
SYNC, E-5 Organization of MX-2100 Display, 4-9
TIMING, E-4 Out-of-Band Management, 1-5
Main Link Interface Characteristics, 1-48
Main Link Loops —P—
Local Main Link Modem Loop - Loop 3, 5-11 Parity, 3-12
Remote Main Link Loop, 5-9 PARITY, E-7
Remote Main Link Modem Loop - Loop 2, 5-11
Physical Description
Main Link Modules, 1-10 Control Logic Modules, 1-10
Main Link Parameters - Specific Configuration I/O Modules, 1-12
Instructions, 3-11 KAI, 1-12
BUFFER_SIZE, 3-11 KCL.2, 1-10
DSR&CTS, 3-11 KDI, 1-12
SPEED, 3-11 KHS, 1-13
TIMING, 3-11 MX-2100, 1-6
Main Link Timing, 1-45 MX-2100 Front Panel, 1-8
Main System Features, 1-1 MX-2100 Rear Panel, 1-7
Management MX-2104, 1-8
Domains Under SNMP, C-3 MX-2104 Front Panel, 1-10
Equipment Management Methods, 1-32 MX-2104 Rear Panel, 1-9
In-Band, 1-5, 1-34 KLS, 1-13
Local MX-2100, 1-4 KMBE, 1-15
Local Management, 1-33 KML, 1-10
Out-of-Band, 1-5, 1-35 KPS, 1-11
Remote MX-2100, 1-4 KTRE, 1-15
Remote Management, 1-33 KVC, 1-12
System, 1-32 Main Link Modules, 1-10
Management Communication Port, 1-38 Option Modules, 1-12
Dial Port Connector, 1-38 Power Supply Modules, 1-11
Ethernet Port, 1-38 POP_ALARM, E-8
Supervisory Port Connector, 1-38 Power Supply
Management Using Supervision Terminal Considerations, 2-7
Hardware Requirements, 2-8 Modules, 1-11
MASK, E-6 Power Supply Modules
Messages, Alarm, 5-1 Current and Power Capabilities, 2-6
Current and Power Requirements, 2-3

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual I-3

Power-Up with Supervision Terminal Connected, Supervision Language, 4-1
4-12 Command Language Syntax, 4-1
PRBS Transmission, 5-14 Command Options, 4-2
Priority Bumping, 1-27 Command Protocol, 4-3
Commands, F-2
PWD, E-8
Index of Commands, 4-4
Supervision Terminal Operating Instructions
—R—
Control Session, 4-15
Ratings of Ring and Feed Voltage Supplies, 2-7 Ending a Control Session, 4-15
Rear Panel Power-Up with Supervision Terminal Connected,
MX-2100, 1-7 4-12
MX-2104, 1-9 Starting a Session - Multiple MX-2100, 4-14
Redundancy, 1-20 Starting a Session - Single MX-2100, 4-13
KML Module, 1-21 Supervisory Port Configuration Parameters
KPS Module, 1-21 AUXILIARY_DEVICE, E-8
Remote CTS, E-7
Channel Loop, 5-13 DATA, E-7
In-Band Management, 1-5 DCD_DEL, E-7
MX-2100 Management, 1-4 DSR, E-7
Main Link Loop, 5-9 INTERFACE, E-7
Main Link Modem Loop - Loop 2, 5-11 LOG_OFF, E-8
Out-of-Band Management, 1-5 PARITY, E-7
Request to Send, 2-9 POP_ALARM, E-8
Requirements PWD, E-8
Power Supply Modules, 2-3 SPEED, E-7
RI, 2-10 Supervisory Port Connector, 1-38
Ring Indication, 2-10 Supervisory Port Interface Characteristics, 2-8
RTS, 2-9 Switch Mode, 1-30
Switched Backup Operation, 1-28
—S— Using Dial-up Modems, 1-28
Setting Internal Jumpers Using ISDN Lines, 1-29
KPS Module, 2-13 SYNC, E-5
Site Requirements, 2-2 System Configuration Parameters
SNMP Environment, C-1 DWLD_BW_B, E-2
Management Domains Under SNMP, C-3 System Configuration Parameters
SNMP Management CLK_FBACK, E-2
IP Environment, C-4 CLK_MASTER, E-1
SNMP Environment, C-1 DWLD_BW_A, E-2
SNMP Principles, C-1 ML_MODE, E-2
SNMP TRAPS, C-8 System Installation
SNMP Principles, C-1 Grounding, 2-2
SNMP TRAPS, C-8 Site Requirements, 2-2
Software Download System Management, 1-32
Cold (Local) Installation, D-1 System Parameters - Specific Configuration
General, D-1 Instructions, 3-9, E-1
Warm Installation (Upgrading), D-3 ACTIVE_ML, 3-10
SP Parameters Specific Configuration Instructions CLK_FBACK, 3-9
Data, 3-12 CLK_MASTER, 3-9
Management, 3-12 DWLD_BW_A, DWLD_BW_B, 3-9
Parity, 3-12 ML_MODE, 3-10
Speed, 3-12 System Supervision and Configuration, 1-4
Speed, 3-12, E-7 System Timing Considerations, 1-39
SPEED, 3-11, E-4 DCE Timing, 1-42
Starting a Session DTE Timing, 1-40
Multiple MX-2100, 4-14 External DCE Timing, 1-41
Single MX-2100, 4-13 Internal Timing, 1-43, 1-44
Loopback Timing, 1-43
Sub Link Timing, 1-48
Main Link Timing, 1-45
Supervision and Configuration, 1-4

I-4 MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual

—T— —U—
Technical System Characteristics, 1-51 Using the Front Panel Push-buttons, 4-9
Terminal Characteristics, 2-8
TIMING, 3-11, E-4 —W—
Timing Modes of ISDN Channels, 1-47 Warm Installation (Upgrading) Procedure -
Tone Injection, 5-15 Windows-Based Stations, D-3
Turn Off, 4-18 Downloading Procedure, D-3
Turn On, 4-16

MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual I-5

I-6 MX-2100/2104 Installation and Operation Manual
 DC Power Supply Connection – Terminal Block Connector
Note: Ignore this supplement if the unit is AC-powered.
Certain DC-powered units are equipped with a plastic 3-pin VDC-IN power input connector, located on the unit
rear panel. Supplied with such a unit, is a mating Terminal Block (TB) type connector plug for attaching to your
power supply cable.
Connect the wires of your power supply cable to the TB plug, according to the voltage polarity and assembly
instructions provided below.
DC Power Input Wire stripping
Connector 20 mm
Caution: Prepare all connections to the TB plug (on unit panel)
dimensions
before inserting it into the unit’s VDC-IN connector. 5 mm

Preparing and Connecting the TB Plug

Refer to Figure 1 for assistance. Terminal screws
1. Strip the insulation of your power supply
wires according to the dimensions shown.
2. Place each wire lead into the appropriate TB
plug terminal according to the voltage
polarity mapping shown in Figure 2. (If a Nylon cable tie
terminal is not already open, loosen its See Figure 2
screw). Afterwards, tighten close the three for mapping
terminal screws. Mating
TB Connector
3. Pull a nylon cable tie (supplied) around the Plug
DC power
cable
power supply cable to secure it firmly to the
TB plug grip
TB plug grip (pass the tie through the holes
on the grip). Figure 1

4. Isolate the exposed terminal screws/wire leads using a plastic

sleeve or insulating tape, to prevent the possibility of short-circuit. TB Connector
Plug
5. Connect the assembled power supply cable to the unit by
inserting the TB plug into the unit’s VDC-IN connector until it
snaps into place.
0 -48
or
DC Power Supply Wire Voltage Polarity (-24 )
Refer to Figure 2 for proper mapping of the power supply wire leads
Chassis (frame)
to the TB plug’s three terminals. Ground
+ -
Positive pole 24/48VDC Negative pole
Warning:
• Reversing the wire voltage polarity can cause damage to the unit! Figure 2
• Always connect a ground (earth) wire to the TB plug’s Chassis
(frame) Ground terminal. Connecting the unit without a protective
ground, or interruption of the grounding (for example, by using an
extension power cord without a grounding conductor) can cause
harm to the unit or to the equipment connected to it!

SUP-221-01/02